Home

AC Variable Speed Drive - Soprani Rappresentanze industriali

1. E w1 w2 E A y od E TT To 0000 0000 m Ld MEE e Y Na p D1 B ILI i w2 Figure 2 4 LSLV0055 0220 S100 200 V 400 V Table 2 1 Dimensions per frame single phase 200 V mm inches Inverter capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B 0 68 59 128 120 4 5 128 4 4 4 LSLV0004S100 1 een 2 68 2 32 5 04 4 72 0 18 5 04 0 16 0 16 0 16 100 91 128 120 4 5 130 4 5 4 5 4 5 LSLVI 100 1 PEIUS 3 94 3 58 5 04 4 72 0 18 5 12 0 18 0 18 0 18 100 91 128 120 4 5 145 4 5 4 5 4 5 LSLV0015S100 1 Epon 3 94 3 58 5 04 4 72 0 18 5 71 0 18 0 18 0 18 140 132 128 120 4 145 4 5 4 25 4 5 LSLV0022S100 1 eas 5 51 5 20 5 04 4 72 0 16 5 71 0 18 0 17 0 18 LSS 2 Standard Table 2 2 Dimensions per frame 3 phase 200 V mm inches Inverter capacity Wi W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B 0 68 59 128 120 4 5 123 4 4 4 io 2 68 2 32 5 04 4 72 0 18 4 84 0 16 0 16 0 16 68 59 128 120 4 5 128 4 4 4 ad 2 68 2 32 5 04 4 72 0 18 5 04 0 16 0
2. C icati LCD Initial Control ommunication nitia mode address display Setting range value 00 Jump code ump 1 99 24 O A 3 olo Code 01 0h1301 Accelerating Ace jo Linear X A 626 lolo pattern Pattern 0 i Linear 02 0h1302 Decelerating Dec S curve XA 626 lolo pattern Pattern S curve 303 0h1303 acceleration Acc S 1 100 40 X A 62 lolo start point Start gradient S curve 04 0h1304 acceleration Aces Engl 1 100 40 X A 6 26 olo end point gradient S curve 905 0h1305 San DS d a 40 XA pee lolo start point Start gradient S curve 06 0h1306 deceleration Docs Eng 1 100 40 X A 6 26 olo end point gradient 0 Acc 07 0h1307 Start mode Start Mode 0 Acc X A 6 34 O O 1 Dc Start 0 Dec 1 Dc Brake 08 0h1308 Stop mode Stop Mode Free Run 9 pec XA 635 lolo 3 Reserved 4 Power Braking Selection of 0 None 09 0h1309 prohibited Run 4 Forward Prev 0 None X A 6 20 olo rotation Prevent direction 2 Reverse Prev 3 0 No 10 0h130A Starting with Power on 0 No O A 620 lolo power on Run Yes 10 49 0h130C DC braking De Start 0 00 60 00 s 0 00 XA 6 344 lolo time at startup Time Amount of Dc Inj o x 13 0h130D applied DC Level 0 200 50 X A 6 34 olo Output 44 0h130E blocking time Dc Block 000 60 00 s 0 10 XA 6 35 olo before DC Time braking 15 0h130F DC braking De Brake 0 00 60 00 s 1 00 X A 6 35
3. P3 terminal 67 0h1543 function P3 Define 3 RST 5 BX X A 8 17 O IO setting P4 terminal 68 0h1544 function P4 Define 4 External Trip 3 RST X A 8 10 O IO setting P5 terminal 69 0h1545 function P5 Define 5 BX 7 Sp L X A 8 16 O IO setting P6 terminal 70 0h1546 function P6 Define 6 JOG 8 Sp M X A 7 7 Oo O setting P7 terminal 71 0h1547 function P7 Define 7 Speed L 9 Sp H X A 6 13 O IO setting 8 Speed M 9 Speed H 11 XCEL L 12 XCEL M 13 RUN Enable 14 3 Wire 15 2nd Source 16 Exchange 17 Up 18 Down 20 U D Clear 21 Analog Hold 22 Term Clear PID 2 Openloop 24 P Gain2 25 XCEL Stop 26 2nd Motor 34 Pre Excite 38 Timer In 7 66 40 dis Aux Ref 7 3 46 FWD JOG 7 8 47 REVJOG 7 8 49 XCEL H Multi function DI On 85 0h1555 input O 10000 ms 10 O A 6 42 O O Delay terminal on filter LSis 10 21 10 Table of Functions Control LCD display Initial Communication 7 value address Setting range Multi function DI Of 86 0h1556 input 0 10000 ms 3 O A 6 42 Oo 0 Delay terminal off filter Multi ped function A contact 87 0h1557 input PINGINO 0 qo 000 XA 6 42 O C Sel 0000 io 4 B contact selection NC Multi step 89 0h1559 command Check 1 5090 ms 1 X A 6 13 O ime dela
4. C icati LCD Initial Control ommunication nitia d address display Setting range 18 0h1B12 Overload Ol Warn 50 200 150 O A 8 3 olo alarm level Level 19 0h1B13 Overload OL Warn 6 9 40 0 8 10 0 O A 8 3 olo warning time Time 0 None Motion at OL Trip 1 Free i 20 0h1B14 overload fault Select 1 Free Run Run O A 8 3 O O 2 Dec 21 ohiB15 Overload fault OL Trip 45 2pp1a 180 O A 8 3 olo level Level 22 oniBig Overload fault OL Trip 55 0 0 s 60 0 oA 8 3 olo time Time Underload 0 No 25 0h1B19 warning UL Warn 0 No O A 815 lolo i Sel 1 Yes selection 26 0h1B1A Underload ULWam 55 600 0 s 100 O A 815 lolo warning time Time 0 None 27 0h1B1B Underload ul trip Sell 1 Free Run 0 None O A 815 lolo fault selection 2 Dec Underload UL Trip 28 0h1B1C fault time Time 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A 8 15 Oo O Underload UL LF 29 0h1B1D lower limit Level 10 30 30 O A 8 15 OJo level Underload UL BE 30 Oh1B1E upper limit aval 30 100 30 O A 8 15 ollo level No motor No Mot 0 None 31 Oh1B1F Motion at gee m 0 None O A 8 17 o o detection p 1 Free Run No motor 32 0h1B20 detection e 1 100 5 O A 817 lolo current level No motor 33 0h1B21 detection NO Motor Q1 10 0 s 3 0 O A 817 lolo ime delay L 0 None Electronic ETH Tii 40 0h1B28 thermal fault Sel Pg Free Run 0 None O A 8 1 O O selection 2 Dec f 0 Self cool a 41 0h
5. Input Bon Rated current No load Rated slip eer Leakage Voltage kw A current A frequency Hz resistor Q Inductance mH 0 4 2 4 1 4 3 33 6 70 26 9 0 75 3 4 1 7 3 00 2 600 17 94 1 5 6 4 2 6 2 67 1 170 9 29 2 2 8 6 3 3 2 33 0 840 6 63 3 7 13 8 5 0 2 33 0 500 4 48 S 5 5 21 0 7 1 1 50 0 314 3 19 7 5 28 2 9 3 1 33 0 169 2 844 11 40 0 12 4 1 00 0 120 1 488 15 53 6 15 5 1 00 0 084 1 118 18 5 65 6 19 0 1 00 0 068 0 819 22 76 8 21 5 1 00 0 056 0 948 0 2 0 7 0 5 3 33 28 00 121 2 0 4 1 4 0 8 3 33 14 0 80 8 0 75 2 0 1 0 3 00 7 81 53 9 1 5 3 7 1 5 2 67 3 52 27 9 2 2 5 0 1 9 2 33 2 520 19 95 3 7 8 0 2 9 2 33 1 500 13 45 ag 5 5 12 1 4 1 1 50 0 940 9 62 T 16 3 54 1 33 0 520 8 53 11 23 2 7 2 1 00 0 360 4 48 15 31 0 9 0 1 00 0 250 3 38 18 5 38 0 11 0 1 00 0 168 2 457 22 44 5 12 5 1 00 0 168 2 844 LSis 7 Application Functions B Motor parameter tuning Rs Lsigma Ls Tr Noload curr bA 20 Auto Tuning Select the type of auto tuning and carry out auto tuning Select one from the following items and press the Enter ENT key to execute auto tuning 0 None Display the initial auto tuning items Indicate that auto tuning is completed after it is finished 1 ALL The motor while rotating measures the motor parameters Stator resistor Rs leakage inductance Lsigma stator inductance Ls no load current Noload Curr rotor time constant Tr etc are measu
6. e nana nana 6 1 Introduction of S100 Basic Functions sssssssssseseeeeeeneeeneenn nennen nnns 6 2 Frequency Setting Methods sse eem eem enne eene 6 3 Frequency HOLD of Analog Command 6 4 Changing the display from Frequency to Revolutions RPM eese 6 5 Multi Step Speed Frequency Setting oooomocioninnnnnnnnnnnnncnnccnnncnanarcnnnrn cnn rana 6 6 Setting Method of Operation Command sssssseeneenreneeenenn 6 7 Local Remote Switching Operation Using ESC Key 6 8 Prohibition of Forward or Reverse Rotation Run Prevent 6 9 Starting with Power on Power On Run sess enn rennen rennen 6 10 Starting on Reset After a Trip Takes Place Reset Restart sssssssseees 6 11 Settirig Acc DEC Titre eer eR E REM ERES 6 12 Setting Acc Dec Pattern ote t eee ete e ee epe eei 6 13 Acc Dec Stop Command anei a e esent enne nennen 6 14 V F Voltage Control scott 6 15 Torque BOOSEL iii iaa iia 6 16 Adjustment of Motor Output Voltage ooonnocinnnnnnninnocinnocannccanacnnnarnnnon cnn rn r arca narran 6 17 Start Mode Selection ciar 6 18 Stop Mode Selectlon 2 n ne t Do ed 6 19 ErequencyLEllfilb A NNNM 6 20 Selection of Second Operation Method ssssssseeeeeeeneenennn 6 21 Multi function Input Terminal Control Application Functions
7. OU 30 Trip Out Mode Select the terminal and relay to be used for a fault output and then No 29 failure mode Trip Mode in OU 31 and 33 When the inverter has a fault then the relevant terminal and relay are activated You can set the activation condition according to the types of fault as in the following Table 7 26 Setting the activation condition based on the types of failure Function EM Right end side of the display is bit 1 Y Activated when a low voltage occurs Y Activated when a failure other than low voltage fault Y Activated upon Pr 08 or Pr 09 when the inverter failed to restart automatically OU 53 TripOut On Dly OU 54 TripOut OffDly If a fault occurs the fault relay or multi function output are activated after the time defined in OU 53 When a reset is inputted the contact becomes off after the time defined in OU 54 LSis 7 67 7 Application Functions 7 37 Output Terminal Delay Time And Contact Types You can adjust the activation time of the terminal block output terminals and relays You can set the on and off delay times You can select the contact A normal open or contact B normal closed B Output terminal delay time Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range OU so Multi function output po On Delay 0 00 0 00 100 00 sec On delay OU 51 Multi function output po or Delay 0 00 0 00 100 00 sec Off delay
8. Seiting type Function Seiting type Function 4 Output Power 18 PID Ref Value 5 WHour Counter 19 PID Fbk Value 6 DCLink Voltage 20 Torque 9 V1 Monitor V 21 Torque Limit 10 V1 Monitor 23 Speed Limit 13 V2 Monitor V 7 40 Operation Time Monitors2 Bate alley Initial settings display CNF 70 On time 0 00 00 00 00 min CNF 71 Run time 0 00 00 00 00 min CNF 72 Time Reset 0 No CNF 74 Fan time 0 00 00 00 00 min CNF 75 Fan Time Reset 0 No CNF 70 On time When the power is supplied to the inverter the time is accumulated The display window shows the following information Year month day hour minute 0 00 00 00 00 CNF71 Run time The operation command is inputted and the accumulated time during which the voltage is outputted from the inverter is displayed The information on the display window is the same with the accumulated power supply time On time CNF 72 Time Reset If it is set to No 1 Yes the accumulated power supply time on time and accumulated operation time run time are deleted and 0 00 00 00 00 is displayed CNF 74 Fan time Display the accumulated time during which the inverter cooling fan operates The information on the display window is the same with the accumulated time of cooling fan operation On time CNF 75 Fan Time Reset If it is set to No 1 Yes the accumulated time of cooling fan operation on time and accumulated op
9. Function Reference display Setting range Initial value page 00 Jump Code Jump code 1 99 1 0 English 01 Language Sel keypad language selection English 7 71 1 Korean 02 LCD Contrast LCD contrast adjustment 7 54 10 Inv S W Ver Main body S W version gt 7 54 11 KeypadS W Ver Keypad S W version 7 54 12 KPD Title Ver Keypad title version 7 54 20 Anytime Para Status ud display 0 Frequency 0 Frequency 7 73 21 Monitor Line 1 Monitor is display item 1 Speed 0 Frequency 7 72 TUNE Monitor mode display item Output 2 Output y 22 Monitor Line 2 2 2 Current Current 7 72 3 Output Voltage 23 Monitor Line 3 Moniitor mode display iter 4 Output Power F Opu 7 72 3 Voltage 5 WHour Counter LSIS 10 41 10 Table of Functions display Setting range Initial value pag 6 DCLink Voltage 7 DI State 8 DO State 9 V1 Monitor V 10 V1 Monitor 13 V2 Monitor V 14 V2 Monitor 12 Monitor mA 16 12 Monitor 17 PID Output 18 PID Ref Value PID Fdb 13 Value 20 Torque 21 Torque Limit 23 Speed Limit 24 Mon Mode Init Monitor mode initialization 2 0 No 7 72 30 Option 1 Type Option slot 1 type display 0 None 0 None 7 54 31 Option 2 Type Option slot 2 type display 6 Ethernet 0 None 7 54 32 Option 3 Type Option slot 3 type display 9 CANopen 0 None 7 54 0
10. After changing the frequency with keypad press the program ENT key to apply the change Set the operation group Frq code to 0 Keypad 1 When setting the desired frequency from the command frequency code 0 00 of the operation group press the setting key ENT to apply the frequency change It is not possible to set beyond the max frequency dr 20 B Frequency Setting by Keypad 2 KeyPad 2 LCD Setting display Setting range Operation 0 00 Command frequency 0 00 ERG Hz Frequency Setting Methods Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad 2 Operation Frq Select 1 from the Frq code of the operation group To set the desired frequency from the command frequency code 0 00 of the operation group press the Up key 4 or Down key V to change the frequency immediately Select this function if you want to use the Up and Down keys for volume resistance It is not possible to set beyond the max frequency dr 20 15 12 terminal input when switch of Analog Input I2 is selected as V LSis 63 6 Basic Functions B Frequency Setting by Terminal Block V1 Voltage Input V1 Group Code Frequency Setting Methods Freq Ref Src 2 V1 z Operation Frq Using the voltage V1 input terminal of the terminal block supply 10 to 10 V or 0 to 10 V When supplying 10 to 10 V you can change the rotating direction of the motor depending on the sign of voltage signal 1 When supply
11. 2 22 cece ec unnan wes ENE DAAE NAA EAEE 7 1 Various Application Operation Functions of S100 eee cece eee eters eeae eens tena nan cannncnns 7 2 Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command Kar JOJ 6 1 fl AORTA 7 4 Up down operatio odo oai oouei p RE qe de ede tu dur 7 5 G WIFe Operatlon ecrire n eC ERR e RE e E ODER e ette s 7 6 Sale Operation Mode eroe DE ERR RR E T Dwell OoperatiOn unnm een ren e RE I Rr i Eg aap edd 7 8 Slip compensation operation ssssssssseseeeeeeeneeen nennen neret 35 9 PIB GontiolE eue EnU LIMIT En LI Rd dir 7 10 Auto Tuning 7 11 Sensorless Vector Control sese rennen emeret 7 12 Kinetic Energy Buffering eseeeeeneeeneeen em emere nemen 7 13 Energy Saving Operation sssssssssssessseeeseneneeneeenrenn rennen rerit ennnnen 7 14 Speed Search Operation CAS Automaticirestart operation ea a b eee 7 16 Motor audible noise adjustMent oonoccnnnncnnncninnnnnoncnnonnnannnnnrnc nana nnr cnn cnn T17 26d Motor Operation roe repe WC eee eee ea 7 18 Commercial Switching Operation 7 19 Gooling fan control uU REATUS ee 7 20 Input Power Frequency Selection eere 7 21 Inverter Input Voltage SelectiON oonnnnnnnnnnininnnnnnncnnoccnnacnna rc narnia r arca 7 22 Reading Writing and Saving Par
12. AC Variable Speed Drive 0 4 22 kW 200 400V LSLV S100 User Manual N Safety Precautions Please read the Safety Precautions before y using this product After using this manual please place it in a location where people can easily find it ape www lsis biz About This Manual About This Manual This manual explains the specifications installation operation features and maintenance of LSLV S100 series inverter for users with basic knowledge on the inverter Before using LSLV S100 series inverter please read this manual and understand the functionality performance installation and usage of the product In addition please ensure that the end user and maintenance manager have read this manual LSIs iii Product Capacity Selection Process Product Capacity Selection Process ES gt START Calculate the load torque at normal operation elect the capacity based on the condition of Rated Torque gt Load Torque at normal state YES _ Rny limit in acceleration deceleration time NO Calculate the acceleration time AAA e Nu roo Increase the capacity by 2 gt _ gt ee NO one level YES Calculate the acceleration time T S tisfy the time y dd NO 7 en s8 g YES Calculate the deceleration time ES gap Bm a Satisfy the time
13. Turn on or off the fans installed to cool the heat sink of the inverter body This is used when start stop is frequent or a quiet environment free from fan noise is required and the life of the cooling fan s are extended No 1 During Run only activated during operation If the power is supplied to the inverter and operation command is inputted the cooling fan is activated If the operation command is off and inverter output is cut off the cooling fan stops If the heat sink temperature is above a certain level the cooling fan is activated regardless of the operation command No 1 Always On always activated When the power is supplied to the inverter the fan is always activated No 2 Temp Control temperature monitoring Even if the power is supplied to the inverter and operation command is inputted the cooling fan is not activated However if the heat sink temperature is above a certain level the cooling fan is activated Even if Ad 64 is set to During Run if the heat sink temperature is above a certain level due to harmonic waves or noise the cooling fan is activated as a protection 7 20 Input Power Frequency Selection Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting Unit range bA 10 Input power 60 50HzSel 0 60Hz 0 1 frequency Select the input power frequency When it is changed from 60 Hz to 50 Hz all the frequency or rpm related items set to 60 Hz or higher change to 50 Hz When it i
14. ssesssssssssssssesses senes nnne sen EEEEE EESE EEEE senes snnt Table 9 5 0h0100 0h0117 Currently registered CM Grp parameter cocococcccncccocncoonanonccnnn conocia non cnn cnn nc non r arca nennen Table 9 6 0h0200 OhO23F Currently registered User Grp parameter Table 9 7 0h0240 OhO2A3 Currently registered Macro Grp parameter oooooonnccnncccnoconoccconnnonnnanonnconc conocio no nn narran eene Table 9 8 CMD Using capital letter Table 9 9 ETrOTCO0E Ae xvi LSIs Table of Contents Table 9 10 ASSOlI code ivi hh nee be A aed net ba bete 9 14 Table 11 1 Protection function item from output current and input voltage 2 00 eee eeteeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeesseeseeeeeaees 11 1 Table 11 2 Protection function item via abnormal internal circuit and external signals e 11 2 Table 11 3 Protection function item via keypad and Option ceeceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeesaeseaeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaeesseeseneeseaees 11 3 Table 11 4 Alarm function item esesssssesseseseeeneeenenneeennen nnne nnn nnnennren trenes enr nenne eterne neret eren nre tentent eren nennen 11 4 LSis xv 1 Basic Considerations 1 1 Basic Considerations This section provides precautions and basic considerations you need to know before you use the inverter Features More powerful functions e V F function Slip compensation
15. 30Hz M 50 G x2x 60 50 300Hz 7 o E 30Hz M 30Hz M x50 G x2x 60 A 50 33Hz M Frq setup based main speed frequency command Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain A Aux speed frequency command Hz or RPM or gain f the frequency is changed to RPM RPM will be used instead of Hz Usage example 2 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and l2 analog voltage is aux speed Conditions e Main speed M setting Frq Keypad frequency set as 30 Hz e Max frequency Max Freq setting dr 20 400 Hz e Aux speed A setting bA 01 12 expressed as aux speed Hz or percentage depending on the conditions Aux speed gain G setting bA 03 50 n 01 32 Factory default If 10 4 mAis inputted to 12 the frequency for 20 mA is 60 Hz Therefore in the following table aux speed A is 24 Hz 60 Hz x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA or 40 100 x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA LSis 7 5 7 Application Functions Table 7 5 Usage example 2 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and I2 analog voltage is aux speed Setting type Final command frequency 0 M Hz G A Hz 30Hz M 50 G x 24Hz A 42Hz M Hz G A 9 30Hz M x 50 G x40 A 6Hz 2 M Hz G A 9 30Hz M 50 G x40 A 150Hz 3 M Hz M Hz G A 30Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x40 A 36Hz 4 M Hz G 2 A 50 Hz 30Hz M 50 G x2x 40 A 50 x60
16. Figure 7 16 Pre PID operation LSis 7 21 7 Application Functions B PID sleep mode AP 37 PID Sleep DT AP 38 PID Sleep Freq If the inverter continues to operate during a period defined in AP 37 PID Sleep DT under the frequency defined in AP 38 Sleep Freq the operation stops and enters the PID sleep mode For the criteria for returning to PID operation mode from PID sleep mode refer to AP 39 PID WakeUp Lev AP 39 PID WakeUp Lev AP 40 PID WakeUp Mod Set the criteria for starting PID operation from the PID sleep mode explained above If O below level is selected in AP 40 PID operation restarts in the case that the feedback value is below the size defined in AP 39 PID WakeUp Lev If 1 above level is selected the operation starts when it is more than the value defined in AP 39 If 2 beyond level is selected the operation restarts when the difference between reference and feedback is more than the value defined in AP 39 PID Sleep Freq AP 38 PID WakeUp Lev AP 39 PID Feedback AS A A A AO pay Output frequency PX PID operation PID Sleep DT AP 37 Figure 7 17 PID sleep mode B PID operation switching PID Openloop In the multi function terminal block if the terminal set to No 23 PID Openloop in In 65 71 Px Define is inputted the PID operation stops and is switched to the general operation if the terminal is off the PID operation restarts 7 22 LS Is 7 Application Functions 7
17. LSis 5 11 5 Using the Keypad 5 8 Monitoring Operation Status B Displaying output current How to monitor the output current in the operation group 1 Indicates the first code of the function group 1 Press the up key A or down key W until CUr is displayed 2 moe Indicates the code that can monitor the output current Leer Press the Enter key ENT 3 5 ri Indicates that the inverter output current is currently 5 A Lt Press the Enter key ENT 4 rit The output current monitor code is displayed L LIU The dCL inverter DC link voltage or VOL inverter output voltage in the operation group can be monitored in the same way as described above 5 12 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad B Displaying failure status How to monitor the inverter failure status in the operation group Accelerating Frequency 7 ru af LIL Operation group 1 nr f the overcurrent trip occurs it is marked as shown in the left LL Press the Enter key ENT Press the up key A 30 00 Indicates the operation frequency when a trip occurs LI LIL Press the up key A 5 n Indicates the output current when a trip occurs LL Press the up key A Indicates the operation status A trip has occurred during 4 pr 8 acceleration Press the STOP RST key 5 3D UD The trip is released and the preset frequency is displayed LSis
18. Unit Warning signal can be output in advance using the multi function output terminal before inverter overload protection function IOLT operates When it reaches 60 of accumulated time 150 36 sec to operate inverter overload protection operation 150 1 min warning signal is output Command Loss Speed Command Loss Setting speed via analog input of the terminal block communication option or keypad etc you can select the motion of inverter in case speed command is lost due to signal cable disconnection and so on the speed Setting Group Code LCD display command range Pr 12 Motion at speed Lost Cmd lr E command loss Mode Pr 13 Time to judge speed Lost Cmd 1 0 0 1 120 Sec command loss Time Operation frequency fre d z Pr 14 at speed command Lost Preset F 0 00 s dl Hz loss i frequency Pr 15 Analogimputloss AlLostLevel o Halfof x1 judgement level OU 31 de relay Relay 1 item 13 Lost E Command i OU 33 Multi jou output Q1 Define Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode In case of speed command loss inverter motion is selected Table 8 3 Inverter motion setting in case of speed command loss XML Speed command immediately becomes operation frequency without 3 Hold Input 0 None A protective operation 1 Free Run Inverter blocks output Motor performs free run 2 Dec Motor decelerates and then stops to time set at Pr 07 Trip Dec Time For 10 se
19. Figure 4 2 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 15 kW 200 V 22 kW 200 400 V Fig re 4 3 Removing IO bracket repete e ee d dre edo ferte She pad redo aa bre dede ue ep et eene ade Figure 6 1 Frequency setting by voltage input into the terminal block esesessseeeeeenenneneenen emere rennen iBle MEM PAAR LER Figure 6 3 1n 08 V4 Volt xt In 11 V1 Percy iii d rede east devi Lee edo bane Hire dde dede ep tete pede Fig re 6 4 In 1 7 V T QUtIZIng c noce tte E ENERO ION REID Im DO e ete itte PR ER T Figure 6 5 Settings for the voltage with the range of 10 to 10 V supplied to the V1 terminal sseeen Figure 6 6 Output frequency for the bidirectional voltage input 10 to 10 V nemen Figure 6 7 Example of In 12 V1 volt X1 In 15 V1 Perc y2 ooooconcccnoccconnnonnononcnancnonnnonnnnnnnnnono nono none nn nennt nenne eterne tenete nnne nnne Figure 6 8 Setting the gradient of output frequency and offset value for the magnitude of current Figure 6 9 Setting the gradient of output frequency and offset value for the magnitude of pulse seesesesss Figure 6 10 Frequency HOLD of analog command Figure 6 11 Example of 8 speed setting Figure 6 12 Terminal Block Operating Command 1 Figure 6 13 Terminal Block Operating Command 2 Figure 6 14 Comparison of the Power on Run function when it is set to Ad 10 0 or Ad 102 1 ssseee Figure 6 15 Comparison
20. Type Contents This fault occurs if either or both of the safety relay input signals SA SB are lost B Protection via option Table 11 3 Protection function item via keypad and option SEG LCD nten Notes display display Type Contents 9t This fault occurs if the frequency command Lost or operation command via the terminal a Lr Comman Level block communication or other without d using the keypad is lost Works only when Pr 12 is set to any value other than No 0 n Lr Occurs if basic I O or external communication card is not connected to 11774 lOBoard Lateh inverter or there is poor connection 5 O IL L6 Trip Co E Occurs if fault persists for longer than 5 LFP seconds ParaWrit Occurs if communication is not established Applicable Bn e Tri Latch during parameter writing due to a Loader when the LCD p cable problem bad connection etc keypad is used E Option Occurs if there is a problem between the Applicable utr rae 4 Latch inverter main body and an option card when an option i P communication is used LSis 11 3 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 2 Alarm Function Item Table 11 4 Alarm function item ix on LCD display Description This alarm signal occurs if the motor is over loaded Works only niii Over Load when Pr 17 is setto 1 If the signal is required to be sent to the h out
21. 2 A 50 PERRA de M iS 6 M HZ G 2 2 A 9 50 iS ie 300Hz reverse 7 M HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 30Hz M 30Hz M x50 G x2x 40 A 50 27Hz M Frq setting based main speed frequency command Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain A Aux speed frequency command Hz or RPM or gain 76 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 3 Jog Operation You can operate jog by using the terminal block or keypad multi keys 1 Terminal block based jog operation 1 Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range 0 50 Max dr 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10 00 frequency Hz dr 12 Jog operation JOG Acc Time 20 00 0 00 600 00 sec acceleration time dr 13 Jog operation JOG Dec Time 30 00 0 00 600 00 sec deceleration time Px terminal Px Define 65 71 function setting Px P1 P7 3 poe Select the jog frequency setting terminal among P1 P7 of multi function terminal block and select No 6 JOG for the function of the terminal block among In 65 In 71 If the jog terminal is inputted with operation command inputted the operation frequency moves to the jog frequency explained below dr 11 JOG Frequency Sets the frequency for jog operation The jog operation is the first priority except Dwell operation Therefore if a jog command is inputted while operating with multi step operation up down operation or 3 wire operation it operates based
22. 5 2 Display List for Numerals and Letters Do Boon Bw v i 1 n B E L Lt V L Y l 4 E d 3 d D 7 N L x H 4 E E H O Y Y a 5 E F H P z Tor Heros H 8 a S 9 4 J r T 52 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad 5 3 Menu Structure LSLV S100 series inverter is composed of 11 groups as shown in the following table Table 5 1 Function description per parameter group Group name Sign Function description 10 Basic parameters needed for operation such as target Operation group frequency and acceleration deceleration time etc Basic operation parameters such as jog operation motor Drive group ar capacity selection and torque boost and keypad operation related parameters Ln You can set the basic functions for motor parameters and Basic TUnCHOndgreup n multi step frequency j mt You can set acceleration deceleration patterns and Advanced function group Hd frequency limitation P r You can set the functions related to sensorless and vector Control function group LM controls Input terminal block You can set functions related to inverter input terminal A n block such as multi functional digital input and analog function group y input Output terminal block rit You can set output terminal block functions including relay function group LIL and analog output aH TS If the inverter is equipped with built in 485 communication Communication func
23. Monitor one of the following items in the user selection display code Initial value 0 Output Voltage Property O 7 104 LSIs 10 Table of Functions Communication LCD Initial j address display Setting range 0 Output voltage V 1 Output power kW 2 Torque kgf m Display 0 View All 89 OhOSES3 changed View 0 View All O 7 oyo parameters 1 Changed 0 Movement to ESC key initial position 90 0h115A function i 1 JOG Key 0 None X 7 ojlo selection 2 Local Remote 0 No 1 All Grp 2 dr Grp 3 bA Grp 4 Ad Grp 5 Cn Grp 93 0h115D U Miva AO 0 No XI7 olo 7 OU Grp 8 CM Grp 9 AP Grp 12 Pr Grp 13 M2Grp Operation 16 Grp 94 Oh115E PRSSWOId 0 9999 0 7 olo registration 95 0h115F Parameter locr 0 9999 0 7 olo setting Inverter 97 0h1161 software 7 OJO version 98 0h1162 IO ponard IO Se JA olo version display Ver Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 1 Can be displayed only when code value of dr 15 Torque Boost is Manual 2 Can be displayed only when code value of dr 15 Torque Boost is Manual LSis 10 5 10 3 Basic function group PAR gt bA Cc icati LCD In
24. Sc E Setting Px Px Define In 65 71 terminal function Px P1 P7 4 External Trip z Selection of BESES In 87 multi function DI NC NO Sel Bit input contact i i i AOI When using No 4 External Trip External fault among multi function input terminal functions the operation of the inverter can be stopped if an external fault occurs n 87 DI NC NO Sel You can select the type of the input contact If the dot mark of the switch is at the bottom 0 it operates as A contact Normal Open If the mark is at the top 1 it operates as B contact Normal Closed Corresponding terminal for each bit is as follows Multi function P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P Terminal Figure 8 6 Corresponding terminal for each bit Frequency In case of External Trip A contact point P6 A contact point In case of External Trip B B contact point Ope ation co and Ly 1 Figure 8 7 Selection of the type of input contact 8 10 LS 1s 8 O Protection Function 8 6 8 7 Inverter Overload When the inverter output current exceeds the motor rated current the protection operates to protect the inverter according to the characteristics in case of inverse proportion Setting Group Code LCD display OU 31 eee relay Relay 1 item Multi function r OU 33 output 1 item Q1 Define Setting range
25. Setting LCD display display Ad 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 1 DC Brake Output prior to y Ad 14 DC braking Dc Block Time 0 10 0 00 60 00 sec Ad 15 DC braking time Dc Brake Time 1 00 0 60 sec Ad 16 DC braking pc Brake Level 50 0 200 quantity Ad 17 we braking Dc Brake Freq 5 00 0 00 60 00 Hz requency When the deceleration begins with the stop command input and the frequency reaches the DC braking frequency Ad 17 Dc Brake Freq the motor receives DC voltage and stops Ad 14 Dc Block Time Set the time to block the inverter output before starting DC braking If the load inertia is large or the DC braking frequency Ad 17 Dc Brake Freq is high a trip may occur due to overcurrent when supplying DC voltage to the motor Therefore adjust this time to prevent an overcurrent trip Ad 15 Dc Brake Time Set the time to supply DC voltage to the motor LSis 6 35 6 Basic Functions Ad 16 Dc Brake Level You can adjust the DC braking quantity The reference is the rated current of the motor Ad 17 Dc Brake Freq Set the start frequency for DC braking When the inverter begins to decelerate and reaches this frequency it begins DC braking Notes If you use the dwell frequency and set it to a level lower than the DC braking frequency the dwell operation will not work but the DC braking will be performed instead Ad 14 Ad 15 OO comman E Figure 6 30 Stop after DC brakin
26. X 0 Manual X A 6 32 O X 046 0h1110 SON UA Fwd Boost 0 0 15 0 2 0 X A 6 32 lolx 207 0h1111 E ae Rev Boost 0 0 15 0 2 0 X A 6 32 eu 18 0h1112 Base frequency Base Freq pee 60 00 X A 6 29 19 0h1113 Start frequency Start Freq 0 01 10 00 Hz 0 50 X A 6 29 20 0h1114 PA Max Freq 40 00 400 00 60 00 XA 6 38 requency Speed unit Hz Rpm 0 Hz Display 0 Hz 21 0h1115 s O A OO selection Sel 1 Rpm Display Display Select the first item displayed on the inverter indicator upon Display power supply 0 80 0h1150 selection upon Operation O 7 oyo power supply o Operation frequency frequency 1 Acceleration time 7 It is not visible on the LCD keypad LSis 10 3 10 Table of Functions 81 Communication address 0h1151 Monitor item selection LCD display Setting range Deceleration time Operation 3 Command Methods Frequency 4 command method Multi step 5 speed frequency 1 Multi step 6 speed frequency 2 Multi step 7 speed frequency 3 Output current Motor revolution Inverter DC 1 voltage o User selection display dr 81 1 Present fault i status N Operation 13 direction selection Output 1 current 2 AB Motor 13 revolution 2 Inverter DC 1 voltage 2 Oo User selection display 2 dr 81 17
27. sssssssssssssseeeeneeeneeenennen nere 8 3 Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking sseeeeenneneneene 8 4 Inverter and Sequence Protection Function 6 5 External Fault Signal viii 8 6 Inverter Overload coiere ttr ei 86 7 COMIMANGEOSS 4 malita 8 8 Usage Setting of Dynamic Braking DB Resistor sessen 8 9 Underload Warning and Fault sess nennen nennen 8 10 Fan Fault Detection ohh RENI RuRminibat tuit docere 8 11 Selection of Operation in Case of Low Voltage Fault 8 12 Output Block by Multi Function Terminal sesssesseeeneeennenneen nennen 8 13 Fault Status Reset Method ooooonnccnnnocinononorncnonnonancnonanonnnc rro nro narrar rr rare 8 14 Selection of Operation in the case of Option Card Fault 8 15 Detection of Motor Disconnection at Inverter Output Terminal oonocinnnnnnninnnnonnnnonnncnnacanncnan 8 17 86 16 Fault Warming LISt iaa ERHEBEN UE GEM GS 9 RS 485 Communication Function eeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeneeee nennen tnnt nnns 9 1 Introduction of Communication Function sessssseeseeeneennneeneen nennen 9 1 1 Communication Standard ooooocconnccincccnoncnonnnnnoncnann nono n cnn c aan ao Aaaa aa iara anaa aaa 9 1 2 Communication System Configuration esssseseeeeeeneenne 9 1 3 B IJCUIEIDBOEEEEC x 9 1 4 Setting Operation Command a
28. 0 18 0 18 0 18 100 91 128 120 4 5 145 4 5 4 5 4 5 LSLVOO228100 4 904 350 504 4 72 0 18 571 0 18 0 18 0 18 LSLV00378100 4 140 132 128 120 4 145 45 425 45 LSLV0040S100 4 5 51 5 20 5 04 4 72 0 16 5 71 0 18 0 17 0 18 LSLV00558100 4 160 137 232 2165 105 140 5 5 LSLV00758100 4 6 30 5 39 9 13 8 52 0 41 5 51 0 20 0 20 LSLV01108100 4 180 157 290 2737 113 163 5 5 LSLVO1508100 4 7 09 6 18 11 4 10 8 0 44 6 42 0 20 0 20 LSLV01858100 4 220 1938 350 331 13 187 6 6 LSLV02208100 4 8 66 7 63 13 8 13 0 0 51 7 36 0 24 0 24 210 L S 1s y 2 Standard 2 1 6 Power Terminal Block Wiring and External Fuse Specifications Table 2 4 Specifications for terminal screws 1 rew Terminal st screw size q Applicable inverter paid 0 4 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 200V 0 75 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 Single phase 1 5 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 2 2 kW M4 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 0 4 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 0 75 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 1 5 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 2 2 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 2 5 2 5 14 14 3 7 kW M4 2 1 6 1 4 4 12 12 200V 4 kW M4 2 1 6 1 4 4 12 12 Th
29. 0 O A 8 13 olo i 0 Tri 79 0h1B4F Cooling fan FAN Trip P O Trip O A 816 lolo fault selection Mode 1 Warning 0 None Motion s 80 0h1B50 selection PtP 4 Free Run MITE OA 817 ol o at option trip 2 Dec Low voltage 81 0h1B51 airau LVT Delay 0 0 60 0 s 0 0 XA 816 lolo judgement delay time 90 0h1B5A Swarming 17 Ox information 91 0h1B5B Fault history 1 7 O O 92 0h1B5C Fault history 2 7 O O 93 0h1B5D Fault history 3 7 O O 94 Oh1B5E Fault history 4 7 O O 95 0h1B5F Fault history 5 7 O O The initial value 0000 will be displayed in SEG as po LSis 10 37 10 Table of Functions Control Communication LCD Initial Reference moge No address Name display Setting range Valde Property page Fault history 0 No 96 0h1B60 deletion 1 Ves 0 No 7 O O Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 27 Pr 10 will be displayed only when Pr 09 Retry Number is set to 0 or more 28 Pr 13 15 will be displayed only when Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode is not NONE 10 38 LSIS 10 Table of Functions 10 11 2nd Motor Function Group PAR M2 83 Control mode Communication LCD Setting range Initial Reference address display value page Jump gt 00 Jump code Code 1 99 14 O A ojo 04 0h1C04 Acceleratio
30. 100 0 0 0 O A 7 60 O O 66 0h1642 Pulse output monitor TO Monitor 0 0 1000 0 0 0 O A 7 60 O O ESS 1027 40 Tahlia Af bum 10 Table of Funct 10 8 Communication Function Group PAR aH r i Control Communication LCD Setting Initial address display range value 00 Jump code Jump Code 1 99 20 O A O0 Built in 01 0h1701 communication Int485 St ID 1 250 1 O A 9 3 OJO inverter ID ModB Built in 0 a 0 02 0h1702 communication Int485 Proto ModBus O A 9 3 olo protocol 2 LS Inv 485 RTU 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps Built in 3 9600 bps 03 0h1703 communication MAE p 2 O A 9 3 olo speed 4 19200 bps 9600 bps 5 38400 bps 6 56 Kbps 7 115 Kbps 0 D8 PN S1 Built in 1 D8 PN S2 04 0h1704 communication h are si OA 9 3 o o frame setting 2 D8 PE S1 D8 PN 3 D8 PO S1 Transmission 05 0h1705 delay Resp Delay 0 1000 ms 5 ms O A 9 4 OO after reception Communication 06 0h1706 optional ene 0 00 O A Option O O er S W version Communication 07 0h1707 option FBus ID 0 255 1 O A Option OO inverter ID FIELD BUS FBUS 08 0h1708 communication 12Mbps A Option O O BaudRate speed Communication 09 0h1709 option LED F eldBus O A Option O O LED status Numperot ParaStatus 30 0
31. 3rd and 4th bit of Pr 50 Stall Prevent should be On Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required or the motor may overheat and be damaged 53 The initial value 0000 will be displayed in SEG as TA LSis 8 Protection Function Pr 50 Stall Prevent When accelerating decelerating and driving at constant speed stall prevention motion can be selected separately When the dot mark of the switch is at the top corresponding bit is set When it is at the bottom it does not operate Bit setting status On Bit setting off state Off I Segment I LCD Table 8 1 Stall protection bit setting function Function Right end side of the display is bit 1 Y Selection of stall protection function during acceleration Selection of stall protection function while driving at constant speed Y Selection of stall protection function during deceleration Y Selection of flux braking function during deceleration 0001 Stall protection during acceleration When the amount of inverter output current exceeds the preset stall level Pr 52 54 etc during acceleration acceleration stops and then it decelerates When the amount of current remains above the stall level it is decelerated to start frequency dr 19 Start Freq When the amount of current decelerates to below the preset level while operating the stall protection functions it accelera
32. Acceleration stops when stall protection function operates during acceleration This might increase the actual acceleration time longer than the preset acceleration time Pr 51 Stall Freq 1 Pr 58 Stall Level 4 Separate stall protection level can be set for different frequency depending on the types of the load As shown in the figure below stall level can be set above the base frequency Lower limit and upper limit are set in the order of the number of stall frequency For example set range for Stall Freq 2 Stall Frequency 2 becomes a lower limit for Stall Freq 1 Stall Frequency 1 an upper limit for Stall Freq 3 Stall Frequency 3 Stall level Stall level 1 Stall level 2 Stall level 3 Stall level 4 Stall frequency 2 Stall frequency 4 Stall frequency1 Stall frequency 3 Output frequency Figure 8 5 Stall level setting Regardless of other stall set levels when stall protection function operates everything is decided by stall level 1 at the start LSis 8 7 8 Protection Function 8 4 Inverter and Sequence Protection Function Open phase Protection of Input and Output Open phase protection function for input is used to prevent overcurrent of the inverter input part caused by open phase of input power As open phase at the connection between the motor and inverter output might cause motor stall by the lack of torque open phase protection function for output is also used Setting
33. C 50 C Figure 7 23 Rated current limits for ambient temperature if the inverter operates at normal duty LSis 7 41 7 Application Functions Rated current derating specifications per carrier The following is the rated current guarantee area for the carrier frequency according to the load Table 7 16 Rated current guarantee area for the carrier frequency according to the load Inverter capacity Light load Heavy load 0 4 22kW 2 kHz 6 kHz 7 17 2nd Motor Operation B If you want to use one inverter to operate two motors for switching operation If an inverter is connected with two motors for switching operation the 2nd motor can be operated as long as the input of the terminal defined as the 2nd function is 1 which selects the parameter settings PAR M2 for the 2nd motor Setting Group Code Name LCD display Seiting range Unit Px terminal Px Define IVES A O ATA A ieee oo B n 65 71 Px Define If the function item of the multi function input terminal is set to No 26 2nd motor M2 group 2nd motor group is displayed If the multi function terminal set as the 2nd motor is inputted operation is carried out by the code set in the following During operation the multi function terminal does not work as the 2nd motor parameter even if it is inputted In order to use M2 28 M2 Stall Lev set Pr 50 Stall Prevent to the value you want to use In order to use M2 29 M2 ETH 1min and M2 30 M2 ETH
34. Cn 20 SL2 G View Sel If No 1 Yes is selected the user can set various gains Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain2 Cn 24 ASR SL Gain2 Cn 26 Flux P Gain Cn 27 Flux Gain Gain3 Cn 28 S Est P Gain1 Cn 29 S Est Gain1 Cn 30 S Est Gain1 Cn 31 ACR SL P Gain Cn 32 ACR SL I Gain applied when the motor rotates at the middle speed 1 2 of base frequency by the sensorless vector control If No 0 No is selected the parameters are not displayed 728 LSIs 7 Application Functions B Initial excitation Cn 09 PreExTime Define the initial excitation time You can start operation after performing excitation up to the motor rated flux Cn 10 Flux Force You can reduce the initial excitation time The motor flux increases up to the rated flux with the time constant as in the following figure Therefore in order to reduce the time that takes to increase up to the rated flux provide higher motor flux base value than the rated flux When the magnetic flux reaches the rated flux the provided motor flux base value is reduced Motor flux Excitation current A TERRE e m FX CM Figure 7 18 Flux Force B Zero speed control when stopped Hold Time Cn 11 Hold Time When the motor is slowed down and stopped by the stop command the zero speed operation continues during the defined time and then the power is cut off Hold Time E S E Output voltage Frequency Operation command Figure 7 19 Hold
35. Cooling Fan Replacement 11 13 Daily inspection sese Deceleration Dwell eeseeenene Deceleration StOP ooococnccinnconocanocncancconanononananccnnancnn nano Definition of Local Definition of Remote Delivery Check coccion ad Derating specifications eee 7 41 Detailed Read Protocol sese 9 10 Detailed Write Protocol eeee 9 11 Detection of Motor Disconnection at Inverter Output Terminal E ania Sain NM EL LIII TUS 8 17 Di POS liada ix Drive group cete rin 10 1 10 2 Dwell Operatiot ioc reu 7 13 Easy Start Electrical installation checklist Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention Function EET TETTE ALTA UID REED 8 1 Existing iS7 iG5 iG5A Compatible Common Area Parameter aco thks a ir te coetui re e eS ol a Ir ee NSE 9 16 Expanded Function Group eee 10 10 Factory default carrier frequency 7 41 Failure Status Output Using the Terminal Block Multi Function Output Terminal eene Fault Warning List eterne Fa lt Status Reset HEP Herd Flux Braklrig A rtr ree eerte Free run stop E i Frequency fixation of analog command Frequency Jump Frequency Setting by Keypad Frequency Setting by Voltage Input of Terminal Block V1 TM lisa dada ae vent 6 4 Grounding wire specifications based o
36. Input eee Operation command If Frequency setting decreases If frequency setting increases Figure 6 33 Frequency jump s4 iSS ooo 6 Basic Functions 6 20 Selection of Second Operation Method Switching to another operation method Using a multi function input terminal you can input the frequency setting operation command etc as the second setting value You can use this function to stop remote control and operate on the inverter body when you are performing remote operation using any communication option LCD Setting display Setting range Operation drv Peon Cmd Source 1 Fx Rx 1 0 4 command method F Operation Fra reguency setina reads 2 Vi 0 12 Action The second bA 04 operation Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0 4 command method The second bA 05 frequency setting Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad 1 0 12 method Setting Px Px Define if 65 71 terminal function Px P1 P7 19 2nd Source 0 49 Select it as 15 2nd Source by selecting one of the multi function terminals between In 65 and In 71 of the terminal block input group bA 04 Cmd 2nd Src bA 05 Freq 2nd Src If the multi function input terminal set as the 2nd Source is turned on the operation can be performed with the set values from the bA 04 and 05 instead of the set values from the drv code and the Frq code of the operation group Cmd 2nd Src is the main source which canno
37. Interface type of RS 485 standards a Communication between inverter and computers of various companies is possible b Since it is multi drop link system single computer can control up to 16 inverters simultaneously c Highly immune to electro magnetic interference The inverter is capable of communicating with the RS 232 card integrated computer via commonly sold RS 232 485 converter Specifications and performance of converter vary depending on the manufacturer but basic functions are identical Please refer to user manual of the manufacturer for details about specifications and usage method Read this manual carefully before you install or run the inverter Failure to comply with this manual may result in injury or damage to other instruments Make sure to connect PLC and inverter SG Communication error by noise might occur LSis 9 1 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 1 1 Communication Standard Table 9 1 Communication standard Item Standard Communication method RS 485 Transmission type Bus type Multi drop Link System Inverter type name LSLV S100 series Number of connected inverters Maximum 16 Transmission distance Maximum 1 200 m Recommended distance within 700 m Recommended wires 0 75 mm 18AWG Shield Type Twisted Pare Wire Installation type Connect to the dedicated terminal S S SG of control terminal block Power supply Use the insulated power from
38. Px terminal Px Define 65 71 function setting P P1 P7 9 Wire 7 A function that latches the inputted signals and carries out operation as shown in the following figure Therefore you can use push buttons to configure a simple sequence circuit as shown below The minimum input time t for input terminal should be 1 ms or longer When forward and reverse operation commands are inputted at the same time the operation stops Z J IM pus 6 JOG In 69 NED Figure 7 8 Terminal wiring 5 A 5 Figure 7 9 3 wire operation LSis 7 11 7 Application Functions 7 6 Safe Operation Mode B When inputting the terminal to limit the operation Function LCD display settings Ad 70 Sale operator METEO dee i Bi selection Dependent Ad 71 Safe operation Run Dis Stop 0 Free Run 0 2 stop method Ad 72 Sous operation Q Stop Time 5 0 0 0 600 0 sec eceleration time 65 Px terminal Px Define i 71 function setting Px P1 P7 19 RUN Enele i i A function that uses the multi function input terminal to make the operation command effective by software Table 7 8 Safe operation mode code description Code number Function display Code description Group Of the multi function input terminals select a terminal for No 13 safe operation mode RUN Enable The safe operation function does not work
39. Run Time days Total number of days when OUS Fare este Day the heat sink fan has run Total number of minutes 0h0345 Fan Time minute Min excluding the total number of Fan Time days 0h0346 Reserved 0h0348 0h0349 Reserved 0 None 4A ion 1 0h03 Option 9 CANopen 0h034B Reserved 0h034C Reserved 9 RS 485 Communication Function B Inverter control area parameter both read and write pr Parameter Assig espia by 0h0380 Frequency command 0 01 Hz e frequency 0h0381 RPM command 1 rpm Command RPM setting B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 0341 Free run stop B2 0341 Trip initialization 0h0382 Operation command 0 Reverse command 1 Forward command Bo 0 Stop command 1 Run command Ex Forward operation command 0003h Reverse operation command 0001h 0h0383 Acceleration time 0 1 sec Acceleration time setting 0h0384 Deceleration time 0 1 sec Deceleration time setting BI5 Reserved Bl4 Reserved BI3 Reserved BI2 Reserved Bli Reserved BIO Reserved B9 Reserved 0h0385 Dm Eur 7 PA eevee 0 0ff 1 On B7 Virtual DI 8 CM 77 B6 Virtual DI 7 CM 76 B5 Virtual DI 6 CM 75 B4 Virtual DI 5 CM 74 B3 Virtual DI 4 CM 73 B2 Virtual DI 3 CM 72 B1 Virtual DI 2 CM 71 BO Virtual DI 1 CM 70 BI5 Reserved Bl4 Reserved BI3 Reserved 0h0386 D
40. Setting operation frequency with keypad Setting frequency by voltage input into the terminal block Setting operation frequency by voltage input V1 V2 of terminal block Setting frequency by current input into the terminal block Setting operation frequency by current input 12 of terminal block Setting frequency via RS 485 communications Setting frequency by communicating with the upper level controller PLC or PC using terminal block S S Frequency fixation of analog command Holding operation frequency by the input of the terminal selected as Analog Hold among multi function terminals Changing frequency to revolution Changing the display method of motor revolutions Hz or rpm Multi step speed frequency setting Multi step speed operation using multi function terminal Operation command setting via keypad Starting operation using the forward operation key FWD and the reverse operation key REV and stopping operation using the stop key Stop Operation command setting via terminal block Controlling operation command using terminal block FX RX Operation command setting via RS 485 communications Setting operation command by communicating with the upper level controller PLC or PC using terminal block S S Local remote switching operation using ESC keys When operating with an operation command based on a method other than keypad such as termin
41. Swtich 1 is acceleration command Switch 2 is deceleration command 3 wire operation A function that latches the inputted signals and carries out operation Used when intending to operate the inverter by using push button etc Safety mode operation Used when a higher level of safe torque off condition is required when using the inverter control terminals to stop the motor Dwell operation Used to ensure enough torque is available in a motor to prevent roll back when brake is lifted Slip compensation operation Used when intending to compensate for the motor slip which increases when load increases to rotate at a consistent speed PID controls the output frequency of the inverter to control flow PID control pressure temperature etc Auto auna The inverter measures and uses internal motor parameters for high performance operation Sensorless vector control Controls the magnetic flux and torque components of the motor current to give higher starting torque than V F control Torque control Used when controlling the motor so that the torque is generated as set by the torque command value Droop control Used to balance loads when multiple motors are used to drive one load or to prevent the saturation of speed controller in vector control etc Kinetic energy buffering If power failure occurs in the input power the voltage in the inverter DC power part is lowered whi
42. TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0022S 100 1 TD125U EBS 33c MC 18 LSLV00228100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 12 LSLV0004S 100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0037S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 18 LSLV00088100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0040S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 18 LSLV0015S100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 12 LSLV0055S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 32 LSLV0022S 100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 18 LSLV0075S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 32 LSLV00378100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 32 LSLVO110S100 4 TD125U EBS 53c MC 40 LSLV0040S 100 2 TD125U EBS 33c MC 32 LSLV0150S100 4 TD125U EBS 63c MC 50 LSLV00558100 2 TD125U EBS 53c MC 40 LSLV0185S100 4 TD125U EBS 103c MC 65 LSLV0075S 100 2 TD125U EBS 63c MC 50 LSLVO2208100 4 TD125U EBS 103c MC 65 LSLV0110S100 2 TD125U EBS 103c MC 65 LSLV01508100 2 TD125U EBS 203c MC 100 LSLV0185S100 2 TS250U EBS 203c MC 100 LSLV0220S 100 2 TS250U EBS 203c MC 125 LSis 2 17 2 Standard 2 Fuse and reactor specifications Table 2 6 Fuse and reactor specifications AC input fuse invarer extemal fuse AC reactor DC reactor type Current Voltage Inductance Current Inductance Current A V mH A LSLV0004S 100 1 10 600 1 20 10 4 8 67 LSLV0008S 100 1 10 600 1 20 10 4 8 67 LSLV0015S100 1 15 600 0 88 14 3 13 05 LSLV00228100 1 20 600 0 56 20 1 3 18 45 LSLV0004S100 2 10 600 1 20 10 4 8 67 LSLV0008S 100 2 10 600 1 20 10 4 8 67 LSLV0015S100 2 15 600
43. another terminal block for 100 ms When 100 ms has elapsed it will be set to acceleration deceleration time relevant to the P6 terminal 4 Changing Multi step Acc Dec Time by Setting Acc Dec Time Transition Frequency LCD Setting display Setting range Operation ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 10 0 0 0 600 0 sec Operation dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 10 0 0 0 600 0 sec Multi step bA 70 acceleration time Acc Time 1 20 0 0 0 600 0 sec 1 Multi step bA 71 deceleration time Dec Time 1 20 0 0 0 600 0 sec 1 Acc Dec time Ad 60 transition o Meco dl is Hz frequency q y It is possible to change acceleration and deceleration gradient without using multi function terminal The system will operate with the gradient set in bA 70 and 71 at below the Acc Dec LSis 6 Basic Functions transition frequency set in Ad 60 by the operation frequency However when the operation frequency increases to higher than the Acc Dec transition frequency it will operate with the Acc Dec gradient set in ACC and dEC of the operation group If the multi function input terminal function is set and input to the multi step Acc Dec XCEL L XCEL M and XCEL H it will operate with multi step Acc Dec input irrespective of the Acc Dec transition frequency FX Figure 6 19 Changing multi step Acc Dec time by setting Acc Dec time transition frequency LSis 6 25 6 Basic Functions 6 12
44. naddress display Setting range Property page g Jump E 00 Jump code Code 1 99 4 O A O O V F 1 0 H 15 0 kHz X A 7 41 D SL 2 0 15 0 on l a 9 i i kHz 04 0h1404 Carrier Carrier kHz frequency Freq V F 1 0 5 0 N kHz 2 D SL 2 0 5 0 kHz i 0 Normal PWM o 05 0h1405 della de E Normal X A 741 olo mode Mode Lowleakage PWM PWM 09 0h1409 Initial breExTime 0 00 60 00 s 1 00 X A 7 29 xio excitation time Initial 10 0h140A excitation Flux Force 100 0 300 0 100 0 X A 7 29 X O amount Continued 11 0h140B operation Hold Time 0 00 60 00 s 0 00 X A 7 29 X O duration Sensorless 2 sog 0 No 20 0h1414 gain display View Sel 0 No O A 7 26 X O setting aaa Yes D Sensorless an speed ASR SL on 21 0h1415 controller 0 5000 O A 7 26 X O a P Gain1 motor proportional gaint capacit y Depen Sensorless dent 22 0h1416 speed ASR SL 19 9999 tms 9 on 7 26 x lo controller Gain1 motor integral gain1 capacit y D Sensorless dk speed ASR SL 1854 0h1417 controller O stas pO Ea O A 7 26 xlo proportional P Gain2 maior gain2 capacit y Depen Sensorless dent ASR SL 24 0h1418 q SiS ar STOOD O A 7 26 xio controller Gain2 motor integral gain2 capacit y 10 14 LSIS C T LCD Ret Control ommunicatio Setting range eference mode n address display page Depen FI de
45. protocol CM 03 Built in Int485 BaudR 3 9600 bps 0 7 i communication speed Built in CM 04 communication frame Int485Mode o P ao 28 0 3 3 setting CM os Transmission delay Resp Delay 5 0 1000 msec after reception CM 01 Int485 St ID Set inverter station ID CM 02 Int485 Proto Built in protocol is Modbus RTU 0 LS INV 485 2 Table 9 2 Built in protocol Number Display Contents 0 Modbus RTU Modbus RTU compatible protocol 2 LS INV 485 Dedicated protocol for LS inverter CM 03 Int485 BaudR Set communication speed Can be set up to 115 200 bps Number Display 0 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 56 Kbps NN OO Oo BR OJN 115 Kbps CM 04 Int485 Mode Select communication frame configuration Set data length parity check method and the number of stop bits Number Display Contents 0 D8 PN S1 8 bit data parity check not done one stop bit 1 D8 PN S2 8 bit data parity check not done two stop bits 2 D8 PE S1 8 bit data even number parity check one stop bit 3 D8 PO S1 8 bit data odd number parity check one stop bit 5 Means 115 200 bps LSis 9 RS 485 Communication Function CM 05 Resp Delay 485 communication Modbus RTU or LS INV 485 integrated in S100 works as slave S100 as a slave responds to the master only after the time set
46. s Add the braking resistance O NO optional YES Calculate the deceleration time Check the braking resistance s rating pe ius ee Calculate the regenerative energy Satisfy the time ue emm NO CONS me YES mui e e isthe loss within the Increase the capacity of the allowed limit braking resistance YES AI TS __ ts the loss within the allowed limit No YES _ sit high frequency acceleration d A deceleration operation Calculate motor s RMS rating no As RMS below the rated _ 2 Current P pet NO END LT ws Individual a eS consultation iv LSis Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Safety Precautions help you prevent accidents before they happen and allow you to use the inverter safely and properly Make sure to adhere to all Safety Precautions outlined in this manual There are two types of warning labels Warning and Caution These labels mean the following Precaution Definition Warning labels alert users to the possibility of serious injuries or death from VN Warning failure to follow the instructions provided Caution labels alert users to the possibility of minor injuries or damage to the Caution inverter from failure to follow the instructions provided The icons displayed on the inverter and in the manual mean the following
47. stop T acc Acceleration time to set frequency T steady Operation time in constant speed at set frequency T dec Deceleration time to frequency lower than constant speed operation or stop time from constant speed operation frequency T stop Stop time until it starts operating again Frequency lt gt q gt lt gt lt T_acc T_steady T dec T stop Figure 8 9 Example 1 of setting braking resistor usage Example 2 ED T ue x 100 T_dec T _steady1 T _acc T _ steady2 LSTS 8 13 8 Protection Function Frequency T_dec T_acc lt B _ BH T_steady 1 T_steady2 Figure 8 10 Example 2 of setting braking resistor usage 8 14 LSIs 8 Protection Function 8 9 Underload Warning and Fault Code Function display Setting display Pr 04 Load Duty 0 Normal Duty Pr 25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0 1 Pr 26 UL Warn Time 10 0 0 600 sec Pr 27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free Run E Pr 28 UL Trip Time 30 0 0 600 sec Pr 29 UL LF Level 30 10 100 96 Pr 30 UL BF Level 30 10 100 Pr 27 UL Trip Sel In case of underload fault set the operation method for inverter If this is setto No 1 Free Run output is blocked in underload fault situation If this is set to No 2 deceleration Dec the motor decelerates and stops Pr 25 UL Warn Sel Select underload warning If you set multi function output terminal from OU 31 a
48. 06 Motor Capacity M2 Capacity 3 7 kW M2 08 Control mode M2 Ctrl Mode 0 V F Motor 1 T 5kW Motor 2 3 7kW Figure 7 24 Usage example 2nd motor operation function LSis 7 43 7 Application Functions 7 18 Commercial Switching Operation em coy oe Px terminal function Px Define In 65 71 setting Px P1 P7 16 Exchange OU 31 Multi function relay Relay 17 Inverter n 1 item Line Multi function Comm OU 33 output 1 item Q1 Define 18 dns The load operated by the inverter can be switched to the commercial power or vise versa n 65 71 Px Define Input if you set to No 16 Exchange and switch to commercial power from the inverter Turn off the terminal if you want to switch the motor from the commercial power to the inverter output terminal OU 31 Relay 1 OU 33 Q1 Define Set the multi function relay or output to No 16 inverter line and No 17 Comm Line For relay operation sequence refer to the following figure Speed search operation zone a Output frequency m REL Operation command Px Exchange n PxtComm Line t 1 e Px nvererLne mmm gt lt i Inverter operation Commercial operation Inverter operation t 500 ms Figure 7 25 Relay operation sequence 7 44 LSIS 7 Application Functions 7 19 Cooling fan control Setting LCD display Seiting range Ad 64 Cooling fan FAN Control 0 DuringRun 0 2 control
49. 1 0h0318 PID reference 0 1 E 0h0319 PID feedback 0 1 0h031A Display the number of 2 Display the number of poles poles for the 1st motor for the 1st motor 0h031B Display the number of i Display the number of poles poles for the 2nd motor for the 2nd motor Display the number of 5 Display the number of poles 0h031C poles for the selected forthe selectedimotor motor 0 Hz 0h031D Select Hz rpm 1 rpm 0h031E OhOS1F Reserved BI5 Reserved Bl4 Reserved BI3 Reserved Bl2 Reserved Bl Reserved BIO Reserved B9 Reserved B8 Reserved information 0h0320 Digital input information B7 Reserved B6 P7 Basic I O B5 P6 Basic I O B4 P5 Basic I O B3 P4 Basic I O B2 P3 Basic I O B1 P2 Basic I O BO P1 Basic I O BI5 Reserved i Reserved B8 Reserved B7 Reserved B6 Reserved 0h0321 Digital output 2 B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 Reserved B2 Reserved B1 Q1 BO Relay 1 LSis 9 23 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Assigned content by bit B15 Reserved S Reserved B8 Reserved B7 Virtual DI 8 CM 77 B6 Virtual DI 7 CM 76 0h0322 Med dam a B5 Virtual DI 6 CM 75 B4 Virtual DI 5 CM 74 B3 Virtual DI 4 C
50. 10 Auto Tuning You can measure the motor parameters automatically The motor parameters measured by auto tuning are used in auto torque boost sensorless vector control etc Example 0 75 kW and 220 V motor Table 7 11 0 75 kW and 220 V motor auto tuning example Setting Group Code LCD display Seiting range dr 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 1 0 75 kW 0 15 bA 11 Number of motor Pote Number 4 2 48 poles bA 12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 40 0 3000 rpm Rated motor 1 0 bA 13 B rrent Rated Curr 3 6 1000 0 A Motor no load 0 5 bA 14 curren Noload curr 1 6 1000 0 A bA 15 Palen motor Rated Volt 220 170 480 V voltage bA 16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 70 100 96 bA 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None Dependent bA 21 Stator resistor Rs 26 00 on motor Q setting Leak g Dependent bA 22 pel Lsigma 179 4 on motor mH setting Dependent bA 23 Stator inductance Ls 1544 on motor mH setting bA 24 rotor time constant Tr 145 25 5000 ms Be sure to carry out auto tuning after the motor stops Be sure to input the number of motor poles rated slip rated current rated voltage and efficiency stated in the motor nameplate before carrying out auto tuning The items not inputted use the default settings LSis 7 23 7 Application Functions 7 24 Table 7 12 Auto tuning automatic settings
51. 16 0 16 100 91 128 120 4 5 130 4 5 4 5 4 5 AURIP 3 94 3 58 5 04 4 72 0 18 5 12 0 18 0 18 0 18 100 91 128 120 4 5 145 4 5 4 5 4 5 SIVO0225100 2 004 3 58 504 4 72 0 18 571 0 18 0 18 0 18 LSLV00378100 2 140 132 128 120 4 145 45 425 45 LSLV0040S100 2 5 51 5 20 5 04 4 72 0 16 5 71 0 18 0 17 0 18 LSLV00558100 2 160 137 232 2165 105 140 5 5 LSLV00758100 2 6 30 5 39 9 13 8 52 0 41 5 51 0 20 0 20 180 157 290 2737 113 163 5 5 LSLVO1108100 2 SES 7 09 6 18 11 4 10 8 0 44 6 42 0 20 0 20 220 1938 350 331 13 187 6 6 LSLV01508100 2 pease 8 66 7 63 13 8 13 0 0 51 7 36 0 24 0 24 LSLV01858100 2 250 221 390 3685 14 1885 7 7 LSLVO2208100 2 9 84 8 70 15 4 14 5 0 55 7 42 0 28 0 28 Table 2 3 Dimensions per frame 3 phase 400 V mm inches Inverter capacity W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B 0 68 59 128 120 4 5 123 4 4 4 casas 2 68 2 32 5 04 4 72 0 18 4 84 0 16 0 16 0 16 68 59 128 120 4 5 128 4 4 4 ESENQUOBS IUS 2 68 2 32 5 04 472 0 18 5 04 0 16 0 16 0 16 100 91 128 120 4 5 130 4 5 4 5 4 5 LSLVOO1881004 994 350 504 4 72 0 18 5 12
52. Command 29 Trip O A 7 62 olo item 14 Run 15 Stop 16 Steady 17 Inverter Line 18 Comm Line Speed 19 Search 22 Ready 28 Timer Out 29 Trip DB B Warn ED On Off 34 Control 35 BR Control I 76 The initial value 010 will be displayed in SEG as EE 10 24 LS 1s 10 Table of Functions Control P P mode Communication LCD Setting range Initial Reference address display value page 0 None 1 FDT 1 2 FDT 2 3 FDT 3 4 FDT 4 5 Over Load 6 IOL 7 Under Load 8 Fan Warning 9 Stall Over ps Voltage Low H Voltage Multi 12 Over Heat 33 0h1621 function Q1 Define 43 _ Lost 14 Run O A 762 lolo output 1 Command item 14 Run 15 Stop 16 Steady Inverter Uu Line 18 Comm Line Speed Search 22 Ready 28 Timer Out 29 Trip DB 31 Warn ED On Off 34 Control 35 BR Control Multi 41 0h1629 function DO Status 00 X A 7 62 a gt output monitoring Multi 50 0h1632 funcion DOOn 555 10900 s 0 00 O A 768 lolo output Delay On delay Multi 51 0h1633 function DOOff lo 09 100 00 s 0 00 O A 768 lolo output Delay Off delay LSis 10 25 10 Table of Functions Control icati T mode Communication LCD Setting range Initial Reference address display value page Multi Q1 Relay1 function DO
53. Cont set Pr 40 ETH Trip Sel to the value you want to use Table 7 17 Code for inputting the multi function terminal set as the 2nd motor Code Number Function Details 04 M2 Acc Time Acceleration time 05 M2 Dec Time Deceleration time 06 M2 Capacity Motor Capacity 07 M2 Base Freq Motor base frequency 08 M2 Ctrl Mode Control mode 10 M2 Pole Num Number of poles 11 M2 Rate Slip Rated slip 12 M2 Rated Curr Rated current 13 M2 Noload Curr No load current 14 M2 Rated Volt Motor rated voltage 15 M2 Efficiency Motor efficiency 16 M2 Inertia Rt Load inertia rate 17 M2 Rs Stator resistor 7 42 LSIs 7 Application Functions Al Function Details 18 M2 Lsigma Leakage inductance 19 M2 Ls Stator inductance 20 M2 Tr Rotor time constant 25 M2 V F Patt V F pattern 26 M2 Fwd Boost Forward direction torque boost 27 M2 Rev Boost Reverse direction torque boost 28 M2 Stall Lev Stall prevention level 29 M2 ETH 1min One minute rating of electronic thermal 30 M2 ETH Cont Continuous rating of electronic thermal Usage example In order to use the 2nd motor operation function to use P3 terminal in the existing 7 5 kW motor for 3 7 kW switching operation define as follows Table 7 18 Usage example 2nd motor operation function LCD Seiting display Setting range In 67 US P3 Define 26 2nd Motor function setting M2
54. D E Occurs if the internal DC circuit voltage i LLL pow wallage eve decreases less than the specified value T Occurs if the internal DC circuit voltage Lui Voltage2 Latch decreases less than the specified value during the inverter operation Occurs if a ground fault occurs in the inverter output side causing a current greater than the Ground Trip Latch specified value to flow There is a difference in the ground fault detection currents depending on the inverter capacity Occurs according to the inverse time limit Fou d thermal characteristic to prevent overheating in 7 LL E Thermal Latch the motor Works only when Pr 40 is set to any value other than No 0 Occurs if one or more phases to the motor is nn Latch open circuit Works only when bit 1 of Pr 05 is set to 1 m Occurs if one of the input power phases is a ru pu Latch missing Works only when bit 2 of Pr 05 is set to 1 A protection function for the inverse time limit thermal characteristic to protect the inverter from Inverter OLT Latch overheating It is based on 150 1 minute and 7 200 4 seconds according to the inverter rated current For 200 4 seconds there is a difference depending on the inverter capacity Occurs if the motor is not connected when Latch operating the inverter Works only when Pr 31 is set to No 1 No Motor Trip me ru LSis 11 1
55. Group Code LCD display Setting range Input output open Phase Loss 54 i nr 2 phase protection Chk 0o ai Open phase of 7 Pr 06 input voltage band IPO V Band 40 1 100V V Open phase for input and output can be selected respectively When the dot mark of the Switch is at the top corresponding bit is set When it is at the bottom it does not operate Top 1 Bottom 0 Bit setting status On Bit setting off state Off Segment LCD Table 8 2 Input output open phase protection bit function Function Right end side of the display is bit 1 Protection operation for output open phase is selected Protection operation for input open phase is selected Protection operation for input and output open phase is selected Open phase protection of output Segment Output open phase bit setting LCD If more than one out of U V and W of inverter output terminal blocks are open phase inverter blocks the output and Out Phase Open is displayed 5t The initial value 00 will be displayed in SEG as 8 8 LSIS n 8 Protection Function Open phase protection of input Output open phase bit setting Segment J LCD If one of the incoming phases to R S or T power terminals is missing the inverter output switches off and Phase Open is displayed on keypad Protection for input open pha
56. Main circuit sheath Terminal Is there any Check it Must be OK f block damage visually Measure Measure it Must be above Smoothin 9 electrostatic using capacity 85 of rated oe condenser capacity meter output capacity 1 Is there any chattering noise 1 Check it during acoustically Relay must Relay operation operate 2 Is there any 2 Check it correctly damage in visually contact i 1 OK or not 1 Is there any n Check it visually OK T damage in Digital Braking resistor 2 Disconnect 2 Must be multimeter resistor one side and within 10 of 2 Check for analog tester evidence measure it resistor rated using tester value 1 Phase to 1 Check each 1 Measure phase voltage output voltage voltage for unbalance between Pacey Control during inverter inverter output d m y 400 P operation terminal U V V application Digital circuit Motion W it must be Itimeter 2 After testing hi multimeter Protection check within 4 V 8 V Circuit sequence 2 Short or open 2 Circuit must DC voltmeter protection inverter k A ee motion display protection work witho t circuitmustbe circuit output any problem OK forcibly according to sequence Givin Check the Correct any Cooling fan S Eolo Cooling fan connector and problems in this must operate y wiring is OK area correctly Check display Check specified Display Meter ere value value on the value and See i panel standard value 9Immeter
57. Method iii 4 3 4 4 Power Terminal Wiring Diagram ec eee cence eee e teats teas tees rancia tease tease sae seaeeeaeeseaeeseaeeea 4 5 4 5 Control Terminal Block Wiring Diagram c cece eee ee ee eens tees teaee tease nn crac nan na ran nannncnns 4 6 4 6 Signal Terminal Block Wiring Specifications 4 10 47 Built in EMG Filler Savin Sasi earn Gere won Shah tice eto cedi entere iene eee 4 11 4 8 Dynamic Braking Resistor saeir a a aaa a erem 4 12 4 9 Normal Operation Check nennen nemen nee eren an 4 13 4 10 Wiring Ghecklist retra ek oe tn s 4 14 5 Using the Keypad 1 ici ii ii Ri A citant 5 1 5 1 Layout the Keypad noce RR Re e pee t tes 5 1 5 2 Display List for Numerals and Letters 5 2 5 3 Menu SIr ct re s tete mete sii 5 3 5 4 Moving between groups cooocconccnonocconcnorncnnnnn ran nono rra rra 5 4 5 5 Moving between Codes within the Group oococioccnnnnnnnoccnoccnnonnnnncnnarn crac cnn carac cnn cnn ncnnn nano 5 6 5 6 Moving to the Initial Position voii a a 5 8 LSis Table of Contents 5 7 Setting the Parameters 0 0 0 0 essecesseeeneeeeneeeeeeeeseeceaeeceeeeeeeeeeseessaneceaeeseeeeeeneseeneseaneseaneseaeeees 5 8 Monitoring Operation Status 5 9 Parameter initialization 5 10 Frequency Setting and Basic Operation Method oonooncnicnnncnncnnocnnocanrncnna nana rrnc ara roca rr e 5 16 5 1 Using ESG gy e EEEE EE EEEO 5 18 Basic Functions
58. Notes Even Caution labels can warn users of potentially serious results depending on the situation The icons displayed on the inverter and in the manual mean the following Icon Definition N Danger there is the possibility of accidents occurring AN Danger there is the possibility of an electric shock After reading the manual please place it in a location where people can easily find it Please read this manual carefully to ensure LSLV S100 inverter is used safely and effectively THIS INVERTER MUST BE EARTHED GROUNDED Do not open the cover while the power is on or at any time during operation Otherwise it may result in an electric shock Do not operate the inverter while the cover is open Exposing the High voltage terminal or charging area to the external environment may result in an electric shock Do not open the cover even when the power supply has been switched off This excludes necessary maintenance or regular inspection Opening the cover may result in an electric shock even if the power supply is off The inverter may hold a charge long after the power supply has been switched off Do not conduct maintenance or inspection without first ensuring that the DC voltage of the inverter has been fully discharged To ensure this use a voltage tester at least ten minutes after the power supply has been cut off Otherwise it may result in an electric shock DC 30V or less Do not operate switche
59. Pole 11 0h120B motor poles Number 2 48 X A OJO Rated slip Rated E Dependent O 12 0h120C speed Slip 0 3000 rpm X A O Rated motor Rated inverter 13 0h120D current Curr 1 0 1000 0 A capacity X A O O Motor no load Noload 14 0h120E Buen Curr 0 0 1000 0 A X A 7 15 oyo 15 0h120F Rated motor Rated 470 480 V 0 X A olo voltage Volt 16 0h1210 ee Efficiency 70 100 X A O E y Dependent Load inertia Inertia on O lg Onan rate Rate oe inverter KA o O Power Trim capably 18 0h1212 display trim Power 70 130 O A OJo A 19 0h1213 Input power 0 170 480 V 0 O A 7 45 olo voltage Input Volt 0 None 1 All f Auto ALL 20 Auto tuning Tuning 2 Stdstl 0 None X A 7 25 X O 3 Rs Lsigma 6 Tr Stdstl i Dependent on i i 21 Stator resistor Rs motor setting X A 7 23 xX O 22 Leakage Lsigma Dependent on X A 723 X O inductance motor setting 23 _ Stator ls Dependent on X A 7 23 x Lo inductance motor setting 224 popa y 25 5000 ms X A SO constant 5 41 0h1229 M a OOE 15 00 X A 630 lolx frequency 1 1 frequency Hz 42 0h122A Usar ae wee Volt o 100 25 X A 630 lolx User User Freq 0 00 Max T 43 0h122B frequency 2 2 frequency Hz 30 00 X A 6 30 O X LSis 10 7 Cc icati LCD Initial Comtal ommunication nitia address display Setting rangs value 44 0h122C sc o
60. Pole Number Input the pole number stated on the motor nameplate bA 12 Rated Slip Use the rated RPM on the motor nameplate to input the rated slip bA 13 Rated Curr Input the rated current stated on the motor nameplate bA 14 Noload Curr Input the current measured when operating the motor at the rated frequency after removing load devices connected to the motor shaft If it is difficult to measure no load current input 30 for large motors 50 for small motors of the rated current bA 16 Efficiency Input the efficiency stated on the motor nameplate bA 17 Inertia Rate Select load inertia based on the motor inertia 0 less than 10 times the motor inertia 1 10 times the motor inertia 2 8 more than 10 times the motor inertia LSis 7 15 7 Application Functions TX rpmx P ff 120 Here Rated slip frequency Rated frequency P Motor rated RPM P Number of motor poles 7 9 PID Control B Usage of PID control For the usage of PID control using the inverter please refer to the following table Purpose Control details Feedback the current speed of the device to be controlled to speed cenital maintain a constant speed Feedback the current pressure of the system to be controlled to Pressure control eae maintain a constant pressure Feedback the current flow of the system to be controlled to Flow control eb maintain a constant flow Feedback the current tem
61. Radio frequency interference from the Install a screened cable between the inverter and the motor cable motor Connect the screen at BOTH ends to ground B When operating the inverter the earth leakage breaker is actuated Cause Measure Ground the inverter by connecting it to a dedicated ground terminal Check that the ground resistance is below 100 ohms for the 200 V series and 10 ohms for the 400 V An earth leakage breaker RCD is series actuated by the leakage current from the Check the sensitivity of the earth leakage breaker inverter Can the trip current be increased safely Decrease the setting of the inverter carrier frequency Reduce the cable length between the inverter and the motor or fit a sinusoidal filter in the motor cable 11 10 LSIS 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection B When the motor rotates vibration occurs in the machine The motor vibrates severely and does not rotate normally Measure Check the input power voltage to stabilize the The phase voltage balance is poor power Check the motor insulation status Humming noise or other noise occurs in the motor Cause Measure Resonance occurs between the machine s natural frequency and Increase or decrease the carrier frequency slightly the carrier frequency Increase or decrease the inverter command frequency slightly Use the frequency jump function to avoid the frequency band
62. The delay time set in OU 50 51 are applied both to the multi function output terminal Q1 and relay Relay 1 except when the multi function output is in the failure mode B Select the type of output signal contact Group Code Name LCD display Seiting Setting Unit range Multi function OU 52 output contact DO NC NO Sel 00 00 11 bit selection Select the types of relay and multi function output terminals If you add extension I O three additional bits for terminal block contact type selection are added If you set the relevant bit to 0 contact A NO is used If set to 1 contact B NC is used Displays Relay 1 and Q1 from the right bit Bit setting status On Bit setting off state Off Segment I I LCD The initial value 00 will be displayed in SEG as H 7 68 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 38 keypad Language Selection50 Code Function m i E number display Initial settings display 0 English CNF 01 Language Sel 1 Korean Select the language of the keypad display window You can select a language in Keypad S W Ver 1 04 or later 7 39 Monitoring Operation Status You can use the keypad of the inverter to monitor the operation status You can select monitoring items in Config Mode CNF You can view three items in the monitor mode and display one item in the status display window B Select the monitor mode display Serie Function displ
63. When the motor is Figure 6 28 Start after DC braking rotating before the voltage is supplied from the inverter it can stop the motor revolution by DC braking and then make acceleration Also when applying mechanical brake to the motor shaft it may be used if a constant torque is required even after opening the mechanical brake The DC braking quantity is the basis of the set motor rated current so do not set the current value higher than the inverter rated current Or the motor may be overheated or damaged If the DC braking quantity is too large or the braking time is too long the motor may be overheated or damaged 6 Basic Functions 6 18 Stop Mode Selection Select a method to stop the motor when a stop command is input to the inverter during its operation B Deceleration Stop Setting range Ad 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec Unit Group Code Name LCD display Setting This is a general deceleration method When there is no function selection the motor decelerates ramps down to 0 Hz and then stops as shown in the figure below Frequency Operation command Deceleration time 2448 ai Figure 6 29 Deceleration stop B Stopping using DC Braking Stopping the motor by supplying direct current at a preset frequency during deceleration When the frequency reaches the set value during deceleration the motor will be stopped by DC braking
64. accurately and re acceleration may start from zero speed when the speed search is performed for motor idling at low speed about 10 15 Hz though there are differences depending on motors The initial value 0000 will be displayed in SEG as naa 7 36 LS IS 7 Application Functions QCn 71 Speed Search The speed search can be selected from the following four types If the point of the switch is displayed at the top the bit is set if at the bottom no bit is set Bit setting status On Bit setting off state Off I Segment 4 Table 7 13 Types and functions of speed search setting Setting type Function Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Right end side of the display is bit 1 Y Select speed search for acceleration Y When starting on initialization after trip Y When restarting after instantaneous power interruption Y When starting with power on B Select speed search for acceleration If bit 1 is set to 1 and inverter operation command is inputted the acceleration starts with speed search operation If the motor is rotating by the load side environment and the operation command is inputted to the inverter for voltage output a trip can occur and the motor can be stressed In this case you can accelerate without having a trip by using the search function When operating in the sensorless Il mode at the load that starts during free run you have to set the Select speed se
65. are no pieces of wire left inside the inverter after wiring Any remaining wire residue may cause failure or malfunction Use correctly rated cable for input output wiring so that the voltage drop is below 2 If the wiring between the inverter and motor is long the motor torque goes down due to voltage drop in main circuit wiring during the low frequency operation The wiring length between the inverter and motor should be below 200 m If wiring between the inverter and motor is too long the overcurrent protection may be activated or a device connected to the output side may malfunction due to increase in the floating capacity within the wiring For motor cablesin excess of 50m a sinusoidal filter or other precautions may be required Since the main circuit input output of the inverter include harmonic waves communication device placed near the inverter can be affected by radio interference It is recommended that an EMC filter be installed in the input side to reduce interference Do not install phase advanced capacitor surge killer or radio noise filter on the output side of the inverter Otherwise inverter trip may occur or condenser or surge killer may be damaged If aproblem occurs during operation and the wiring needs to be changed first ensure that the body LED or charge lamp near the power terminal block are off The inverter s internal condenser is charged with high voltage for a while even after the power has been turne
66. at low speed Cn 22 ASR SL Gain1 increase Cn 93 value in 10Hz or lower Cn 93 SL Volt Comp3 increments of 5 If the motor hunts and torque is insufficient in 5 10 Hz decrease Cn 04 value in decrements of 1 Hz Cn 04 set to exceed by 3 kHz The motor hunts and OCT Cn 92 SL Volt Comp2 occurs in regeneration load at x low speed 10 Hz or lower Increase Cn 92 and 93 at the Cn 93 SL Volt Comp3 same time in increments of 5 OVT occurs due to sudden Acc Dec or sudden load fluctuation at mid speed 30Hz or higher Decrease Cn 24 value in Cn 24 ASR SL I Gain2 decrements of 5 1 DB resistance is not connected 7 32 LSIs 7 Application Functions Abnormal symptoms and problems OCT occurs due to sudden load fluctuation at high speed 50 Hz or higher Relevant function codes Cn 54 57 Trq Lmt Cn 94 SL FW Freq Troubleshooting Decrease CN 54 57 value in decrements of 10 the set value is 150 or more Increase decrease Cn 94 value in increments decrements of 5 It should be lower than 100 The motor hunts when the load increases at the base frequency or higher Cn 22 ASR SL Gain1 Cn 23 ASR SL Gain2 Increase Cn 22 value in increments of 50 msec or decrease Cn 24 value in decrements of 5 The motor hunts when the load increases Cn 28 S Est P Gain1 Cn 29 S Est Gain1 If itis low speed 10 Hz or lower increase Cn 29 va
67. bA01 4 MsG 2 A 50 A AN 5 MG 2 A 50 M HZ G 2 A 50 dl e e A 6 M G 2 A 50 MIHZJ G 2 A 501 A m SO AL TO 1 0 ATO 1 ENTO Main speed command value Main speed command 7 M M G 2 A 50 M HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 value x bAO3 x 2 x bAO1 50 M Frq setting based main speed frequency command Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain 96 A Aux speed frequency command Hz or RPM or gain 96 If the max frequency is high the output frequency error may occur due to the analog input error or calculation error In the above setting types the single direction analog input can allow or operation at least four times bA 03 Aux Ref Gain Controls the size of the input bA 01 Aux Ref Src set as aux speed If aux speed is selected to V1 or I2 and parameters from 01 to 32 in the terminal block input group are initial values the aux speed frequency operates as in the following n 65 71 Px Define When the terminal set as dis Aux Ref No 40 among the multi function input terminals is inputted it does not operate with the aux speed command and instead it operates only with main speed command Frequency command Main M based on operation group frq setting method Frequency command Aux A based on bA 01 setting method Final command frequency If multi functional input terminal In 65 71 is set to 40 dis Aux Ref the Aux command is not effective Figure 7 1 Setti
68. contrast of the digital keypad CNF 10 Inv S W Ver CNF 11 Keypad S W Ver You can check the OS versions of the main body and digital keypad CNF 12 KPD Title Ver You can check the title version of the digital keypad CNF 30 32 Option x Type You can check the types of option boards inserted in slot 1 3 CNFA4 Erase All Trip Deletes all saved fault history CNF 60 Add Title Up When the inverter body software version is upgraded and added with new codes this ensures that the display and add functions of the codes added to the previous version keypad are activated If you set this code to Yes and remove and re insert the keypad the digital keypad title is updated CNF 62 WH Count Reset The accumulated power consumption is deleted Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed LSis 7 53 7 Application Functions 7 54 7 30 Timer Function Setting Px terminal function Px Define Timer n SOM setting Px P1 P7 Im i i ou 31 dad relay Relay 1 item 28 Timer Multi function Out OU 33 output 1 item Q1 Define OU 55 Timer On Delay TimerOn Delay 3 00 0 00 100 sec OU 56 Timer Off Delay TimerOff Delay 1 00 0 00 100 sec This is a timer function of the multi function input terminals You can switch on or off multi function output including relay after a user defined period of time 1n 65 71 Px Define Set the terminal for the timer among the m
69. cover as shown in the figure 3 5 Y Ventilatiog direction F 10 cm or longer _ 0 08in ens direction When installing the inverters with different secure the installation 1 97in or lager Ventilation Jirection 10 cm or longer space based on the high capacity inverter venias direction I 9 e capacities side by side zu A Sy as zs Figure 3 5 Remove the top covers for the side by side installation Install the panel so that the high temperature air generated by the inverter can be exhausted with ease For compliance with EMC requirements product must be installed inside of metallic cabinet 3 2 LSIs 3 Installation 3 2 Installation Checklist Check the mechanical and electrical installation environment before starting the inverter Read the following checklist carefully Be sure to read the safety precautions in this manual before using the inverter Checklist Mechanical installation checklist Check if the ambient environment satisfies the operation conditions Check Precautions before Installation Leave sufficient ambient space around the inverter to prevent heat saturation The inverter produces a substantial amount of heat Check if the air is circulating normally Check if the motor and
70. displayed and you cannot see parameter mode to change parameters If you enter the password again UL mark disappears and the hide parameter mode function is disabled B Prohibit parameter change Setting LCD display Setting range dr 94 Password registration 0 9999 di 95 Parameter lock i 7 0 9999 setting CNF 52 Lock parameter edit Key Lock Set Un locked 0 9999 E CNF 53 Password for locking Key tock Pw Passward 0 9999 parameter mode 3 Only displayed when the LCD loader is installed Only displayed when the LCD loader is installed Only displayed when the LCD loader is installed 38 Only displayed when the LCD loader is installed 748 LSIs 7 Application Functions You can use the password registered by the user to prohibit the parameter change CNF 53 Key Lock PW Register the password to be used to prohibit the parameter change Register the password as in the following sequence Table 7 20 Registration of password to be used to prohibit the parameter change Order Description 4 Press the PROG key in CNF 52 code to display the previous password registration window The factory default is No 0 For the first registration enter No 0 2 If there is a previous password register it 3 If the entered password matches the previous password a display window appears for you to register new password 4 If the entered pas
71. dr Grp 0h1200 bA Grp 100 communication common 0h1300 Ad Grp area 0h1400 Cn Grp 0h1500 In Grp 0h1600 OU Grp 0h1700 CM Grp 0h1800 AP Grp 0h1B00 Pr Grp 0h1C00 M2 Grp 9 6 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 1 9 Parameter Group for Periodic Data Transmission Can communicate using communication address registered at communication function group CM It is convenient since it communicates using various parameters as a communication frame at the same time Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range Output CM 31 38 communication Para Status x 0000 FFFF Hex address x Input CM 51 58 communication Para Control x 0000 FFFF Hex address x Bx 1 8 Communication address 0h0100 0h0107 Can read data value of the parameter corresponding to communication code registered at CM 31 38 Status Para x Read only Communication address 0h0110 0h0117 Can write and read data value of the parameter corresponding to communication code registered at CM 51 58 Control Para x Can read write Table 9 5 0h0100 0h0117 Currently registered CM Grp parameter Address 0h0100 Parameter Status Parameter 1 Assigned content by bit Parameter communication code value registered at CM 31 0h0101 Status Parameter 2 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 32 0h0102 Status Parameter 3 Parameter communication code value regist
72. drive device are ready to start Electrical installation checklist Check that the inverter is securely grounded Please replace any condenser that is 2 years old or more Match the input voltage with inverter s rated input voltage Connect the input power to inverter input terminal R S T and use the correct torque for fastening Check that the correct input power fuse or protective device and breaker are installed Place the motor cable away from other cables Check the external input output connection Make sure that input power is not connected to the inverter s output terminal LSis 3 3 3 Installation 3 3 Installation and Commissioning Procedures Check the purchased product Check if the place and environment are suitable for installation of S100 Install the unit Check if the standard settings are suitable for the intended use Motor s rated frequency 50 or 60Hz Load type Pump and others Max output frequency 50 Hz Connect the control cables Apply power Adjust the acceleration deceleration time as neccessary Set the rotation speed value and input the start sianal Motor accelerates up to the preset speed 34 LSIs 4 Wiring Wiring Wiring Precautions The inverter may be damaged if the input power is connected to the inverter s output terminal U V W For the power and motor terminals use a crimp terminal with insulation cap Ensure that there
73. elo 11 14 LS 1s 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection B Regular inspection bi annually Inspection Inspection Things to Inspection Judgement Inspection area Item inspect method criteria equipment Disconnect inverter and Megger check short R S T U between main V W terminal Main circuit All circuit terminal and then 5 MO or over pened megger and ground measure from terminal this section to ground terminal using megger Megger check Insulation between Disconnect U V Motor Resi output terminal W and tie up 5 MQ or over resina esistance and ground motor wiring 99 terminal LSTS 11 15 Quality Assurance Product Name LSIS Standard Inverter Sp E Model Name LSLV S100 ae Name Customer Address Phone Name Retailer Address Phone This product was produced under sirict quality control and test procedures of LS industrial Systems technicians It s term of warranty is 12 months after the date of installation If no date of installation is written the warranty is valid for 18 months after the date of manufacture However this term of warranty may change depending on contract terms Free Technical Support If malfunction occurs when the product has been used in a proper manner and the product warranty has not expired contact one of our agencies or designated service centers We will repair the product
74. frequency 1 5 Square 2 The voltage is output proportionally to the value of the frequency raised to the 2nd power command frequency 2 It is used for variable torque VT load such as fan or pump Voltage 100 Frequency Base frequency Figure 6 24 Square reduction V F pattern operation B User defined V F Pattern Operation Setting LCD display Setting range bA 07 V F pattern V F Pattern 2 User V F 0 3 0 Max bA 41 User frequency 1 User Freq 1 15 00 frequency Hz bA 42 User voltage 1 User Volt 1 25 0 100 0 Max bA 43 User frequency 2 User Freq 2 30 00 frequency Hz bA 44 User voltage 2 User Volt 2 50 0 100 0 Max bA 45 User frequency 3 User Freq 3 45 00 frequency Hz bA 46 User voltage 3 User Volt 3 75 0 100 96 bA 47 User frequency 4 User Freq 4 60 00 n Mr Hz requency bA 48 User voltage 4 User Volt 4 100 0 10096 96 The user can make the setting according to the V F and load patterns of a special motor instead of a general induction motor bA 41 User Freq 1 bA 48 User Volt 4 Select an arbitrary frequency between the start frequency and the maximum frequency to set the user frequency User Freq x and set the voltages corresponding to each frequency to the user voltage User Volt x 6 30 LS 1s 6 Basic Functions The output voltage 100 is based on the bA 15 Rated Volt setting However it is based on the input voltage
75. has stopped or the fan is obstructed with dust and dirt Clean the motor fan to remove the foreign substance B The motor stops during acceleration or when the load is connected Measure The load is too high Decrease the load Replace the motor and the inverter with those of a higher capacity 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection B The motor does not accelerate The acceleration time is too long Cause Measure The frequency command value is low Check the frequency command input a correct value and try again The load is too high Decrease the load Increase the acceleration time Check the mechanical brake status The acceleration time setting is too long Check and change the acceleration time The combined value of the motor properties and the inverter parameter settings Check and change the parameters associated with the motor The level for stall prevention during acceleration is low Check and change the stall prevention level The level for stall prevention during operation is low Check and change the stall prevention level The starting torque is insufficient Change to vector control operation and try again Auto tuning required If the same problem persists increase the motor and the inverter capacity B Vibration occurs in rotation during operation Cause Measure The load variance is too high Increase the c
76. if P Gain 2 is less than 100 0 the response goes down For example if Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain1 is 50 0 and Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain2 is 50 0 the middle speed or faster speed controller P gain is 25 096 Cn 24 ASR SL I Gain2 is also set as percentage to the ICn 24 ASR SL I Gain1 For gain the smaller the gain 2 is the slower the response time is For example if Cn 23 ASR SL Gain1 is 100ms and Cn 23 ASR SL I Gain2 is 50 0 the middle speed or faster speed controller gain is 200 ms The controller gain is set according to the default motor parameters and Acc Dec time Flux estimator gain Cn 26 Flux P Gain Cn 27 Flux I Gain Cn 85 87 Flux P Gain1 3 Cn 88 90 Flux I Gain1 3 The rotor flux estimator is required to control the sensorless vector For the adjustment of flux estimator gain refer to the sensorless vector control operation guide Speed estimator gain Cn 28 S Est P Gain1 Cn 29 S Est Gain1 Cn 30 S Est Gain2 You can change the speed estimator gain of the sensorless vector control For the adjustment of speed estimator gain refer to the sensorless vector control operation guide Sensorless current controller gain Cn 31 ACR SL P Gain Cn 32 ACR SL Gain Adjust the P and gains of the sensorless current controller For the adjustment of sensorless current controller gain refer to the sensorless vector control operation guide Torque limit tis possible to limit the amount of torque generated in the motor in fo
77. if you only set the multi function terminal block to RUN Enable Px Define 71 d AR Px P1 P7 1 DI Dependent The operation command is recognized by multi function input terminals 0 Always Enable The safe operation mode does not work Ad 70 Run En Mode Sets the inverter operation when the multi function input terminal set to the safe operation mode is off 0 Free Run When the multi function terminal is off the inverter output power is cut off 1 Q Stop Use the safe operation mode deceleration time Q Stop Time to decelerate You need to input the operation command again to enable operation even if the multi function terminal is on 2 Q Stop Resume Use the safe operation mode deceleration time Q Stop Time to decelerate With the operation command on the operation starts normally when the multi function terminal is inputted Ad 71 Run Dis Stop Ad 72 Q Stop Time If Ad 71 Run Dis Stop is set to NO 1 Q Stop or No 2 Q Stop Resume set the deceleration time 7 12 LSIs 7 Application Functions Ad 71 Ad 71 Ad 71 0 Free Run 1 Q Stop 2 Q Stop Resume memo 77 N 77 Y RUN Enable Fx EE cu Figure 7 10 Safe operation mode 7 7 Dwell operation LCD display Setting Setting range Ad 20 Dwell frequency on Acc Dwell Freq 5 00 Start frequency Hz acceleration Max frequency Ad 21 Dwell operation
78. in this function code lt is used in a system in which master cannot deal with fast response of slave Set this function code to appropriate value for smooth master slave communication Master A A Request j Response Request j i Response Y i Y i 000 Slave CM 5 Resp Delay CM 5 Resp Delay Figure 9 2 CM 05 Resp Delay 9 1 4 Setting Operation Command and Frequency Group LCD display Seiting pui Operation Operation drv command Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0 4 method Frequency Operation Frq setting method Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0 12 Select drv Frq of the operation group to No 3 and 6 Int 485 like above Then operation command and frequency for parameter in common area can be set via communication function 9 1 5 Command Loss Protective Operation Set judging standard and protective operation in case of communication problem during certain time LCD display Setting Setting range Motion at Pr 12 speed post emg 1 Free Run 0 5 Mode command loss Time to judge Pr 13 speed Lost Cmd Time 1 0 0 1 120 s sec command loss Operation y Pr 14 frequency Lost Preset F 0 00 Maximum Hz at speed frequenc command loss i i Hz Multi function OU 31 relay 1 item Relay 1 Lost Multi functi 13 Command 0585 i ulti function OU ae output 1 item Or eine 9 4 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time Select the motion of the in
79. inverter output by the function selection of a multi function terminal Select No 5 BX in the functions of No In 65 71 H W Diag Fatal When the problems occurs in the memory EEPRom analog digital converter output ADC Off Set CPU malfunction Watch Dog 1 Watch Dog 2 and others of the inverter EEP Err When the problem occurs at the parameter read write due to KPD EEP Rom burn out etc ADC Off Set When the problems occurs in the current sensing section U V W CT etc ne NTC Open Latch This fault occurs if the problem is detected with the temperature detection sensor of the IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Fan Trip Latch This fault occurs if a problem is detected in the cooling fan Works only when Pr 79 is set to No 0 Applicable to product below 22 kW DON Pre PID Fail Latch If the controlled variable PID feedback is input below set value by the function settings of AP 34 36 during the Pre PID operation it is judged as an error in the load system and the fault occurs Ext Brake Latch Works when operating with external brake signal by the function selection of a multi function terminal This fault occurs if the inverter output current at the inverter start remains below Ad 41 Set any of OU 31 and 32 to No 35 BR Control 11 2 Y 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection SEG display LCD display
80. motor is locked Unlock the motor or decrease the load The load is too heavy Operate the motor independently An emergency stop signal is input Reset the emergency stop signal and try again The wiring for the control circuit terminal is incorrect Check the wiring for the control circuit terminal perform correct wiring and try again The selection for the input method of frequency command is incorrect Check the input method of frequency command perform correct setting and try again The selection for the voltage current input of the main frequency command is incorrect Check the voltage current input perform correct setting and try again The selection for the sink mode source mode is incorrect Check the sink mode source mode setting change the setting correctly and try again The frequency command value is too low The STOP key is pressed Check the frequency command to input a value above the minimum frequency and try again This is normal stop The motor torque is too low Use a different inverter control type such as V F Sensorless etc LSis 11 7 Troubleshooting and Inspection Measure If the same problem persists increase the inverter and motor capacity The motor rotates in the direction opposite to the command Cause Measure The wiring for the motor output cable is incorrect Change over any 2 from 3 motor wire
81. of Motor Output Voltage 6 33 Advantages Using Communication Method 9 1 Alarm RUNGON ia ier RUE 11 4 Altitude vibration tisine cutee vii Ambient environment ssessssseseeeeneeeenenennnne vii Ambient humidity Ambient pressure Ambient temperature ooocccnoccccnoccnonananonananccon nono nan ana nanancn no vii Application Function Group eene 10 32 Automatic energy saving operation sse 7 35 Automatic restart operation eeesseeeeeees 7 39 Automatic terque DO uma be cese des 6 33 Auto Tuning Aux speed setting types Basic function QTOUP oooooncccoccccocanonccancnonnanonananccnna conan Brake Controls iniciei e a Brake engage sequence ccccooccccnccccnononcconancncnanananananac no 7 57 Brake release sequence eere 7 57 Built in EMC Filter 4 13 Carrier frequency size we 7 41 Changing Multi step Acc Dec Time by Setting Acc Dec Time Transition Frequency Cleaning etat RUN RUE Commercial Switching Operation Communication Function Group ssssse Communication Standard Communication System Configuration Continuous Rated Current Derating for Inverters 2 13 Control Function Group eee 10 14 Cooling fan control sania ee sas 7 46
82. or less vibrations of 5 9m sec 1G or less Ambient pressure 70 106 kPa Altitude vibration B Wiring Do not install phase advanced capacitor surge filter or radio noise filter on the output of the inverter Connect output side terminals U V and W in the correct order The inverter may be damaged if the terminals are connected incorrectly LSIs vii Usage Precautions Be careful Connecting input side terminals R S T into output side terminals U V W incorrectly and vice versa may damage the inverter Wiring or inspection must be performed by a qualified technician Install the inverter before wiring B Starting the inverter Check all parameters before operation Parameter change may be necessary depending on the load Do not supply a voltage to each terminal which exceeds the range outlined by the manual Providing excess voltage may damage the inverter B Usage If you selected the auto restart function please keep in mind that operation automatically restarts after a stop caused by a trip condition Since the stop key on the keypad works when it is set to use install an emergency stop switch separately The inverter restarts when you reset a trip condition while the operating signal is inputted Press the RESET switch after checking the operating signal Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter The electronic thermal function may not protect the motor
83. range Operation ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 20 0 0 0 600 0 sec Operation dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 30 0 0 0 600 0 sec Acc Dec Ramp T Delta x bA 08 E Mode 1 Freq 0 1 requency If you set 08 in the basic function group bA to Delta Freq you can set the acceleration and deceleration time to the time elapsed from the current operation frequency at constant speed to the target frequency in the next step With the acceleration time set to 5 sec and 10 Hz 30 Hz step operation at stationary state the behavior of the acceleration time will be as follows Operation command Operation Frequency 5 Seconds 20Hz 5 Seconds Time Sec Figure 6 17 Acceleration time set to 5 sec and 10 Hz 30 Hz step operation at stationary state 3 Setting Multi step Acc Dec Time Using Multi function Terminals LCD display Setting Setting range Operation ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 20 0 0 0 600 0 sec Operation dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 30 0 0 0 600 0 sec Multi step Beda bA 70 acceleration time ACC Time X XX 0 0 600 0 sec 82 1 7 1 7 Multi step bA a deceleration time Dec Time X XX 0 0 600 0 sec 83 1 7 1 7 l Setting Px Px Define i Se r terminal function Px P1 P7 1 XOEL 0 49 y Setting Px Px Define XCEL i SS i terminal function Px P1 P7 M Multi step In 89 command delay In Check Time 1 1 5000 ms time It is possible t
84. reducing the input as much as a value corresponding to 1 4 of the quantizing value will change the output frequency Output frequency 0 025 0 1 0 2 0 075 0 175 Figure 6 4 In 17 V1 Quantizing 3 When supplying 10 to 10 V EI 9 925 10 9 975 LCD display Analogue input V Setting range Operation Frq Oo iU Freq Ref Src V1 Frequency for 0 Max In 01 maximum analog Freq at 10096 60 00 f i Hz requency input In os Vt inputamount v1 Monitor 0 00 0 00 1200V V display In 06 V1 input polarity W4 Polarity Bipolar 0 1 selection In jo Vi Minimum soi 0 00 10 00 0 00V V voltage Output 96 at the r 100 00 In 13 V1 min voltage wire yt por 0 00 P In da V F Maximam input xu uas 10 00 1200 000V V voltage Output 96 at the 4 i i 100 00 3 In 15 V1 max voltage V1 Perc y2 100 00 0 00 Yo 6 6 LSIs 6 Basic Functions Set In 06 to 1 Bipolar Codes from In 12 to 15 are displayed only for Bipolar and you can make settings for the voltage with the range of 0 to 10 V supplied to the V1 terminal Make an input to V1 terminal with a potentiometer using the voltage output of the external controller as shown in the figure below 10 10 V Figure 6 5 Settings for the voltage with the range of 10 to 10 V supplied to the V1 terminal The output frequency for the bidirectional voltage input 10 to 10 V will show the followi
85. speed due to excessive excitation Voltage 100 Positive direction Without torque boost torque boost volume Reverse direction torque boost volume Figure 6 26 Manual torque boost 6 32 LS Is c 6 Basic Functions B Auto Torque Boost When a large amount of starting torque is required or automatic adjustment function is used Group Code number Funcion Setting display Setting Range display dr 15 Torque Boost 1 Auto 0 1 bA 20 Auto Tuning 3 Rs Lsigma Using the motor parameters the inverter will automatically calculate the amount of torque boost and output the voltage Since the stator resistance the inductance value and no load current value of the motor are required to have the automatic torque boost function to operate properly be sure to perform auto tuning bA 20 Auto Tuning prior to use See page 7 10 Auto Tuning 6 16 Adjustment of Motor Output Voltage Setting the motor voltage when the input power supply is different from the motor voltage specification LCD display voltage Enter the voltage stated on the motor nameplate The set voltage value becomes the output voltage value at the base frequency At a level higher than the base frequency the output voltage will be dependent on the set value if the input voltage is higher than the set voltage But if it is lower the input voltage will be output Setting Setting range Unit Group Cod
86. terminal block In other words if the reverse operation terminal RX is input to the terminal block and the motor rotates in the forward direction in the Local mode it will rotate in the reverse direction when you switch to Remote 2 When it is the digital command source Digital command source refers to all of the command sources except for the terminal block source That is the digital command source includes communication and keypad sources For these digital command sources the inverter stops first and then begins to operate with the next command At this moment the target frequency is set to the currently set frequency source B State in Which a Terminal is Turned On When Power is On If the terminals of FX RX FWD JOG REV JOG and PRE EXCITE are turned on already when Ad 10 Power on Run is set to 0 No it is possible to operate the inverter with the keypad by switching to the Local mode However it will not operate if you switch to the Remote mode again In other words if at least one of the five terminals mentioned above is set and turned on when the power is on the motor will operate in neither FX nor RX Thus when the Power on Run is set to No make sure to turn on the inverter and then turn off all of the above terminals in order to run the motor with the relevant terminal B State in Which the Motor Stopped Due to Trip While Operating When the motor stops due to trip and the initialization is performed again keypad opera
87. the changed operation frequency is displayed 13 You should set the In 65 71 multi functional input terminal function to no 26 2 Motor to display it 54 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad How to move between groups in the position which is not the first code of each group Operation group Drive group Basic function group You can press the left and right shift keys in the function code to move to no 0 code of each group at once Do as follows to move from no 96 code of the drive group to the basic function group d 96 Indicates no 95 code of the drive group 5s Press the right shift key M or left shift key 4 ac 2 d n Indicates dr O the first code of the drive group Ks Press the right shift key f 3 HA g Indicates bA O the first code of the basic function group LSis 55 5 Using the Keypad 5 5 Moving between Codes within the Group B How to move between codes within the operation group Indicates the first code of the 1 operation group 0 00 v Press the up key A det 2 Indicates the 3rd code of the operation group dEC a Press and hold the up key A Indicates the last code of the operation group drC Indicates the 2nd code of the operation group ACC Press the up key A Co gue CL im i inr la dl bt 4 In the last code of the operation Operation group group press the up key A once mor
88. the current output frequency is 30 Hz The following shows how to tune OU 08 AO2 Gain and OU 09 AO2 Bias when 4 20 mA is used for output not 0 20 mA 1 Set OU 07 AO2 Mode to Constant and OU 11 AO2 Const to 0 0 2 Set OU 09 AO2 Bias to 20 0 and then measure the current output to check if it is 4 mA If it is smaller than 4 mA increase OU 09 AO2 Bias little by little until 4 mA is measured On the contrary if it is larger than 4 mA decrease OU 09 AO2 Bias little by little until 4 mA is measured Set OU 11 AO2 Const to 100 0 Set OU 08 AO2 Gain to 80 0 and then measure the current output to check if it is 20 mA If it is smaller than 20 mA increase OU 08 AO2 Gain little by little until 20 mA is measured On the contrary if it is larger than 20 mA decrease OU 08 AC Gain little by little until 20 mA is measured The function for each code is the same as the items of 0 10 V voltage output above explained and the output range is 4 20 mA LSis 7 61 7 Application Functions 7 35 Digital Output B Select terminal block multi function output terminal and relay function LCD display Setting Setting range OU 30 Fault output item Trip Out Mode 010 E bit OU 31 Multi function relay 1 Relay 1 29 Trip item OU 33 MUM Uncten PI pene al Run 4 1 item OU 41 Multifunction output DO Status 00 11 bit monitoring The fault relay is activated based on OU
89. to remove the front cover Remove the IO cover If an LCD loader is used remove the plastic cover on the lower side of the IO cover A OO N Connect the wiring to the IO terminal If an LCD loader is used connect the loader cable to the RJ 45 connector LSis 4 Wiring 4 4 Power Terminal Wiring Diagram 3 phase AC L input rated O input voltage C Q DB resistance rcial power input terminal Reactor 08 ion terminal Note Necessary screen around motor wires not shown for clarity Table 4 2 0 4 22 kW 200 V 400 V main circuit terminal name and description Terminal symbol Terminal name Description of the terminal R L1 S L2 T L3 AC power input Connects the commercial AC input P1 DC voltage terminal DC link voltage terminal N DC voltage terminal DC link voltage terminal P2 B A DE Connects the braking resistance U V W Inverter output Connects the 3 phase induction motor LSis 45 4 Wiring 4 5 Control Terminal Block Wiring Diagram Please refer to the diagram for I O terminal setting at back side of I O cover Figure 4 4 Standard I O terminal Multi function input Terminal Resistor Default de PNP NPN Analog Output Analog output i mm O Default Frequency Pulse output rut Default Frequency 24V power Analog input Pulse
90. to use the EMC filter EMC filter grounding bolt Figure 4 8 Disabling 5 5 22 kW or less EMC filter function 1 Replace the EMC filter grounding bolt with the plastic bolt in the wiring bracket to disable the EMC filter function Before starting to work use a voltage tester to check the DC voltage across P1 and N 10 minutes after cutting off the inverter power If EMC filter is on leakage current increases If the input power is an asymmetrical grounding structure such as Delta connection do not use the EMC filter Otherwise it may result in an electric shock Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential Through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive ona corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged LSis 411 4 Wiring Table 4 5 Asymmetrical grounding structure Asymmetrical grounding structure NS R L1 The AA R L1 A phase of intermediate A delta C tab of a phase A A connection is of delta C A grounded YY Y S L2 connection is NM S L2 TN systems grounded T L3 TN systems T L3 L R L1 3 27 RiL1 Grounded on lt 3 phase S L2 5 the end of 3 conne
91. under some conditions Do not start or stop the inverter with a magnetic contactor that is installed on the input power supply Minimize electromagnetic interference by using a noise filter etc Some electronic devices may not work correctly if they are used near the inverter Be sure to take precautions If the input current is unbalanced install a reactor Phase advanced capacitors or generators may overheat and get damaged by the power frequency from the inverter If you initialize parameters the parameter values are restored to factory defaults Therefore please reconfigure the parameters as required if you operate after initialization The inverter is capable of operating a motor at high speeds Before increasing the inverter maximum output frequency make sure that the motor s maximum operating speeds are not exceeded Stopping torque does not occur when the inverter s DC braking is used If a stop torque is required please install a braking resistor The inverter is designed for 3 phase motor operation Do not use the inverter to operate a single phase motor B Prevention Measures for Abnormal Situations If the inverter is damaged and becomes uncontrollable the machine may cause a dangerous situation Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these situations This product can cause a d c current in the protective earthing conductor Where a residual current operated protective RCD or mon
92. when the detected frequency width is set to 10 Hz 2 FDT 2 Activated when the user defined frequency matches the detected frequency FDT frequency and above No 0 FDT 1 is satisfied Absolute value set frequency detected frequency lt detected frequency width 2 amp FDT 1 In the following graph the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz LCD display Seiting Setting range OU 57 Detected FDT Frequency 30 00 0 00 Max Hz frequency frequency ou 58 Detected FDT Band 10 00 amp 00 Max AE frequency band frequency 50Hz Preset 30Hz frequency 25Hz frequency Q1 Figure 7 33 FDT 2 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz LSis 7 63 7 Application Functions 3 FDT 3 Activated when the operation frequency is as follows Absolute value output frequency operation frequency lt detected frequency width 2 OU 57 a FDT Frequency 30 00 0 00 Max Hz requency frequency OU 58 Detected FDT Band 10 00 puncte Hz frequency band frequency 35Hz 25Hz frequency Q1 al Operon or A Figure 7 34 FDT 3 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz 4 FDT 4 You can set the conditions separately for acceleration and deceleration Acceleration Operation frequency gt Detected frequency Deceleration Operation freq
93. which is not deceleration by stop command Frequency Deceleration dwell time Change target frequency Deceleration dwell time Deceleration dwell frequency Figure 7 13 Deceleration dwell 7 14 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 8 Slip compensation operation In the induction motor the difference between motor rotation speed and frequency synchronous speed gets bigger depending on the load factor This speed difference slip is used for a load that needs compensation RPM Sync speed Slip compensation Motor RPM Load factor control Figure 7 14 Slip compensation operation LCD display Setting Setting range dr 09 Control mode Control Mode Slip Compen 0 75 kW dr 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 0 75 kW is 0 15 standard bA 1 Number of motor Pole Number 4 2 48 poles A 90 0 75 kW is i bA 12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip standard 0 3000 rpm Rated motor 3 6 0 75 kW is 1 0 DA 13 current Rated Gur standard 1000 0 A Motor no load 1 6 0 75 kW is 0 5 p is current Nolbad UIT standard 1000 0 5 Vis 72 0 75 kW is bA 16 Motor efficiency Efficiency standard 70 100 Jo bA 17 Load inertia rate Inertia Rate Ree es 0 8 standard dr 09 Control Mode Check if the control mode is set to No 2 Slip Compen dr 14 Motor Capacity Set the capacity of the motor connected to the output of the inverter bA 11
94. will be in free run state At this moment a trip may occur again if the inverter begins to operate thus if you set the bit 2 to 1 in the Cn 71 speed search the inverter will start to operate by performing speed search on fault reset If the speed search is not selected it will accelerate to the normal V F pattern without speed search on acceleration If this function is not required the operation command should be turned off and then on after reset in order to begin operation Frequency L L Reset C Operation command EEEEEEEEEN A EO O O if Pr 08 0 if Pr 08 1 Figure 6 15 Comparison of the RST Restart function when it is set to Pr 08 0 or Pr 08 1 When using this function be aware of the risk of accident because the motor will rotate if a RUN command is present on the terminal block or the keypad after a trip has been reset LSis 6 21 6 Basic Functions 6 11 Setting Acc Dec Time 1 Acc Dec time setting based on max frequency LCD Setting display Setting range Operation ACC Acceleration time Acc Time 20 0 0 0 600 0 sec Operation dEC Deceleration time Dec Time 30 0 0 0 600 0 sec dr 20 coh lal Max Freq 60 00 40 00 400 00 Hz requency bA og AcciDec reference Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq 0 1 requency bA 09 Time unit setting Time scale 1 0 1 sec 0 2 If you set 08 in the basic function group bA to Max Freq you can accelerate and decelerate with the s
95. 0 PID lower limit frequency PID Limit Lo 0 5 ped Hz 31 PID output reverse PID Out Inv 0 No 0 1 32 PID output scale a 100 0 P 34 PID controller Pre PID 0 00 0 Max Hz motion frequency Freq i frequency das PR controler Pre PID Exit 0 0 0 0 100 0 motion level 36 PID controller Pre PID 600 0 9999 Boe motion delay time Delay 37 PID sleep mode PID Sleep 60 0 0 999 9 TN delay time DT 38 PID sleep mode frequency i d 0 00 aped Hz PID 39 PID wake up level WakeUp 35 0 100 96 Lev PID Belo 40 PID wake up mode setting WakeUp 0 Ww 0 2 Mod Level 42 PID controller unit PID UnitSel 0 0 12 selection 43 PID unit gain pana 100 0 0 300 44 PID unit scale aera 2 xi 0 4 45 PID 2nd proportional gain in 100 00 0 1000 96 65 Px Define l Px terminal function setting Px P1 22 Term E ul P7 Clear ds Px Define is In 7 Px terminal function setting Px P1 23 ER P7 p 65 Px Define P 7 Px terminal function setting Px P1 24 Gain j P7 2 PID controls the output frequency of the inverter to control the flux temperature tension and other system processes AP 01 App Mode Set to No 2 Proc PID to set the functions for process PID AP 16 PID Output Display the current output value of PID controller The unit gain and scale defined in AP 42 AP 43 and AP 44 are applied to the value LSis 7 17 7 Application Functions AP 17 PID Ref Value Display the reference currently
96. 0 0 Output frequency 0 400 Hz IM Sensorless 0 120 Hz Output voltage V 3 phase 380 480V Voltage V 3 phase 380 480 VAC 15 10 Input Input frequency 50 60 Hz 5 rating Rated current Heavy load 1 8 3 2 4 4 6 0 10 4 11 0 A Light load 2 1 4 3 5 9 8 1 14 0 14 0 Weight Kg 0 9 0 9 1 3 1 5 2 0 2 0 2 5 5 22 kW Type Name LSLV xxxx S100 4xxx HP 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 Applicable motors kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 Rated capacity kVA 9 1 12 2 17 5 22 9 28 2 33 5 Rated current Heavy load 12 16 24 30 39 45 Output A Light load 16 23 30 38 44 58 rating Output frequency 0 400 Hz IM Sensorless 0 120 Hz Output voltage V 3 phase 380 480V Voltage V 3 phase 380 480 VAC 15 10 Input Input frequency 50 60 Hz 5 rating pated current Heavyload 129 175 265 334 43 6 507 A Light load 17 5 25 4 33 4 42 5 49 5 65 7 Weight Kg 3 3 3 4 4 6 4 8 7 5 7 5 LSis 23 2 Standard 2 1 4 Common Features 1 Control Control method V F control slip compensation sensorless vector Frequency setting Digital command 0 01 Hz resolution Analog command 0 06 Hz Max frequency 60 Hz Frequency level 1 of max output frequency V F pattern Linear square user V F Heavy load current rating 150 1 minute light load current rating 120 1 minute Ov
97. 0 88 14 3 13 05 LSLV0022S 100 2 20 600 0 56 20 1 3 18 45 LSLV0037S100 2 32 600 0 39 30 1 3 26 35 LSLV0040S100 2 50 600 0 39 30 1 3 26 35 LSLV00558100 2 50 600 0 30 34 1 60 32 LSLV00758100 2 63 600 0 22 45 1 25 43 LSLV0110S100 2 80 600 0 16 64 0 95 61 LSLV0150S100 2 100 600 0 13 79 0 70 75 LSLV0185S 100 2 125 600 0 11 94 0 50 89 LSLV0220S100 2 160 600 0 08 125 0 35 120 LSLV0004S 100 4 10 600 4 81 4 8 16 4 27 LSLV0008S 100 4 10 600 4 81 4 8 16 4 27 LSLV0015S 100 4 10 600 3 23 7 5 12 6 41 LSLV0022S 100 4 15 600 2 34 10 8 8 9 LSLV0037S 100 4 20 600 1 22 15 5 4 13 2 LSLV0040S 100 4 32 600 1 22 15 5 4 13 2 LSLV0055S 100 4 32 600 1 12 19 3 20 T7 LSLV00758100 4 35 600 0 78 27 2 50 25 LSLV0110S100 4 50 600 0 59 35 1 90 32 LSLV0150S 100 4 63 600 0 46 44 1 40 41 LSLV01858100 4 70 600 0 40 52 1 00 49 LSLV0220S100 4 100 600 0 30 68 0 70 64 Short Circuit FUSE BREAKER Marking Use Class H or RK5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only See the table above For the Voltage and Current rating of the fuse and the breaker 218 LSIs 3 Installation 3 Installation 3 1 Precautions before installation The inverter uses plastic parts Handle the inverter carefully so as not to damage it A Do not move the product by only holding the cover Install the inverter vertically with bolts on the firm surface that can support the weight of the inverter Since the inverter s life can be severely affected b
98. 0 A contact 52 0h1634 output NO 00 X A 7 68 olo contact NC NO Sel A B contact selection 1 NC Sad TripOut 53 0h1635 output 0 00 100 00 s 0 00 O A 7 67 O O OnDly On delay Faul TripOut 54 0h1636 output OffDI 0 00 100 00 s 0 00 O A 7 67 O O Off delay y 55 0h1637 Timer TimerOn o oo 100 00 s 0 00 O A 76 lolo On delay Delay Timer TimerOff 56 0h1638 Off delay Delay 0 00 100 00 s 0 00 O A 7 66 O O 57 0h1639 DISAIS coro 0 00 Max 30100 O A 763 O 0 frequency Frequency frequency Hz Detected 0 00 Max 58 0h163A frequency FDT Band 1 10 00 O A 7 63 O O frequency Hz band 0 Frequency 1 Output Current 2 Output Voltage 3 DCLink Voltage 4 Torque 5 Output Power 61 0h163D Pulse TO Mode 6 1888 0 O A 760 lolo output gain 7 Iqse 8 Target Freq 9 Ramp Freq 10 Speed Fdb PID Ref te Value PID Fdb 13 Value 14 PID Output 15 Constant Pulse 1000 0 62 0h163E output gain TO Gain 1000 0 100 0 O A 7 60 O O Pulse 100 0 63 0h163F output bias TO Bias 100 0 0 0 O A 7 60 O O 77 The initial value 00 will be displayed in SEG as 10 26 LSIS n 10 Table of Functions 64 Communication i address 0h1640 Pulse output filter LCD display TO Filter Setting range 0 10000 ms Initial value O A Control Reference Mode page 7 60 O O 65 0h1641 Pulse output constant output 2 TO Const 0 0
99. 00 frequency Hz input In 50 2 input amount 12 Monitor 0 00 0 00 20 00 mA display In 52 input ume 12 Filter 10 0 10000 ms constant In 53 amp 12 Curr x1 4 00 0 00 20 00 mA current In 54 Output atthel2 2 perc y 0 00 0 100 min current In 55 2 maximun input 12 Curr x2 24 00 0 00 24 00 mA current Output at the 12 0 00 o In 56 max CUORE I2 Perc y2 100 00 100 00 o Changing rotation 7 In 61 direction of 12 12 Inverting 0 No 0 1 In 62 12 quantization level 12 Quantizing 0 04 0 04 10 00 Select 5 12 from the Frq code of the operation group Set the frequency by supplying current ranging from 0 to 20 mA to the I2 terminal of the terminal block In 01 Freq at 100 Set the operation frequency on max current input Set the operation frequency when the value set from In 56 is 100 Example 1 When setting In 01 to 40 00 and other codes from In 53 to 56 to the default value and then supplying 20 mA to the 12 terminal the system operates at 40 00 Hz Example 2 When setting In 56 to 50 and the setting values of In 01 and from In 53 to 55 are identical to the default value and then supplying 20 mA to the I2 terminal the system operates at 30 00 Hz In 50 I2 Monitor Shows the magnitude of the current input to the 12 terminal Used to monitor the magnitude of the present current input In 52 12 Filter The set time means the time required to increase the frequency up to approximately 63 of the I2 value m
100. 1 Monitor mode initialization O 0 No 1 Yes 0 No 1 All Grp 2 DrvGrp 3 bA Grp 4 Ad Grp 5 Cn Grp OhOS3E2 Parameter initialization X 6 In Grp 7 0U Grp 7 47 8 CM Grp 9 AP Grp 12 Pr Grp 13 M2 Grp Setting prohibited during trip 0h03E3 eas o 0 No 1 Yes 7 49 0h03E4 Reserved OhO3E5 Delete all fault history A O 0 No 1 Yes OhO3E6 nid user registration i i O 0 No 1 Yes 2 Write 0 9999 0h03E7 Hide parameter mode 0 Hex O 7 48 Read 0 Unlock 1 Lock Write 0 9999 20h03E8 Lock parameter editing 0 Hex O Read 0 Unlock 7 48 1 Lock Easy setting of initial i i OhO3E9 parameters O 0 No 1 Yes 1 Initializing power 7 7 OhO3EA consumption O 0 No 1 Yes 1 Initializing the accumulative i UMISEB time of inverter operation 3 Dene des 1 Initialize cooling fan i Peas accumulated operation time 9 gano ives 1 Be sure to set the parameters very carefully After setting a parameter to 0 through communication set it to another value If a parameter has been set to a value other than 0 and a non zero value is entered again an error message is returned You can find out the previously set value by reading the parameter through communication Since the data is saved to the inverter the communication may be lost due to the extended performance time Therefore be careful when performing setting 2 They are parameters for entering the password When the password is ent
101. 1000 0 o OU 63 Pulseoutputbias TO Bias 0 0 P ICE OU 64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0 10000 ms OU 65 Pulse output ro Const 0 0 0 0 100 0 constant output 2 Pulse output 0 0 5 OU 66 monitor TO Monitor 0 0 1000 0 o Select items outputted from TO Pulse Output terminal of inverter terminal block and adjust their sizes OU 63 TO Filter OU 64 TO Const OU 65 TO Monitor The functions are the same as AO1 OU 61 TO Gain OU 62 TO Bias You can adjust the size and offset If the frequency is selected as the output item the operation works as in the following _ Frequency TO xTOGain TOBias MaxFreq The figure on the next page shows how the pulse output TO changes according to the values of OU 61 TO Gain and OU 62 TO Bias Here Y axis shows the analog output current 0 32 kHz while X axis shows the value of the item to be outputted For example when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and the current output frequency is 30 Hz X axis is 50 in the following figure 7 60 LSIs 7 Application Functions 0U 61 TO Gain 100 0 Factory defaults 0 0 factory defaults 32kHz 26 9kHz E 25 6kHz 20 5kHz 16kHz 4 i OU 62 12 8kHz TO Bias 50 80 100 0 50 80 100 32kHz 32kHz 26 9kHz 22 4kHz 20 096 19 2kHz 6 4kHz 6 4kHz A EE m LE 0 50 80 100 0 50 80 100 Figure 7 31 Pulse output change when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and
102. 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection Level Resets automatically if the fault is corrected It is not saved in the fault history Latch Resets if the reset signal is input after the fault is corrected Fatal Once the fault is corrected the fault is reset if you turn off the inverter power and then turn it on again after the internal charge lamp power is turned off Contact our customer service center if the fault still remains after turning on the power again When using the LCD loader the trip details are displayed in the SEG loader and TRIP message is displayed in the SEG regardless of the trip details When more than one trip occurs the first trip is displayed in the SEG and the subsequent trips are displayed by priority in the SEG B Protection via abnormal internal circuit and external signals Table 11 2 Protection function item via abnormal internal circuit and external signals SEG display ZI a nn LCD display Over Heat Type Latch Contents This fault occurs if the temperature of the inverter heat sink increases more than the specified value Notes P Over Current2 Latch This fault occurs if the DC section in the inverter detects shorted circuit current External Trip Latch External fault signal by the function selection of the multi function terminal Select No 4 External Trip in the functions of No In 65 71 BX Level Blocks the
103. 11 Setting underload rate normal duty essere nennen nennen nnne trennen entere 8 15 Figure 8 12 Setting Heavy load rate heavy duty nennen rennen neret nennen eren enne nenne 8 15 Figure 9 1 Communication system configuration eeessessseseseeeseeeeneeee eene rca 9 2 Figure 9 2 CM 05 Resp Delay Figure 1121 55 22 0 KW irs ine rete ee ere a e dg e eii ee e aen LSis xv Table of Contents EDI List of Tables Table1 1 9S100 ProdicL dre etre eer A eine Aine A EE EE ERE Eti ER e Table 2 1 Dimensions per frame single phase 200 V nennen nnnen rennen eren ennn ennt n nnns Table 2 2 Dimensions per frame 3 phase 200 V nennen nnne neret nn nnne tnnt nnne nennen Table 2 3 Dimensions per frame 3 phase 400 V nennen nentes enne ennrs en ers nnns eter nennen nne e nnne Table 2 4 Specifications for terminal screws ssessssse Table 2 5 Molded case circuit breaker and contactor specifications Table 2 6 Fuse and reactor Specifications ecceeceeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeseneeeaeeseaeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeseeseaeesieeseaeeseaeseaeessaeesneeseeeeneeeeneess Table 4 1 Grounding wire specifications based on the motor capacity sse een eene 4 2 Table 4 2 0 4 22 kW 200 V 400 V main circuit terminal name and description ssseenenn 4 5 Table 4 3 Control circuit terminal description sssessessseseeeeeneneenneennen n
104. 11 V1 Perc y2 In 16 V1 Inverting Able to rotate in the opposite of the current rotation direction by setting to 1 Yes LSis 65 6 Basic Functions In 17 V1 Quantizing Used when the analog signal input to the V1 terminal has high noise Using the value of low pass filter of In 07 may reduce the noise to a certain level however increasing the value will impair the responsiveness and create pulsation with a long period ripple in the output frequency The resolution of the output frequency to the analog input will be reduced but the noise effect will be reduced by the quantizing function in a system sensitive to noise The quantization setting value is the percentage compared to the max analog input value Thus if the max input value is 10 V and the quantization value is set to 1 the frequency will vary by 0 6 Hz at the max frequency of 60 Hz with the interval of 0 1 V The output frequencies corresponding to when the input value is increased and decreased are different from each other in order to eliminate the impact caused by the variation of analog input value As shown in the figure below if after dividing the quantizing value into four equal parts the analog input value is increased inputting a value corresponding to 3 4 of the quantizing value will change the output frequency and then from the next step it will be increased according to the quantizing value In the case that the analog input value is decreased
105. 1B29 Motor cooling Motor 0 Self O A 8 1 olo fan type Cooling 1 Forced cool Cool Electronic 42 0h1B2A thermal 1 ETH 1min 120 200 150 O A 8 1 O O minute rating Electronic 43 0h1B2B thermal ETH Cont 50 150 120 O A 8 1 olo continuous rating 10 36 LSIS 10 Table of Functions C icati LCD Initial Control _jrommunication Name Setting range nto address display value Bit 0000 1111 0001 Accelerating Stall 0010 t E pr 50 0h1B32 prevention Stal 1000 X A 8 5 o o motion and Prevent 0100 At flux braking deceleration 1000 FluxBraking Stall Start frequency 51 0h1B33 Stall Freq 1 stall frequency 60 00 O A 8 5 O O frequency 1 1 Hz 52 0h1B34 Stall level 1 Stall vel 30 250 180 X A 8 5 olo Stall Stall frequency 1 53 0h1B35 frequenoy 2 Stall Freq 2 stall frequency 60 00 O A 8 5 O O 2 Hz 54 0h1B36 Stall level 2 DM 30 250 180 X A 8 5 olo Stall Stall frequency 2 55 0h1B37 f Stall Freq 3 stall frequency 60 00 O A 8 5 O O requency 3 4 Hz 56 0h1B38 Stall level 3 px und 30 250 180 X A 8 5 olo Stall Stall frequency 3 57 0h1B39 Stall Freq 4 Max frequency 60 00 O A 8 5 O O frequency 4 Hz 58 0h1B3A Stall level 4 xp 30 250 180 X A 8 5 olo DB resistor DB o 7 66 0h1B42 warning level Warn ED 0 30
106. 2 Fx Rx 2 At this moment a trip may occur if the inverter begins to operate when the fan load is in free run state Thus if you set the bit 4 to 1 in the Cn 71 speed search the inverter will start to operate by performing speed search on startup If the speed search is not selected it will accelerate to the normal V F pattern without speed search on acceleration If this function is not selected the operation command of the terminal block should be turned off and then on in order to begin operation Input power Frequency Z L Operation command M as if Ad 10 0 if Ad 10 1 Figure 6 14 Comparison of the Power on Run function when it is set to Ad 10 0 or Ad 10 1 6 20 LSIS 6 Basic Functions When using this function be aware of the risk of accident because the motor will rotate as soon as the power is supplied 6 10 Starting on Reset After a Trip Takes Place Reset Restart LCD Setting display Setting range Operation 1 Fx Rx 1 or R operation drv command method Cmd Source 2 Fx Rx 2 0 4 Selection of Pr 08 startup on trip RST Restart 1 Yes 0 1 reset Pr 09 XE el Retry Number 0 0 10 automatic restarts Pr 10 Delay Jie of Retry Delay 1 0 0 60 sec automatic restart When reset after a trip takes place the motor accelerates if the terminal block operating command is turned on When an inverter trip occurs the inverter will cut off the power so that the motor
107. 2 Standard 2 2 3 Rated Current Derating based on Ambient Temperature and Installation Method Ambient temperature and installation method e g side by side installation affects the inverter s rated current capacity Refer to Figure 2 9 1P20 UL Open Drive 100 mE Side by side Mounting 70 50 Drive Rating 0 30 C 4 Ambient Temperature Figure 2 9 Continuous rated current based on ambient temperature and installation method LSis 2 15 2 Standard 2 3 Types of Peripheral Devices 2 3 1 Precautions before Peripheral Device Installation It is necessary to select and connect the peripheral devices correctly Incorrect system configuration and connection hinder normal operation or reduce the inverter s life significantly In the worst case scenario the inverter may be damaged Therefore adhere to the precautions in the manual Use the power within the scope of power specifications allowed C3 by the inverter Power specifications 200V product 200 240V 15 10 Aiti 400 V product 380 480 V 15 10 m Molded case circuit Inrush current can be significant gt breaker or earth leakage at power on Be sure to use the breaker correct class breaker Installation is not required If SEE magnetic contactor is installed NS M Magnetic contactor do not use it to turn on off the sessy inverter frequently otherwise the inverter s life may be reduce
108. 20 Default UL Open amp Enclosed Type 1 Option Cooling method Ambient temperature under the conditions without ice or frost Heavy load 10 50 C Ambient temperature Light load 10 40 C if used at 50 C for light load 80 or less load is recommended Storage temperature 20 C 65 C Ambient humidity 90 relative humidity or less no condensation Altitude vibration 1 000 m or less 5 9 m sec 1G or less There should be no corrosive gas flammable gas oil residue dirt Ambient environment etc in the ambient environment Pollution Degree 2 Environment 8 UL Enclosed type 1 with conduit box installed LSis 25 2 Standard 2 1 5 Dimensions IP20 Type B LSLV0004 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0004 S100 0008 100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V se i io FITERE li 0 paa IOOO 4 eal lj OOOC Hades g O HA AH RT H HHH a TERME ale gt guum D1 OE Ne ME DA i 4 VA PO Mer os Figure 2 1 LSLV0004 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0004 S100 0008 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V 26 LSIs 2 Standard B LSLV0008 0015 S100 sing
109. 3 It is visible if the LCD loader is not installed 34 Only displayed when the LCD loader is installed LSis 7 47 7 Application Functions ESSI 7 24 Hide Parameter Mode And Prohibit Parameter Change B Hide parameter mode function Setting LCD display Setting range CNF 50 Hide parameter mode View Lock Set Un locked 0 9999 CNF 51 Ae ae View Lock PW Passward 0 9999 You can use the password registered by the user to hide parameter mode CNF 51 View Lock Pw Register the password to be used to hide parameter mode Register the password as in the following sequence Table 7 19 Registration of password to be used to prohibit the parameter change Order Description Press the ENT key in CNF 51 View Lock Pw code to see the previous password 1 registration display window The factory default is No 0 For the first registration enter No 0 2 If there is a previous password register it 3 If the entered password matches the previous password a display window appears for you to register new password 4 If the entered password is different from the previous password the previous password registration window is displayed Register the new password When registration is completed CNF 51 View Lock Pw is displayed again CNF 50 View Lock Set if you enter the registered password with the hide parameter mode function disabled Locked is
110. 30 fault output selection Bit setting status On Bit setting off state Off Segment LCD Table 7 25 Fault relay bit setting function Function Right end side of the display is bit 1 Y Activated when a low voltage trip occurs Y Activated when a trip other than low voltage trip occurs Y Activated when the inverter failed finally after setting the time of automatic restarts Pr 08 09 after a trip occurs Select the output item for multi function output terminal Q1 and relay Relay 1 of inverter terminal block Q1 is Open Collector TR output B Multi function output terminal and relay setting function 0 None No operation 1 FDT 1 Check if the inverter output frequency has reached the frequency that the user selected Activated when the following requirements are satisfied Absolute value set frequency output frequency lt detected frequency width 2 i The initial value 010 will be displayed in SEG as me 7 62 LS Is 7 Application Functions The detected frequency width is set in the following and the figure shows that the detected frequency width is set to 10 Hz Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting Unit range OU 58 PIPIScted FDT Band 10 00 0 00 Max Hz frequency band frequency 40Hz Preset 2 H z frequency 40H z 35Hz 15Hz 20Hz frequency O O Operation no G Figure 7 32 FDT 1
111. 485 8 Field Bus 12 Pulse g Multi step speed 0 00 Max 0h1F05 frequency 1 St frequency Hz 10 00 O 7 OIIO Multi step speed 0 00 Max 0h1F06 frequency 2 St2 frequency Hz 20 00 O 7 OIIO Multi step speed 0 00 Max Oh1F07 frequency 3 St3 frequency Hz 30 00 O 7 0h1F08 Output current CUr 7 O Oh1F09 Motor revolution rPM 7 ojo 6 Not visible when the LCD loader is installed 8 Property O or X Write during operation A 7SEG LCD Common 7 7SEG Only L LCD Only Indicates the effectivity by code dependent on control mode setting V F SL IM sensorless mode Refer to separate option user manual for the options LSis 10 1 Communication Setting Initial e Reference Control i address i range value Property Oh1FOA mero gdl 47 olo voltage Oh1F0B User selection i OL 47 olo display Present fault 0h1FOC display nOn 7 oyo F Forward i operation Oh1FOD select rotations are E F 0 7 olo direction Reverse i operation 10 2 Drive group PAR gt dr Communication LCD Initial i address display Setting range Jump i 00 Jump code Code 1 99 9 O A Olo 65 Target Cmd 0 00 Max E vi pO frequency Frequency frequency Hz UE en Su 03 0h1103 Acceleration Acc Time 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O L 622 lolo 0497 0h1104 Miraris Dec Ti
112. 4E buffering ir 110 0 140 0 125 0 X A 7 34 SP O start level Energy 79 0h144F buffering pnus 125 0 145 0 130 0 X A 7 34 ole stop level Energy 80 0h1450 buffering KEB Gain 1 20000 1000 O A 7 34 olo gain Flux estimator Flux P 2285 0h1455 proportional qi 100 700 370 O A 7 27 XO gain1 Flux estimator EE 86 0h1456 proportional Gain2 0 100 0 O A 7 27 X O gain2 Flux estimator Flux P 87 0h1457 proportional Gain3 0 500 100 O A 7 27 X O gain3 88 0h1458 br A CN 0 200 50 O A 727 cd 89 0h1459 REMIS up 0 200 50 O A 7 27 xlo 90 0h145A e ipn 0 200 50 O A za E ec Sensorless 91 0h145B ae Ra 0 60 30 O A on MO 1 LSis 10 17 Cc icati LCD Initial Ref pedi ommunicatio nitia eference mode n address display Setting range value page Sensorless voltage SL Volt 92 0h145C compensation Comp2 0 60 20 O A 7 27 X O 2 Sensorless voltage SL Volt 93 0h145D compensation Comp3 0 60 20 O A 7 27 X O 3 Sensorless field SL FW gt E 94 0h145E weakening Freq 80 0 110 0 100 0 X A 7 27 X O start frequency Sensorless 95 0h145F gain switching SL Fc Freq 0 00 8 00 Hz 2 00 X A 7 27 X O frequency Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 18 Cn 23 32 will be displayed only when dr 09 Control Mode is set to IM Sensorless and CON 20 SL2 G View Sel i
113. 5 13 5 Using the Keypad If multiple trips occur at the same time Overload Operation group If different types of trips occur at the same time the information of up to 3 trips is displayed as shown in the left figure If a warning is issued at 30 Hz operation Alternates at one second interval 30 08 af Lene When a warning is issued the current screen and WArn turns on and off alternatively at one second interval You can find the warning details in Pr 90 544 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad 5 9 Parameter initialization If all drive groups are initialized in dr 93 code of the drive group e e dr 83 ower C 2 9 6 0 n Indicates the first code of the drive group Press the Enter key ENT The code number to move displays the initial value 9 Use the up key A or down key V to change the value to 3 UN E The code number to move displays 3 Press the left shift key 4 0 blinks to show that the value can be changed Use the up key A or down key V to change the value to 9 The code number to move displays 93 Press the Enter key ENT g3 It indicates that the current position is No 93 code of the drive group Lr Press the Enter key ENT Indicates the standby state for parameter initialization Press the up key A Press the Enter key ENT The number blinks Press the Ente
114. 6 You can change the 2nd decimal place number Press the up key A until it reaches 5 Press the Enter key ENT 7 30 05 blinks Press the Enter key ENT 8 WS When 30 05 stops blinking the operation frequency is set to 30 05 LSLV S100 series has 4 places in the display but you can use the left shift key lt 4 and right shift key P to extend up to 5 places to set and monitor the parameters If you press the direction keys except for the Enter key ENT while 30 05 is blinking in the above Step 7 you can cancel the parameter settings You can cancel the current task and exit the editing mode by pressing the ESC key during editing 5 10 LS 1s 5 Using the Keypad B Changing input output group parameters When changing the 11th code of the drive group dr 11 from 10 00 to 20 00 f d 11 It indicates that the current position is No 11 code of the drive group Press the Enter key ENT nn ltindicates that the preset value of No 11 code is 10 00 L LU Use the left shift key lt to blink 1 3 It indicates that the cursor is on 1 psu r1 Use the up key A to increase up to 2 Press the Enter key ENT 5 io IN Press the Enter key ENT 6 20 00 blinks and then the code number is displayed The parameter change is complete You can also move between codes in other groups in the same way as described above
115. 6 4 O IO of V1 Output at V1 09 0h1509 minimum V1 Perc y1 0 00 100 00 0 00 O A 6 4 oyo voltage Maximum 10 0h150A input voltage V1 Volt x2 0 00 12 00 V 10 00 O A 6 4 OIO for V1 Output at V1 11 0h150B maximum V1 Perc y2 0 00 100 00 100 00 O A 6 4 O IO voltage 2345 onsoc Vi minimum u4 _voit x1 10 00 0 00 v 0 00 O A 6 6 olo input voltage Output at V1 WEBS 13 0h150D minimum 4 100 00 0 00 0 00 O A 6 6 O O voltage 96 y Vi 14 0h150E maximum Vi Volt x2 12 00 0 00 V 10 00 O A 6 6 oyo input voltage Output at V1 V1 Perc 15 0h150F maximum 2 100 00 0 00 100 00 O A 6 6 O O voltage 96 y V1 rotation 0 No 16 0h1510 direction V1 Inverting 0 No O A 6 4 oyo change 1 Yes M Vi 0 00 0 04 17 0h1511 quantization Quantizing 10 00 9 0 04 X A 6 4 oyo level ae V2 input v2 i A 35 0h1523 Men Monitor V 12 00 12 00 V 0 00 O 6 9 OIO LSis 10 19 e icati LCD Initial O ommunication Setting range nitia address display value V2 input filter 37 0h1525 time V2 Filter O 10000 ms 10 O A 6 9 olo constant Minimum 38 0h1526 input voltage V2 Volt x1 0 00 12 00 V 0 00 O A 6 9 X X of V2 Output 96 39 0h1527 at the V2 V2 Perc y1 0 00 100 00 0 00 O A 6 9 olo min voltage Maximum 40 0h1528 in
116. 68 Fax 86 532 583 3793 e mail liriGIsis com cn Tel 84 8 3822 7941 Fax 84 4 3822 7942 e mail sbparkOlsisvina com LSIS constantly endeavors to improve its product so that LSLV S100 2012 01 Information in this manual is subject to change without notice LSIS Co Ltd 2012 All Rights Reserved
117. 7 S100 0040 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V Figure 2 4 LSLV0055 0220 S100 200 V 400 V nennen nenne nrnen ree nrn eterne nnn eter en neret eren rennen nenne Figure 2 5 Continuous rated current for heavy load oooococncccincccoccconcccncncnonananccnnn conca ronca crac nn Figure 2 6 Continuous rated current for light load 5 5 KW 200 V nennen nennen nennen nnne Figure 2 7 3 phase 200 V type continuous rated current ococonccccnncocccononcnonana canon ncnc nan ano nnno na nano cnn cnn nn c nana nan anen nn naar ana nan ana nacen ccnnnnns Figure 2 8 3 phase 400 V type continuous rated current oo eee eeeeeneeeeneeeneeeeaeeceneeeseeeaeesseeseaeesaeeseaeeseaeesaeeseaeesieeteaeeeneeeeeessaee Figure 2 9 Continuous rated current based on ambient temperature and installation method eeeeee Figure 3 1 Positions for measuring ambient temperature nennen enne nentes ener ennn nennen Figure 3 2 Ambient spacing sssessssessssseeeseeenneeen nennen nereen nre nnenrsie therein tense set enssee tense stress stress siters rre Figure 3 3 Ventilation fan and inverter installation locations nennen nennen nnne nnne Figure 3 4 Side by side installatiori 2 neni a eed pecie stetit edet ee tdi Dad ta e Pip ede Lue Dg ed tote dus Figure 3 5 Remove the top covers for the side by side installation Figure 4 1 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 5 5 kW 200 400 V 15 kW 400 V
118. B Preparation of devices and components required for operation Prepare components required for operation Devices and components required for operation may be different depending on the application B installation Consider the location direction and surrounding space before installation to ensure longer product life and performance B Wiring Connect the power motor and operation signal control signal to the terminal block Be careful as the inverter and other devices may be damaged if not correctly connected 1 The Enclosed Type 1 is a class that satisfies the requirements when adding a separate conduit option to S100 products 12 LSIs 1 Basic Considerations 1 3 Part Names B Full product 5 5 22 0 kW Cooling fans Front cover bolt Figure 1 1 Full product B Front cover and IO cover removed 5 5 22 0 kW Part for connecting TEE communication option OD EE jaja IO board terminal block Input output power terminal block Ci Wiring bracket Figure 1 2 Front cover removed LSis 1 3 2 Standard 2 Standard 2 1 Input and Output Rating 2 1 1 Input Voltage Single Phase 200 V Product 1 0 4 2 2 kW Type Name LSLV xxxx S100 1xxx 0004 0008 0015 0022 HP 0 5 1 2 3 Applicable motors kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 Rated capacity kVA 1 0 1 9 3 0 4 2 Ra
119. Comp1 3 You can change the output voltage compensation values of sensorless vector control For the output voltage compensation refer to the sensorless vector control operation guide The controller gain can be adjusted according to the load characteristics However the motor can overheat or the system can be unstable depending on the controller gain settings t is visible when LCD keypad is installed LSis 7 31 7 Application Functions B Sensorless vector control operation guide Abnormal symptoms and problems Relevant function codes Troubleshooting Set Cn 09 value to be 3 times bA 24 or more or increase Cn 10 value in LS increments of 50 If Cn 10 Cn 09 PreExTime value is large OCT could occur insufficient Cn 31 ACR SL P Gain decrease Cn 31 value in decrements of 10 Increase Trq Lmt Cn 54 57 value in increments of 10 Increase Cn 93 value in increments of 5 Cn 54 57 Trq Lmt Cn 93 SL Volt Comp3 The output frequency is higher than the base frequency during no load operation at low speed 10Hz or lower Decrease Cn 91 value in Cn 91 SL Volt Comp1 dacramentsots If the motor hunts at low speeds increase Cn 22 value by 50 msec If it does not increase Cn 21 value by 10 to find the optimal operation The motor hunts or the torque N 04 Carrier Freq conditions is not sufficient while the load Cn 21 ASR SL P Gain1 If torque is insufficient is increasing
120. DT 1 when the detected frequency width is set to 10 Hz ooo eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeesieeseeeeeeeeea 7 63 Figure 7 33 FDT 2 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz 7 63 Figure 7 34 FDT 3 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz 7 64 Figure 7 35 FDT 4 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz 7 64 Figure 7 36 Run eee Figure 8 1 Drive mode of the cooling fan Figure 8 2 Electronic thermal protection function en nnne nense neret rennen nennen Figure 8 3 Overload warning and troubleshooting Figure 8 4 Stall protection during acceleration deceleration and at a constant speed Fig re 8 5 Stall level Settirg ern rr A REP Rd eee edie bn aie eR LED PEE EUR EE Figure 8 6 Corresponding terminal for each bit ronca nano nennen nennen nnne nnne enne nnne neret nnne Figure 8 7 Selection of the type of input contact nene neren nennen eren en narran ecc enne enne nnne Figure 8 8 Set Pr 15 Al Lost Level to 1 Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode to 2 Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time to 5 sec ssssssssssssss 8 12 Figure 8 9 Example 1 of setting braking resistor usage sssssseeeneeeeeeneenee nennen mene ren neret neret 8 13 Figure 8 10 Example 2 of setting braking resistor usage oooonoccoccconccnocncoocononnconn nono nc non c nn ccnn ocn enne nre eren enne nnns 8 14 Figure 8
121. Hz 24Hz 5 M HZ G 2 A 50 a E n IS E MIHZI GI9 2 A S SO 94 ORENSE apa 300Hz reverse 7 M HZ M HZ G 2 A 50 30Hz M 30Hz M x50 G x2x 40 A 50 27Hz M Frq setting based main speed frequency command Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain A Aux speed frequency command Hz or RPM or gain Usage example 3 V1 is main speed and I2 is aux speed Conditions Main speed M setting Frq V1 the frequency command is set as 30 Hz at 5 V Max frequency Max Freq setting dr 20 400 Hz Aux speed bA 01 I2 expressed as aux speed Hz or percentage 96 depending on the conditions Aux speed gain bA 03 50 indicates G in the following table The value is 0 5 INO1 32 Factory default Assuming that 10 4 mA is inputted to I2 the frequency for 20 mA is 60 Hz Therefore the aux speed A in the following table is 24 Hz 60 Hz x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA or 40 100 x 10 4 mA 4 mA 20 mA 4 mA Table 7 6 Usage example 3 V1 is main speed and 12 is aux speed Seiting type Final command frequency 0 M Hz G A Hz 30Hz M 50 G x 24Hz A 42Hz 1 M Hz G A 30Hz M x 50 G x40 A 6Hz 2 M Hz G A 9 30Hz M 50 G x40 A 150Hz 3 M Hz M Hz G A 30Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x40 A 36Hz 4 M Hz G 2 A 50 Hz 30Hz M 50 G x2x 40 A 50 x60Hz 24Hz 5 M HZ G
122. Jump 0 00 jump 30 Oh131E frequency Jump Lo 2 frequency upper 20 00 O A 6 39 O O Lower limit 2 limit 2 Hz Jump Jump frequency 31 0h131F fre lower limit 2 quency Jump Hi 2 25 00 O A 6 39 O O ee Max frequency Upper limit 2 Hz Jump 0 00 jump 32 0h1320 frequency Jump Lo 3 frequency upper 30 00 O A 6 39 O O Lower limit 3 limit 3 Hz Jump Jump frequency lower limit 3 33 0h1321 frequency Jump Hi 3 35 00 O A 6 39 O O e Max frequency Upper limit 3 Hz May 0h1329 Beere BARE co o w0 on 754 Lolo current Curr 42 0h132A Brake release 22 Ris Diy 0 00 10 00 s 1 00 X A 754 lolo delay time LSTS 10 11 Control Communication LCD Initial Reference mode address display Setting range value page 0 00 400 00 Hz Brake release BR Ris V F Slip 44 0h132C forward Pade Compen 1 00 X A 7 54 O O frequency 0 00 120 00 Hz IM Sensorless 0 00 400 00 Hz Brake release BR Ris V F Slip 45 0h132D reverse Bauer Compen 1 00 X A 7 54 O O frequency 0 00 120 00 Hz IM Sensorless 46 0h132E Brake engage SPR Eng Gag 1000s 1 00 X A 7 54 ollo delay time Dly 0 00 400 00 Hz E V F Slip 47 0h132F Pie BR Eng Fr Compen 2 00 X A 7 54 l AA 0 00 120 00 Hz IM Sensorless 0 None 50 0h1332 Energy saving E Save 1 Manual lo None X A 735 lolo operation Mode 2 Auto 1851 0h1333 Eni cand Eeey a e
123. LCD Setting range Initial address display value 00 Jump code JumpCode 1 99 30 O A O O 0 Frequency 1 Output Current 2 Output Voltage 3 DCLink Voltage 4 Torque 5 Output Power Analog 0 01 0h1601 output 1 AO1 Mode j O A 7 58 O O item 6 ldse Frequency lgse Target Freq Ramp Freq 10 Speed Fdb PID Ref de Value PID Fdb 18 Value 14 PID Output 15 Constant Analog 1000 0 02 0h1602 output 1 AO1 Gain on 100 0 O A 7 58 O O 1000 0 gain Analog 100 0 03 0h1603 output 1 AO1 Bias ca 0 0 O A 7 58 O O bi 100 0 ias Analog 04 0h1604 output 1 AO1 Filter O 10000 ms 5 O A 7 58 O O filter Analog AO1 05 0h1606 constant 0 0 100 0 0 0 O A 7 58 O O Const output 1 Analog 06 0h1606 output 1 AO1 Monitor 0 0 1000 0 0 0 A 7 58 O O monitor LSis 10 23 10 Table of Functions Control P r E mode Communication LCD Setting range Initial Reference address display value page Bit 000 111 1 Low voltage Fail Tri Any faults 30 Oh161E aut p 2 other than 9107 O A 7 62 olo output item Out Mode low voltage Automatic 3 restart final failure 0 None 1 FDT 1 2 FDT 2 3 FDT 3 4 FDT 4 5 Over Load 6 IOL 7 Under Load 8 Fan Warning 9 Stall Over 19 Voltage Low 1 Voltage 12 Over Heat Multi Tem 31 0h161F perd Relay 1 3
124. LSis 69 6 Basic Functions B Frequency Setting by Terminal Block TI Pulse Input LCD display Setting range Setting Frequency Setting T E Operation Fra Methods Freq Ref Src 12 Pulse In 01 Frequency for Freq at 60 00 0 00 Max Hz maximum analog input 100 frequency In 91 Pulse input amount TUE 0 00 0 00 50 00 kHz display Monitor In 92 Thinputiher ume TI Filter 10 0 9999 msec constant In g3 Minimum i pulse of pi x1 0 00 0 00 32 00 kHz In g4 Output atthe Tl q perc y1 0 00 0 00 100 00 min pulse In 95 dpud pulse mpisyo 32 00 0 00 32 00 kHz In ge Output atthe Tl nbecyo 100 00 0 00 100 00 max pulse In 97 Changing rotation 71 inverting 0 No 0 1 direction TI 0 00 0 04 E In 98 TI quantization level Quantizing 0 04 10 00 o Select 12 Pulse from the Frq code of the operation group Set the frequency by supplying pulse ranging from 0 to 32 00 kHz to the TI terminal of the terminal block In 01 Freq at 100 Set the operation frequency on max pulse input Set the operation frequency when the value set from In 96 is 100 Example 1 When setting In 01 to 40 00 and other codes from In 93 to In 96 to the default value and then supplying 32 kHz to the Tl terminal the system operates at 40 00 Hz Example 2 When setting In 96 to 50 and the setting values of In 01 and from In 93 to 95 are identical to the de
125. M 73 B2 Virtual DI 3 CM 72 B1 Virtual DI 2 CM 71 BO Virtual DI 1 CM 70 0h0323 Display the selected i 0 The 1st motor 1 The 2nd motor motor 0h0324 Alt 0 01 Analog input V1 basic I O 0h0325 Reserved 0 01 0h0326 Al3 0 01 Analog input V2 basic I O 0h0327 Al4 0 01 Analog input I2 basic I O 0h0328 AO1 0 01 Analog output 1 basic I O 0h0329 AO2 0 01 96 Analog output 2 basic I O 0h032A AO3 0 01 Reserved 0h032B AO4 0 01 Reserved 0h032C Reserved 3 0h032D Reserved 0h032E Reserved 0h032F Reserved BI5 Fuse Open Trip Bl4 Overheat Trip BI3 Arm Short Bl2 External Trip BH Overvoltage Trip BIO Overcurrent Trip B9 NTC Trip B8 Reserved 0h0330 Latch type trip i B7 Reserved information 1 B6 Input open phase trip B5 a open phase B4 Ground Fault Trip B3 E Thermal Trip B2 e Overload B1 Underload Trip BO Overload Trip 9 24 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication r Assigned content by bit Address Paramete g y BI5 Reserved Bl4 Reserved Blocking the inverter output by the terminal BI block input on the 3 safety option Only for the product higher than 90 kW Bl2 Reserved Bl Reserved BIO Bad option card B9 No Motor trip Latch type trip i B8 External brake tri 0h0331 information 2 P B7 Bad contact of basic IO board B6 Pre PID Fai
126. No 1 All Grp 2 DRV Grp 3 BAS Grp 4 ADV Grp 5 CON Grp 40 Parameter Init Parameter initialization 6 IN Grp 7 49 7 OUT Grp 8 COM Grp 9 APP Grp 12 PRT Grp 13 M2 Grp 16 SPS Grp 0 View All 41 Changed Para s roni TES 0 View All 7 51 Changed 0 None 1 JOG Key 42 Multi Key Sel ESC Key item 2 Local 0 None 7 51 Remote 3 UserGrp SelKey 10 42 LSIS 10 Table of Functions Function E a Reference display Setting range Initial value page 0 None 43 Macro Select Macro function item 0 No 7 53 1 Draw App 0 No 44 Erase All Trip Fault history deletion 0 No 7 54 1 Yes i f 0 No 45 UserGrpAllDel User registration code 0 No 7 52 deletion 1 Yes 46 Parameter Read Read parameters 0 No 0 No 7 47 P 0 No 47 Sene Write parameters 0 No 7 47 Write 1 Yes 0 No 48 Parameter Save Save parameters 0 No 7 47 1 Yes 50 View Lock Set Hide parameter mode 0 9999 Un locked 7 50 51 View Lock Pw Fasswora tor hicing O 9999 Password 7 50 parameter mode 52 Key Lock Set Lock parameter edit 0 9999 Un locked 7 50 53 Key Lock Pw Password for locking 0 9999 Password 7 50 parameter edit lt f 0 No 60 Add Title Up Additional title update 0 No 7 54 1 Yes i 0 No 61 Easy Start On Simple parameter setting 1 Yes 7 54 es itiali 0 No 62 WHCount Reset Initialize power 0 No 7 54 consumption 1 Yes 70 On tim
127. O sy Operation P i dr 06 domimand methods Cmd Source 0 Keypad Set dr 90 to No 1 JOG Key and the drv code of the operation group to 0 Keypad Pressing ESC key will make SET LED blinking and the jog operation becomes possible Press and hold the operation key RUN of the keypad to operate at the set jog frequency dr 11 JOG Frequency Releasing the operation key RUN will stop the operation The Acc Dec time to the jog operation frequency is set n dr 12 and dr 13 Multi key jog setting enabled Dr 11 requency dr 12 Acceleration time dr 13 Decelerati Jog on time Operation key RUN Figure 7 5 Keypad based jog operation 78 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 4 Up down operation Up down operation U D Save y 1g ee frequency save Mode w Ue 65 Px terminal function Px Define n 71 setting Px P1 P7 7 Up 65 Px terminal function Px Define 71 setting eA 19 Down js 65 Px terminal function Px Define 20 U D i i 71 setting Px P1 P7 Clear You can use the multi function terminal block to control acceleration and deceleration You can use it in the systems where the upper lower limit switch signal is used as deceleration command Table 7 7 Up down operation code description Code number Function Group display Code description fthe operation command FX or RX terminal is off or has a trip or
128. PID Openloop Target Frequency When PID switching operation switching from PID operation to general operation is inputted in the multi function input P1 P11 values are converted to Hz values The polarity of normal PID output PID OUT is single directional and limited by AP 29 PID Limit Hi and AP 30 PID Limit Lo 100 0 is based on dr 20 maxFreq LSS 7 Application Functions B Pre PID operation When the operation command is inputted the general acceleration is carried out without PID operation up to the defined frequency and if the control volume reaches a certain level PID operation starts AP 34 Pre PID Freq If you need general acceleration without PID control input the frequency up to the general acceleration For instance if Pre PID Freq is set to 30 Hz the general operation is carried out at 30 Hz until the control volume PID feedback volume exceeds the size defined in AP 35 AP 35 Pre PID Exit AP 36 Pre PID Delay When PID controller s feedback volume control volume is larger than the value in AP 35 PID control operation starts But if smaller volume than the value defined in AP 35 is kept during a period defined in AP 36 Pre PID Fail trip occurs and power is cut off PID Reference PID Reference Feedback AP 35 Pre PID Exit Lr AP 34 Pre PID freq Output Frequency PID operation zone lt Area 1 ype Area 2 gt
129. Sensorless vector control User oriented interface and eco friendly design iS7 Graphic LCD Keypad supported Using specific cable for iS7 Electric thermal system for motor protection Input output open phase protection for inverter and sequence protection EMC filter to reduce electromagnetic emission 400 V class built in LSis 1 1 Basic Considerations 1 2 Delivery Check After unpacking the inverter check the product rating plate on the housing to ensure that the type and rated output of the inverter are correct Be sure to examine the product to ensure that it has not been damaged during transport Table 1 1 S100 Product LS LV 0000 100 2 E Oo F Motor Capacity Type Input Voltage I O Type UL Type EMC 0004 0 4 kW 0008 0 75 kW 0015 1 5 kW 1 Single phase t 0037 3 7 kW Standard O Blank 5 2 Three 1 0 UL open amp Without ENE 000 4 IKWI Standard chase Enclosed Filter 8 0055 5 5 kW inverter 200 2401 Typet N 0075 7 5 kW Extention x ipgg With Filter 0110 11 kW 4 Three VO phase 0185 18 5 KW 0220 22 kW S7 inverter control is only applied for AC asynchronous Induction Motor Synchronous motor is excluded Components If any component is missing or the product is damaged please contact one of our agencies or LSIS offices refer to the back cover of the user manual
130. Setting Acc Dec Pattern LCD Setting bA 08 Acc Dec reference f Ramp T mode O Max Freq 0 1 requency Ad 01 Accelerating pattern Acc Pattern O Linear Decelerating 0 1 Ad 02 Dec Pattern 1 S Curve pattern S curve Ad 03 acceleration start Acc S Start 40 1 100 point gradient S curve Ad 04 acceleration end Acc S End 40 1 100 96 point gradient S curve Ad 05 deceleration start Dec S Start 40 1 100 96 point gradient S curve Ad 06 deceleration end Dec S End 40 1 100 96 point gradient Set the patterns of acceleration and deceleration gradient There are two types of patterns with the following functions Setting type Function The output frequency has a constant magnitude and linearly increases or 0 Linear decreases Used for applications where smooth acceleration deceleration is required such as elevator load or door S curve ratio is adjustable by using the functions from 03 to 06 Pay attention when setting the Acc Dec pattern to S curve because it will cause the relevant time to be longer than the set Acc Dec time For actual Acc Dec time refer to page 6 11Setting Acc Dec Time Frequency Operation command Acceleration Deceleration a time v P time M Figure 6 20 Setting Acc Dec pattern Ad 03 Acc S Start When setting the Acc Dec pattern to S curve the curve gradient may be adjustable Used to adjust the S c
131. Switching Operation Long term Storage LS INV 485 Protocol Main Circuit Terminal Description sssse Major talon aa Manual energy saving operation oooocccicnnccnnncncnnnanccnnnnno Manual Revision History oocnocccnnnoccononcccnananananananinnno Manual torqu DoOOSt xvii Mechanical installation checklist Minor faull rtr ttt t eter be eie deut INDEX Multi function power on off Control 7 57 Multi Step Speed Frequency Setting 6 13 Normal Operation Check seeeeee 4 14 Operation Command by RS 485 Communications 6 17 Operation Sound Selection 7 41 Operation Time Monitor seeeene 7 72 Output Block by Multi Function Terminal 8 16 Output Terminal Block Function Group 10 23 Output terminal delay time 7 69 Overload Warning and Troubleshooting Trip 8 3 Parameter Initialization sees 7 48 Part Names entier daa 1 3 Periodic Data Transmission sees 9 7 PID Gonttol erit rerit a 7 16 PID control block diagram eene 7 20 PID operation switching PID Openloop 7 22 PID sleep mode herren nere 7 22 Power Brakihg rerit aia 6 37 Power Termina
132. T 05h 201 FA XX 7 8 n XXXX XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte n 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 8 n 4 Maximum 40 Monitor registration normal response ACK Station ID CMD SUM EOT 06h 01 FA XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 7 Monitor registration error response NAK Station ID CMD Error code SUM EOT 15h 01 FA pe XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 9 9 12 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function B Perform monitor registration Monitor registration perform request Data read request of address registered via monitor registration request Station ID 01 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 7 Monitor registration perform normal response Station ID Data 01 XXX 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 7 n 4 Maximum 39 Monitor registration perform error response Station ID Error code 15h 01 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 9 B Error Code Table 9 9 Error code Code Abbreviation Description 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION IF Receive function cannot be perlormed at slave That is the corresponding function does not exist 02 ILLEGAL DATA Lr ADDRESS IA Rece
133. Time B Speed controller gain Cn 21 ASR SL P Gain1 Cn 22 ASR SL I Gain1 You can change the speed PI controller gain of the sensorless vector control For Pl speed controller the speed controller P gain is a proportional gain for the speed error If the speed error becomes larger the torque output command become larger Therefore the larger the value is the faster the speed deviation decreases The speed controller gain is the integral gain for speed errors It is the time until when the gain becomes the rated torque output command when a constant speed error continues The smaller the value is the faster the speed deviation decreases The speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while watching the changes in the speed If the speed deviation does not decrease fast increase the speed controller P gain or decrease gain time in ms However if the P gain is too high or gain is too low severe vibration could be caused If an oscillation occurs in the speed waveform try to increase gain time in ms or reduce P gain for adjustment LSis 7 29 7 Application Functions Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain2 Cn 24 ASR SL I Gain2 It is only visible when No 1 Yes is selected for SL2 G View Sel Cn 20 You can change the speed controller gain above the middle speed about 1 2 of base frequency when controlling the sensorless vector Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain2 is set as percentage to the low speed gain Cn 23 ASR SL P Gain1 That is
134. When setting the drv code of the operation group to 3 Int 485 you can control the inverter by communicating with the upper level controller PLC or PC using the RS 485 terminals S S of the terminal block For more information please refer to Chapter 9 Communication Function page 9 1 25 When using LCD Loader corresponds to DRV 06 Cmd Source LSis 6 17 6 Basic Functions 6 7 Local Remote Switching Operation Using ESC Key In the case of checking the inverter operation and facilities without changing the existing parameter settings LCD Setting display Setting range dr 90 Eat Key 2 Local Remote 0 2 function selection Operation Cmd 1 Fx Rx 1 0 4 Operation drv command method Source Be careful when you use the local remote switching operation because improper usage of the switching operation may cause serious problems to facility such as abnormal stop while operating the inverter When operating with a command based on a method other than keypad such as terminal block or communication it may be used when checking inverter operation and facility without changing any parameter setting or switching to manual operation using the keypad Definition of Local Local means all operation commands and frequency commands or torque commands can be operated by the keypad In this case JOG command is ignored Operation will be possible only when out of In 65 71
135. a ommunication l Setting range nitia eference mode address display value page 00 Jump code Jump Code 1 99 40 O A O O O Normal Duty 1 H 04 0h1B04 Load level Gad Duty dl toa IO 7 8 3 o lo setting Heavy Duty Duty Bit 00 11 Input output Open phase 05 0h1B05 open phase nase Loss OT of output go xA 88 lolo protection O 10 pen phase of input Open phase 06 0h1B06 of input IPO V Band 1 100 V 15 X A 8 8 olo voltage band 07 0h1B07 deceleration TripDec 00 600 01s 3 0 O A olo time at fault Time Selection of RST 0 No 08 0h1B08 startup Restart 0 No O A 7 39 O O on trip reset Yes Number of Retr 09 0h1B09 automatic y 0 10 0 O A 7 39 olo Number restarts Automatic 2710 0h1B0A restart Retry Delay 0 0 60 0 s 1 0 O A 7 39 l delay time 0 None 1 Free Run Motion 5 D ec 12 0h1BOC ai peed I Eost Gig 0 None O A 8 amp 1 lolo command Mode 3 Hold Input loss 4 Hold Output 5 Lost Preset Time to judge 2943 0h1B0D speed j LostCmd 1 120 s 1 0 O A 8 11 olo command Time loss Operation frequency Start frequency 14 0h1B0E at speed Losi nee Max frequency 0 00 O A 8 11 O O command Hz loss Analog input Qu Path Ob at ror 15 Oh1BOF s eu BUDE EACUS s11 lolo judgement Level x1 level Below x1 Overload 0 No 17 0h1B11 warning rian 0 No O A 8 3 olo selection Yes 81 The initial value 00 will be displayed in SEG as LSis 10 35 10 Table of Functions
136. able depending Cn 22 speed controller on the motor 10 9999 ms A Gain1 integral gain1 capacity Sensorless f Variable depending Cn 238 Speed controller ASR SL P on the motor 1 1000 proportional Gain2 k capacity gain2 Sensorless ASR SLI Variable depending Cn 24 speed controller on the motor 1 1000 96 A Gain2 integral gain2 capacity Flux estimator Variable depending Cn 26 roborti nalaalh Flux P Gain on the motor 10 200 96 prop 9 capacity 28 If set to Cn 20 No 1 Yes Cn 23 Cn 32 Cn 85 Cn 95 are visible LSis 7 26 7 Application Functions o 2 Setting LCD display Setting range Fiukestimator Variable depending Cn 27 Flux Gain on the motor 10 200 integral gain capacity Variable depending Cn Bg Speed estimator se P gaini on the motor 0 32767 proportional gain capacity Variable depending i Cn 29 ella S Est Gain1 on the motor a gra g capacity Variable depending i Cn 30 rio S Est Gain2 on the motor 10000 gra g capacity Sensorless Cn 31 current controller aris j 75 10 1000 proportional gain Sensorless Cn 32 current controller ACR SL Gain 120 10 1000 integral gain Torque controller Torque Out eu s output filter LPF 0 0529005 mese Setting torque Cn 53 limit Torque Lmt Src 0 Keypad 1 0 12 Positive 0 0 Cn 54 direction r
137. ad 3 1 6 0 96 120 180 18 0 rating Output frequency 0 400 Hz IM Sensorless 0 120 Hz Output voltage V 3 phase 200 240 V Voltage V 3 phase 200 240 VAC 15 10 Input Input frequency 50 60 Hz 5 rating Rated current Heavy load 2 0 5 8 7 5 11 0 18 9 21 0 A Light load 3 9 7 3 10 8 13 9 24 0 24 0 Weight Kg 0 9 0 9 1 3 1 5 2 0 2 0 2 5 5 22 kW Type Name LSLV xxxx S100 2xxx 0150 HP 7 5 10 15 20 Applicable motors kW 5 5 7 5 11 15 Rated capacity kVA 9 1 12 2 17 5 22 9 Rated current Heavy load 24 32 46 60 Output A Light load 30 40 56 69 rating Output frequency 0 400 Hz IM Sensorless 0 120 Hz Output voltage V 3 phase 200 240 V Voltage V 3 phase 200 240 VAC 15 10 Input Input frequency 50 60 Hz 5 rating Rated current Heavyload 25 8 34 9 50 8 66 7 A Light load 32 7 442 623 77 2 Weight Kg 3 3 3 3 4 6 TA 22 LSIS 2 Standard 2 1 3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 400 V Product 1 0 4 4 kW Type Name LSLV xxxx S100 4xxx 0004 0008 0015 0022 0037 0040 HP 0 5 1 2 3 5 5 4 Applicable motors kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 4 Rated capacity kVA 1 0 1 9 3 0 4 2 6 1 6 5 ous Rated current Heavy load 1 25 2 5 4 0 5 5 8 0 9 0 utpu A rating A Light load 1 56 3 1 5 0 6 9 10 0 1
138. ade by step input within the inverter when the current input is supplied in steps In 53 12 Curr x1 In 56 12 Perc y2 Able to set the gradient of output frequency offset value etc for the magnitude of the current as follows es LSIs 6 Basic Functions Preset frequency In 56 In 54 I2 input In 53 In 55 Figure 6 8 Setting the gradient of output frequency and offset value for the magnitude of current B Frequency Command by Terminal Block 12 Voltage Input Depending on the SW2 setting the terminal block 12 is able to input voltage 0 to 12 V Refer to 4 5 Wiring Diagram of Control Terminal Block Oto 12 V input LCD i Setting display Setting range Frequency Setting E i dr 07 Methods Freq Ref Src 4 V2 V2 input amount F 0 00 In 35 display V2 Monitor 0 00 12 00 V In 37 V2input filter US v2 Fiter 10 0 10000 msec constant Minimum input 0 00 In 38 voltage of V2 V2 Volt x1 0 00 12 00 V Output at the 0 00 in 33 V2 min voltage Meer 0 09 100 00 6 In 40 vaximummput V2 Volt x2 10 00 0 12 00 V voltage of V2 Output 96 at the 0 00 5 In 41 V2 max voltage V2 Perc y2 100 00 100 00 Jo In 46 id V2 Inverting 0 No 0 1 direction change V2 quantization ii 0 6 0 04 In 47 leval V2 Quantizing 0 04 10 00 Jo If the SW2 is set to current input I In 35 to 47 codes are invisible 16 With O set quantizing is not used
139. al block or communication checking inverter operation and facility without any parameter setting change or switching to manual operation using the keypad Prohibition of forward or reverse rotation Selecting prohibited direction of motor rotation Starting with power on When power is supplied to the inverter the motor accelerates if the terminal block operating command is turned on Starting on initialization after a trip takes place When initialized after a trip takes place the motor accelerates if the terminal block operating command is turned on Acc Dec time setting based on max frequency Setting acceleration and deceleration time based on maximum frequency Acc Dec time settingbased on operation frequency Setting acceleration and deceleration time based on the time elapsed from the current constant frequency to the target frequency of the next step Multi step Acc Dec time setting using multi function terminal Setting multi step acceleration and deceleration time using multi function terminal Changing Acc Dec time by setting Acc Dec time transition frequency Changing acceleration and deceleration gradient without using multi step terminal LSis 6 1 6 Basic Functions Basic Functions Usage Examples Used when the pattern of acceleration and deceleration gradient is needed Linear S curve Setting Acc Dec pattern Stopping acceleration or dece
140. ame gradient based on the maximum frequency irrespective of the operation frequency The acceleration time set from 03 of the drive group dr is the time elapsed from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency while the deceleration time from 04 is that from the maximum frequency to 0 Hz Example If you set the maximum frequency to 60 00 Hz Acc Dec time to 5 sec and the operation frequency to 30 Hz the time required to reach 30 Hz will be 2 5 sec Max frequency Frequency Acceleration time Deceleration time hie a Figure 6 16 Setting Acc Dec time bA 09 Time scale Used when precise acceleration deceleration time is necessary depending on the load characteristic or it is required to increase the maximum set time Change the units of all functions related to time Range of setting Acc Dec time Setting details Setting type 0 0 01 sec 0 00 60 00 Able to set down to the unit of 0 01 sec 1 0 1 sec 0 0 600 0 Able to set down to the unit of 0 1 sec 2 1 sec 0 6000 Able to set down to the unit of 1 sec Be careful when you change the unit because the maximum allowable time will be changed as well With the acceleration time set to 1000 sec it will be changed to 60 00 sec if you change the bA 09 Time scale to the type 0 0 01 sec 6 22 LSIS 6 Basic Functions 2 Setting Acc Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency LCD A Setting display Setting
141. ameters 7 23 Parameter Initialization a re aa aE a a a a a a E n ono nennen nnne Table of Contents 7 24 Hide Parameter Mode And Prohibit Parameter Change 7 25 Display Changed Parameters Function c eeceeeeeeee cess cence tease seas eeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeenaees 7 26 Add User Group USR Grp eee eee eter terete 7 27 Add Macro Group Macro Grp 7 208 Easy Slate oe E E ERE RB MD E 7 29 Other Config CNF Mode Parameters cece eee cece cence seats nn cnn nan nn narrar cnn nn 7 30 Timer Function 731 Brake Cono mc cdas 7 32 Multi Function terminal on off Control sss 7 33 Regeneration avoidance for Press applications ssseene 7 34 Analog OUtpUE sooo ooo DEDOS QUI aa 7 35 Digital Output irt ree n oa e RARUS RM e RR edes 7 36 Alarm or fault Status Output Using the Terminal Block Multi Function Output Terminal 7 67 7 37 Output Terminal Delay Time And Contact Types 7 68 7 38 keypad Language Selection oo ooonnncinnnnnncnnnnnnoccnnnccnnonnncnnnnrnnr arca narrar 7 69 7 39 Monitoring Operation Status ssssssssssssseseeneeneennneen eene neren neret nnne 7 69 7 40 Operation Time MONIEOr nir net i 7 71 8 Protection Function iaar tada 8 1 Motor Protection FUNGON uit tre Dr D Pro Seo n ee per ep repe P PERDE 8 2 Overload Early Warning and Trip
142. ansmission reception buffer size Transmission 39 bytes Reception 44 bytes Monitor registration buffer 8 Words SUM Check communication error via sum LSis 9 9 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 2 2 LSis SUM Lower 8 bits of Station ID CMD Data in ASCII HEX Ex In case of a command to read 1 content from 3000 address like below Number of ENQ Station ID CMD Address addresses SUM EOT 05h 01 R 3000 EH AT 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte SUM 0 1 R 3 0 0 0 4 1 30h 31h 52h 33h 30h 30h 30h 31h 1A7h Control value is not included ENQ ACK NAK etc SUM becomes A7h since lower 1 byte is taken from SUM e BroadCast function Used when giving a simultaneous command to all inverters connected in network Method Give a command via station ID 255 Operation Each inverter deals with it regardless of set station ID No response is issued however Detailed Read Protocol Read request In case of read command of successive n words from XXXX address Number of ENQ Station ID CMD Address addresses SUM EOT 05h 01 FA R XXXX 4 8 2n XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 12 Quotation marks indicate character Read normal response Station ID Data XXX N 4 byte
143. apacity of the motor and the inverter The power voltage changes Decrease the power voltage variance Vibration occurs at specific frequencies Adjust the output frequency to avoid the resonance area B The motor overheats and rotation is unstable The V F pattern setting is incorrect Measure Set the V F pattern suitable for the motor specification B The motor deceleration time is too long even if a Dynamic Braking DB resistor option is connected Cause Measure The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time and change the setting The motor torque is insufficient If the parameters associated with the motor are normal the motor capacity is insufficient Therefore increase the motor capacity The load is above the internal torque limit that is determined from the inverter rated current Increase the inverter capacity LSis 11 9 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection B Motor speed holding is poor at low speed lightly loaded conditions Cause Measure y NE Decrease the setting of the inverter carrier The carrier frequency is high frequency Over excitation has occurred due to Decrease the torque boost value to avoid over inaccurate V F setting at low speed excitation B When operating the inverter other equipment close by operates incorrectly Measure Reduce the carrier frequency to minimum
144. ara 0000 FFFF 599g X A 9 7 olo Control 4 Hex address 4 Input 55 0h1737 communication Para 0000 FFFF 0009 X A 9 7 olo Control 5 Hex address 5 Input 56 0h1738 communication 18 COU FFFF oooo xa 97 lolo address 6 Input 57 0h1739 communication oaea 9000 FFFF oooo xa 97 lolo address 7 Input 58 0h173A communication Para 0000 FFFF 09090 X A 9 7 olo Control 8 Hex address 8 Communication 70 0h1746 multi function Virtual DI 1 O None 0 None O A 9 27 OO input 1 Communication 71 0h1747 multi function Virtual DI 2 1 FX 0 None O A 9 27 OO input 2 LSis 10 29 10 Table of Functions inati Control Communication LCD Setting Initial address display range value Communication 72 0h1748 multi function Virtual DI 3 2 RX 0 None O A 9 27 olo input 3 Communication 73 0h1749 multi function Virtual DI 4 3 RST 0 None O A 9 27 olo input 4 Communication External 74 0h174A multi function Virtual DI 5 4 Tri 0 None O A 9 27 olo E rip input 5 Communication 75 0h174B multi function Virtual Dl 6 5 BX 0 None O A 9 27 olo input 6 Communication 76 0h174C multi function Virtual DI 7 6 JOG 0 None O A 9 27 olo input 7 7 Speed L 8 Speed M 9 Speed H 11 XCEL L 12 XCEL M RUN 13 Enable 14 3 Wire 2nd 15 Source 16 Exchange 17 Up 18 Dow
145. arch for acceleration option to operate smoothly Overcurrent trip or overload trip may occur B Starting on initialization after a trip takes place If Bit 2 is set to 1 and Pr 08 RST Restart is set to No 1 Yes acceleration is carried out up to the frequency before trip with speed search operation if the reset key is inputted or terminal block is initialized after trip B Restart after instantaneous power interruption If power returns before the inverter internal DC voltage falls too low after the inverter input power is off and a low voltage trip occurs acceleration is carried out up to the frequency before trip with speed search operation Set start bit 4 to 1 at the same time with power input and set Ad 10 Power on Run to No 1 Yes If the inverter operation command is on and the inverter input power is inputted acceleration is carried out up to the target frequency with the speed search operation LSis 7 37 7 Application Functions 1 Input power Frequency ti t2 Voltage L Current Multi functional output or relay Figure 7 21 Speed search operation after instantaneous power interruption occurs and power returns If instantaneous power interruption occurs and input power is cut off the inverter generates a low voltage trip Lvt to block the output If the input power returns the frequency before low voltage trip is outputted and the voltage is increased by inverter inner PI contr
146. arting the inverter Read the following checklist carefully Checklist Inverter peripheral devices option cards e ls the inverter type as ordered Are the types and number of the peripheral devices resistor DC reactor noise filter etc as ordered e ls the type of option card as ordered Installation location and method Are the installation location and method appropriate Power voltage and output voltage Is the power voltage within the inverter input voltage specifications Do all rated outputs satisfy the inverter output specifications e Is the rating correct Main circuit wiring ls the power being entered through an MCB or MCCB Is the rating and type of the MCB or MCCB correct ls the wiring of the power supply connected correctly to the inverter input terminal The inverter may be damaged if the input power is connected to the inverter s output terminal U V W e Is the wiring of motor connected to the inverter s output terminal in the order of phases if not the motor rotates in the reverse direction Do the power and motor use 600 V vinyl PVC insulated wire e ls the wire size of main circuit appropriate e Is the installation and size of the grounding cable correct e Are the screws of inverter s main circuit terminal and grounding terminal fastened firmly e Ifa single inverter is used to operate multiple motors is overload protection circuit provided at each motor e If a
147. ase the power capacity dies magnetic contactor or other Replace the magnetic contactor device on the power input side has opened momentarily or malfunctioned The input power voltage has Check that the input power voltage decreased during the operation is above the specified value Low Voltage2 E iu input p lasg loss Has as Check the input wiring magnetic contacior arene Replace the magnetic contactor if device on the power input has broken malfunctioned d A ground fault has occurred in the Check the output terminal wiring of Ground Trip inverter output line the inverter The motor insulation is damaged Replace the motor e motor could be overheating Decrease the load or the operation The inverter load is above the rated frequency capacity Increase the inverter capacity E Thermal The electronic thermal level is set Set the electronic thermal level properly Use forced cooling method on motor LSis 11 5 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection Type Out Phase Open Cause A magnetic contactor Isolator or other device is faulty on the inverter output side The output wiring is faulty Remedy Check the device s on the output side for faults Test the output wiring In Phase Open A magnetic contactor or other devise is faulty on the input side The input wiring is faulty The inverter DC capacitor s needs to be replaced Check the magnetic contactor on the inverter input sid
148. asing or decreasing by 1 This is because the inverter program keeps the number empty reserving them for functions to be added later or it has hidden the functions not used by the users For detailed information refer to Chapter 10 Function Display List E g If the frequency upper lower limit selection Ad 24 is set to 0 No Ad 25 frequency upper limit and Ad 26 frequency lower limit are not displayed when you move between codes But if the frequency upper lower limit selection Ad 24 is set to 1 Yes Ad 25 and Ad 26 are visible LSis 57 5 Using the Keypad 5 6 Moving to the Initial Position bA 5 gt LEE V ba wi AD Operation group Drive group Basic function group For the ESC key the initial value dr 90 is preset to 0 move to the initial position Therefore if you press the ESC key in any code position in a group you will be moved to the first position of the operation group For other functions of the ESC key refer to 5 11 Using the Multi keys 5 8 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad 5 7 Setting the Parameters B Changing operation group parameters When changing the acceleration time from 5 0 sec to 16 0 sec n nnn Lt LOLs Operation group Indicates the first code information of the operation group Press the up key A m m Indicates the 2nd code of the operation group which is the 2 gr d acceleration time ACC zm Press the Enter
149. at you can make changes in the macro group collectively CNF 43 Macro Select Various application functions are put together into a group for easy setup Now the Draw function is supported In the user amp macro mode U amp M a macro group called MC1 Draw function is displayed The function is provided by the inverter Users cannot add or delete a function item included in the macro but can change the data in the macro group The Draw function is a type of open loop tension control It utilizes the speed difference between the motors that operate at the rate for the main speed command to keep the tension of the materials hanging between them consistent For details refer to 7 2 Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command Page 7 3 Can only be set when the LCD is installed LSis 7 51 gt 7 Application Functions 7 28 Easy Start Setting range LCD display Setting CNF 61 Parameter easy start Easy Start On 1 Yes setup CNF 61 Easy Start On If this code is set to Yes and All is selected in CNF 40 Parameter Init to initialize all parameters in the inverter Easy Start starts when the power is turned off on the first time Table 7 23 Starting Easy Start Order Description 1 Set CNF 61 Easy Start On to Yes 2 Select All in CNF 40 Parameter Init to initialize all parameters in the inverter Easy Start starts when the inverter power is turned off on the fi
150. ating Operates according B3 to the set value of Fault Trip Pr 30 Trip Out Mode Operates in reverse B2 Ti direction B1 Operates in forward direction BO Stop B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 H W Diag B9 Reserved B8 Reserved OhOOOF Trip information R B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 Level Type trip B2 Reserved B1 Reserved BO Latch Type trip LSis 9 19 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Assigned content by bit B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Reserved moo Reman o 0 7er renes B6 P7 B5 P6 B4 P5 B3 P4 B2 P3 B1 P2 BO P1 B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Reserved A c EE MET em B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 Reserved B2 Reserved B1 MO BO Relay 1 0h0012 V1 0 01 96 R V1 voltage input 0h0013 V2 0 01 96 R V2 voltage input 0h0014 12 0 01 R 12 current input 0h0015 e 1 rpm R rud motor rotation speed 0h0016 0h0019 Reserved E 0h001A Select Hz rpm R e unt 1 rpm unit onors putre _ Display the number of poles selected motor 9 20 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Fu
151. ation ParaWrite Trip Write parameter trip Low Voltage Low voltage trip dis BX Emergency stop trip Lost Command Command loss trip Safety A B Err Safety A B contact trip EEP Err External memory error Hardware damage ADC Off Set Analog input error Watch Dog 1 Watch Dog 2 CPU Watch Dog trip Mirta Over Load Motor overload trip Under Load Motor underload trip Lost Command Command loss trip warning Over Load Overload warning Under Load Underload warning Warning Inverter OLT Inverter overload warning Fan Warning Fan operation warning DB Warn ED Braking resistor braking rate warning Retry Tr Tune Rotor time constant tuning error Only applies when option board is used 5 Only applies when LCD Loader is used 8 18 LS 1s 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 1 RS 485 Communication Function Introduction of Communication Function This user manual explains the standards installation and programs of the serial communication of the LSLV S100 inverter for communicating with PC or FA computer Communication method for LSLV S100 inverter is designed to operate or monitor LSLV S100 series inverter from long distance using CPU or FA computer below Advantages Using Communication Method Since the inverter can be operated or monitored by a user programmed PC or PLC it is easily applicable to factory automation Changing or monitoring parameter by computer is possible Ex Acc Dec Time Frequency Command etc
152. ation in the case of Option Card Fault 8 17 Selection of the Second Operation Method 6 41 Sensorless ll Vector Control suussssse 7 26 Setting Acc Dec Pattern ssssssssssssss 6 26 Setting Acc Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency 6 23 Setting Multi step Acc Dec Time Using Multi function Terminal erret erectione eate Setting NPN Sink PNP Source Signal Terminal Block Wiring Specifications Size UL ENCLOSED TYPE1 IP21 TYPE Slip compensation operation T Speed Search Operation Square Reduction V F Pattern Operation Start after DC Braking sseeee Starting on initialization after a trip takes place 6 21 Starting with power ON eese Stop After DC Braking Storage temperature Terminal block based jog operation Terminal block based jog operation 2 Terminal Block Operating Command 1 Terminal Block Operating Command 2 Timer FUNCOM oio eiecti Henn Torque LIMITS cuocere a Total Memory Map for S100 Communication 9 6 Transport and Installation vii Troubleshooting Lettere 11 5 Types of Peripheral Devices esses 2 16 Underload Warning and Fault esses 8 15 Up down operation eeeeeenn 7 9 Usage of Dynamic B
153. ay No Motor Time 3 0 0 1 10 sec If operation command is issued when motor is disconnected from the inverter output terminal No Motor Trip occurs and protective operation is performed by the system When output current of the inverter is continued for Pr 33 No Motor Time below Pr 32 No Motor Level compared to rated current bA 13 No Motor Trip occurs Set Pr 32 No Motor Level below the factory default value in case bA 07 V F Pattern is set to No 1 Square Otherwise No Motor Trip might occur due to lack of output current under No Motor Trip operation LSis 8 17 8 Protection Function 8 16 Fault Warning List Table 8 4 Fault Warning list Category Keypad Display Trip details Over Current1 Overcurrent trip Over Voltage Overvoltage trip External Trip Trip due to external signal NTC Open Temperature sensor trip Over Current2 Arm short current trip Option Trip x gt Option trip Over Heat Overheat trip Out Phase Open Output open phase trip In Phase Open Input open phase trip Latch type Inverter OLT Inverter overload trip Ground Trip Ground fault trip Fan Trip Fan trip E Thermal Motor overheat trip Hdl Pre PID Fail Pre PID operation failure IO Board Trip IO Board connection trip Ext Brake External brake trip No Motor Trip No Motor trip Low Voltage 2 Low voltage trip during oper
154. ay proa CNF z 21 Monitor Line 1 0 Frequency Hz CNF 22 Monitor Line 2 2 Output Current A CNF 23 Monitor Line 3 3 Output Voltage V CNF 24 Mon Mode Init 0 No CNF 21 23 Monitor Line x Select the items to be displayed in the monitor mode The monitor mode is the first mode that is displayed when the inverter turns on You can display three items from Monitor Line 1 to Monitor Line 3 at the same time Select items according to the lines to display in the following If you select Yes in CNF 24 Mon Mode Init CNF 21 to 23 are initialized Setting type Function Displays the defined frequency during stoppage and the operation 0 Frequency f frequency currently being outputted in Hz during operation 1 Speed This works in the same way as with No 0 and is displayed in RPM 2 Output Current Displays motor output current 3 Output Voltage Displays the output voltage 4 Output Power Displays the output power 5 WHour Counter Displays the inverter s power consumption 6 DCLink Voltage Displays the DC power terminal voltage within the inverter 7 DI Status Displays the status of input terminals of inverter terminal block Displays P1 P2 P8 from the right Displays the status of output terminals of inverter terminal block 8 DO Status pay P Displays Relay1 Relay2 and Q1 from the right 9 V1 Monitor V Displays the voltage value inputted in the V1 the voltage in
155. braking resistor or braking resistor unit is used is the inverter separated from the power due to overload protection by magnetic contactor on the inverter power side Make sure that phase advanced capacitor surge killer or radio noise filter is not connected to the output side Control circuit wiring stwisted pair shielded wire used for the inverter s control circuit wiring e Is the shield connected to the ground terminal e f operating in 3 wire sequence have you changed the parameters of multi function contact input terminal and correctly connected the wiring to the control circuit e Is the wiring for options correct e Is there any incorrect wiring e Are the screws of inverter s control circuit terminal fastened firmly e ls the any wire residues or screws left e Check and remove any stray wiring strands are could short circuit to other terminals e Is the wiring of control and main circuits separated within the duct and control board e Is the wiring length below 50 m e Is the wiring length of safety input below 30 m It is highly recommended that the motor cable is of the screened type with screen being connected to ground at both ends It is also recommended that twisted pair cable with overall screen is used for control signals Twisted pair wires coated with highly conductive materials help block the influence from outside electrical and magnetic fields 5 Using the Keypad 5 5 1 Using the Ke
156. ch leads to low voltage failure and power is cut off During power failure it controls the inverter power frequency and maintains the voltage level in the DC power part Therefore it is possible to keep longer the time from instantaneous power interruption to low voltage failure Energy saving operation Used when intending to reduce voltage supplied to the motor at light load or no load in the applications of fans and pumps Speed search operation Used in order to prevent the failure that could happen when the inverter voltage is outputted while the motor and load are free wheeling Automatic restart operation Used to automatically re start the driven motor in case of some inverter trip conditions 2nd motor operation If an inverter is connected for switching between two motors the 2nd motor can be operated as long as the input of the terminal defined as the 2nd function is 1 as the parameter group for 2 motor Commercial power operation switching Used when the load operated by the inverter is switched to the commercial power or vice versa LSis 7 1 7 Application Functions Types of Operation Usage Examples Cooling fan control Used to control the fan to cool the heat sink of inverter s body You can power on or off multi function output including relay after a AE certain period of time Used to control the on off operation of a mechanical brake in the load Biden
157. conds until judging the speed command loss it keeps operating at an input average value LSis 8 11 8 Protection Function 4 Hold Output For 10 seconds until judging the speed command loss it keeps operating at an output average value 5 Lost Preset Inverter operates at the frequency set at Pr 14 Lost Preset F Pr 15 Al Lost Level Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time Set the voltage and judgment time based on speed command loss regarding analog input 0 Half of x1 Protective operation starts when the input signal is reduced to half of initial set value of analog input set with speed command Frq code of operation group and continues during the time set at Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time speed loss judgment time Values set at In 08 and In 12 of terminal block input group are the standard For example set speed command to 2 V1 at Frq code of operation code In 06 V1 Polarity to O Unipolar and voltage input to the half amount of the value set at In 08 V1 Volt x 1 then protective operation is activated 1 Below of x1 Protective operation starts when the signal becomes smaller than the initial set value of analog input set with speed command continues during the time set at Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time speed loss judgment time In 08 and In 12 of terminal block input group are standard value Pr 14 Lost Preset F In case of speed command loss set the operation method Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode to 5 Lost Preset then protection function ope
158. continues based on the speed settings if a stop command is inputted during operation the operation LSis 7 13 7 Application Functions decelerates to the dwell operation frequency and if the set dwell deceleration operation time Dec Dwell Time expires the operation stops according to the previous deceleration time If the dwell operation time is O or the dwell frequency is set to 0 the dwell operation does not work The acceleration dwell operation command is effective only once when the first command is issued and if re accelerating after the acceleration dwell frequency the operation doesn t work The deceleration dwell operates when going through the deceleration dwell frequency whenever the stop command is inputted It does not work for simple frequency deceleration which is not deceleration by stop If external brake control is on the dwell operation feature does not work 1 Acceleration Dwell The acceleration dwell operation command is effective only once when the first command is issued and if re accelerating after the acceleration dwell frequency the operation doesn t work Frequency Change target frequency Acceleration dwell frequency Acceleration dwell time Figure 7 12 Acceleration dwell 2 Deceleration Dwell The deceleration dwell operates when going through the deceleration dwell frequency whenever the stop command is inputted It does not work for simple frequency deceleration
159. ction FWD Trq d 55 0h1437 regeneration Lun 0 0 200 0 180 O A X O torque limit Negative direction REV Trq 56 0h1438 VEIS eat 0 0 200 0 180 O A X O torque limit Negative direction REV Trq M S 57 0h1439 regeneration Lmt 0 0 200 0 180 O A X O torque limit Flyin Speed search 0 SEI 0 70 0h1446 mode SS Mode Flying X A O O selection 4 Flying Start 1 Start 2 Bit 0000 1111 Selection of speed 0001 search on acceleratio n When starting on 0010 initializatio Speed search n 71 0h1447 operation Eas after trip 00007 X A oyo selection When restarting 01001 after instantane ous power interruption When 1000 starting with power on The initial value 0000 will be displayed in SEG as LOLS 10 16 LSIS C LCD Control ommunicatio Setting range eference mode n address display page Speed search 2079 0h1448 reference CEDE 80 200 150 O A z6 A IS current Flying Start 1 Speed search 100 73 0h1449 proportional SS P Gain 0 9999 O A 7 36 O O gain Flying Start 2 600 Flying Start 1 200 74 0h144A Speed search lt lt LGain o 9999 O A 7 36 olo integral gain Flying Start 2 1000 Output 75 0h144B Pee SS Block 0 0 60 01s 1 0 XA z lole search 76 0h144C E x 50 150 100 O A olo Energy KEB 0 No 77 0h144D buffering Select 0 No X A 7 34 O O selection 1 Yes Energy 2078 0h14
160. ction not 2 single phase N grounded 3 S L2 TN systems IT systems T L3 a 2 T L3 4 8 Dynamic Braking Resistor B Option type of dynamic braking resistor Following table has reference to DC braking torque 150 ED 5 Rated power of DBU has to be doubled when ED is 10 150 Baraking Torque 5 ED Inverter Capacity Resistor Resistor Resistor mn ohm ven ohm ven ohm ven 0 4kW 300 100 300 100 1 200 100 0 75kW 150 150 150 150 600 150 1 5kW 60 300 60 300 300 300 2 2kW 50 400 50 400 200 400 3 7kW 33 600 130 600 4 0kW 33 600 130 600 5 5kW 20 800 85 1 000 7 5kW 15 1 200 60 1 200 11kW 10 2 400 40 2 000 15kW 8 2 400 30 2 400 18 5kW 5 3 600 20 3 600 22kW 5 3 600 20 3 600 4 12 LSIs 4 Wiring 4 9 Normal Operation Check B Check the motor for forward reverse direction and use keypad operation to check for smooth operation Use keypad to set the operation group s drv code to 0 number key and set the command frequency to a specific speed and then press the RUN button to send the command to the inverter to operate in the forward direction At this time the induction motor axis rotates CCW on the load side If not you should change two of the inverter output terminals U V W E B LSis 413 4 Wiring 4 10 Wiring Checklist Check the main circuit and control circuit wiring before st
161. cur To prevent radiated emissions in the analog and digital signals a ferrite may be required around the wires of these signals 48 LSIs 4 Wiring B Setting NPN Sink PNP Source The control circuit s sequence input terminal supports both NPN mode Sink mode and PNP mode Source mode You can use NPN Sink PNP Source setting terminal SW1 to switch the input terminal logic between NPN mode Sink mode and PNP mode Source mode The connection methods per mode are as follows NPN mode Sink Mode Set NPN Sink PNP Source switch to NPN CM terminal 24 V GND is the common terminal for contact input signals The factory default is NPN mode Sink mode PNP NPN Figure 4 6 NPN Sink mode PNP mode Source mode Set NPN Sink PNP Source switch to PNP 24 terminal 24 V internal power is the common terminal for contact input signals If you want to use external 24 V power connect terminal of the external power with CM 24 V GND terminal PNP NPN Figure 4 7 PNP Source mode LSis 49 4 Wiring 4 6 Signal Terminal Block Wiring Specifications Table 4 4 Signal terminal block wiring specifications Recommended wiring thickness mm7 i AWG i e Terminal x Fomine Electrical specifications type Crimp Crimp screw terminal terminal not used used P1 P7 CM Output voltage 12V VR Maximum output curre
162. d L7 A reactor may be used to improve dd the power factor or when input AC and DC reactor power capacity is large 1000 kVA Gig p Optional or more within 10m wiring length Please select the reactor carefully Since the inverter s life is severely affected by the ambient temperature do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed Inverter location and the allowed limit Incorrect wiring wiring may damage the product Please follow the installation method Ground terminal should be grounded Do not install phase advanced capacitor surge killer or radio noise filter on the output side Inverter output terminal otherwise the inverter may be Es damaged or operate abnormally Ground terminal should be grounded punoJ5 punog 246 LSIS 2 Standard 2 3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Magnetic Contactor and Reactor Specifications 1 Molded case circuit breaker and contactor specifications Table 2 5 Molded case circuit breaker and contactor specifications Molded Earth Molded Earth Inverter type case circuit leakage hrs dui Inverter type case circuit leakage hid diei breaker breaker breaker breaker LSLV00048100 1 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0004S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0008S100 1 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0008S100 4 TD125U EBS 33c MC 9 LSLV0015S100 1 TD125U EBS 33c MC 12 LSLV0015S100 4
163. d off Do not connect magnetic contactor to the inverter output and turn it on off during operation Inverter trip may occur or inverter may be damaged Apply the rated torque to terminal screws Loosen screws can cause of short circuit and malfunction Tighting the screw too much can damage the terminals and cause short circuit and mulfuction Use copper wires only with 600V 75 C ratings for wiring To avoid interference with sensitive electronic equipment nearby the motor cable should be screened and the screen should be connected to ground at both the motor and inverter ends LSis 41 4 Wiring 4 2 Ground The motor and inverter MUST be grounded as the inverter passes leakage current during high switching operation 200 V product belongs to Class 3 grounding with grounding resistance below 100 Q Ohm while 400 V product belongs to Special Class 3 grounding with grounding resistance below 10 Q Ohm Connect grounding wire to the dedicated grounding terminal Do not use the case or sash screw as the grounding terminal Use thick wire for grounding if possible Use the wire thickness specified below and keep wiring short if possible Table 4 1 Grounding wire specifications based on the motor capacity Grounding wire specifications apacity ome Capacity 0 4 4kW 4 2 5 12 14 5 5 7 5 kW 6 4 10 12 11 15 kW 16 10 6 8 18 5 22 kW 22 16 4 6 42 LSIs 4 Wi
164. defined in PID controller The unit gain and scale defined in AP 42 AP 43 and AP 44 are applied to the value AP 18 PID Fdb Value Display the input currently in feedback in PID controller The unit gain and scale defined in AP 42 AP 43 and AP 44 are applied to the value AP 19 PID Ref Set If PID control s reference type AP 20 is set to Keypad 0 Keypad you can input the reference value If the reference type is set to a value which is not the Keypad the value defined in AP 19 is ignored AP 20 PID Ref Source Select the reference input in PID control The items in gray color will be provided as options in the future If V1 terminal is set to PID F B Source V1 cannot be set to PID Ref Source Change the F B Source to another item to set V1 to Ref Source Table 7 9 Setting types and functions of AP 20 PID Ref Source Seiting type Function PID F B Source 0 Keypad Input PID reference in the inverter keypad X 1 V1 10 10 V voltage input terminal of terminal block O 3 V2 Analog input terminal of terminal bock 12 O When SW2 is I input 4 20 mA and when it is V O 4 12 input 0 10 V 5 Int 485 RS 485 input terminal of terminal block O Communication command by communication 7 FieldBus option card O Pulse input terminal of terminal block TI 0 32 MH Pulse kHz pulse input z You can display the defined PID reference in AP 17 if using 7 Segment If using LCD keypad you can monitor it i
165. e Check the input wiring The inverter DC capacitor s should be replaced Contact a local service center The load is above the inverter rated Increase the capacity of the motor cooling fan Ambient temperature is too high Inverter OLT capacity and the inverter The torque boost level is too high Decrease the torque boost level Check for any foreign substances in The cooling system has a problem the vent such as the air intake the The inverter is used for longer than exhaust and others Over Heat the replacement interval of the The inverter cooling fan should be replaced Keep the ambient temperature of the inverter below 50 C Over Current2 A short circuit has occurred in the inverter output line An inverter IGBT output switching device is faulty Check the output terminal wiring of the inverter Inverter operation is not possible Contact a local service center The ambient temperature is too high Operate the inverter in area at which the ambient temperature is above be replaced NTC Open A P The internal temperature sensor for 10 the inverter is faulty Contact a local service center Foreign matter or substance has stuck in the inverter vent in which Check the air intake and exhaust FAN Lock the fan is located The inverter cooling fan should be The inverter cooling fan needs to replaced be replaced The fan connector is not connected Connect the fan connec
166. e 5 aes Return to the first code of the operation group You can use the down key W to move in the opposite order B How to use the jump code When moving from the first code of the drive group dr 0 to no 95 code Indicates the first code of the ri M 1 dr Lu drive group dr 0 Press the Enter key ENT It shows that you can move to 2 i no 9 code toggles at one second q interval Use the down key to set to 5 Press the left shift key lt to move the cursor to the left to 3 E display 05 0 is toggled at one second interval Use the up key A to set to 9 It shows that you can move to 4 uc no 95 code Press the Enter key ENT J oc Indicates the No 95 code of the Li ot a drive group You can also move between codes in other groups in the same way as described above 56 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad B How to move between codes in the same group When moving from No 2 code to No 95 code in the drive group Indicates the No 2 code of the drive m group 1 di C J Uniildr 95is displayed press the up key A Indicates the No 95 2 ar nt code of the drive 7 group You can also move between codes in other groups in the same way as described above When using the up key A or down key W to move between codes in each group sometimes the code number skips instead of incre
167. e 6 12 Terminal Block Operating Command 1 3 Terminal Block Operating Command 2 Fx Rx 2 Setting range LCD display Setting Operation command s R i Operation drv BAS Cmd Source 2 Fx Rx 2 0 4 Setting Px terminal Px Define n Sault function Px P1 P7 1 FX Px Defi nud E Setting Px terminal x Define is So function Px P1 P7 2 RX The FX terminal is used as operation command and the rotation direction is selected by the RX terminal Set the drv code of the operation group to 2 Fx Rx 2 After selecting terminals to be used as the forward FX and the reverse RX operation command out of multi function terminals P1 to P7 set the functions of the corresponding terminals among In 65 to 71 of the terminal block input group to FX and RX Frequency E E o AX El Figure 6 13 Terminal Block Operating Command 2 2 When using LCD Loader corresponds to DRV 06 Cmd Source 6 16 LS 1s c 6 Basic Functions 4 Operation Command by RS 485 Communications Int 485 LCD display Setting Operation drv A Gormene Cmd Source Int 485 0 4 method Built in CM 01 communication Int485 St ID 1 1 250 inverter ID Built in CM 02 communication Int485 Proto ModBus 0 2 RTU protocol CM 03 Builtin Int485 BaudR 9600bps 0 7 communication speed Built in CM 04 communication frame Int485 Mode Rd n 0 3 setting
168. e DC brake at start Ad 12 and dwell operation ad 20 23 do not operate Ad 44 45 Ad 47 Output frequenc Output current Ad 42 gt Adis Motor speed Brake output terminal Operation command Brake release zone A OA ie Brake applied zone Brake applied zone Figure 7 28 Brake operation sequence Brake release sequence If the motor is stopped and an operation command is given the motor accelerates up to the brake release frequency Ad 44 45 according to forward or reverse direction When the brake release frequency is reached and the current flowing in the motor reaches the brake release current BR Rls Curr then the brake release signal is outputted to the output relay defined for brake control or multi function output terminal Maintain the frequency during the brake release delay time BR RIs Dly and then accelerate Brake engage sequence If the motor is running and a stop command is given the motor decelerates If the output frequency reaches the brake engage frequency BR Eng Fr the deceleration stops and the brake engage signal is issued to the output terminal After maintaining the frequency during the brake engage delay time BR Eng Dly the output frequency becomes O If the DC brake time Ad 15 and DC braking quantity Ad 16 are defined cut off the inverter power after DC braking For DC brake activation refer to Page 6 34 LSis 7 55 7 Application Functions 7 32 Multi Functi
169. e Inverter accumulated Year month day 7 74 motion time hour minute 71 Run time Inverter accumulated Year month day 7 7 74 operation time hour minute Initialize inverter 0 No 0 No 7 74 72 Time Reset accumulated operation time 1 Yes 7 74 74 Ean Time Cooling fan accumulated Year month day 4 7 74 operation time hour minute Initialize cooling fan 75 Fan Time Rst accumulated operation 0 No 7 74 time LSTS 10 43 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection Be sure to read the safety precautions in the beginning of this manual before checking the inverter 11 1 Protection Function Item B Protection from output current and input voltage Table 11 1 Protection function item from output current and input voltage SEG LCD display display Pe Contents Notes Occurs if the motor overload fault is selected and d r Over Load Latch the load level exceeds the set level Works only when Pr 20 is set to any value other than No 0 Occurs if the underload protection function is meek selected and the motor load level is not more i LLL Under Load Latch than the set underload level Works only when Pr 27 is set to any value other than No 0 nr Over Latch Occurs if the inverter output current is greater LLL Currenti than 200 of the rated current We Over Latch Occurs if the internal DC circuit voltage increases i LLL Voltage more than the specified value
170. e Name If setting it to 0 the output voltage will be compensated based on the input voltage while the inverter is stationary At a level higher than the base frequency the input voltage will be output if the input voltage is lower than the set voltage 480 V O c 170V Base frequency Output frequency Figure 6 27 Setting the motor voltage when the input power supply is different from the motor voltage specification LSis 6 33 6 Basic Functions 6 17 Start Mode Selection Select the start mode when the operation command is input at stationary state LCD 3 display Setting Setting range Ad 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0 1 Ad 12 DC braking time DcStart 0 00 0 00 60 00 sec at startup Time Ad 13 ibis e Dc Inj Level 50 0 200 B Accelerating Start Unit Group Code Ad 07 Name Start mode LCD display Start mode Seiting Setting range It is a general acceleration method When there is no function selection it accelerates directly to the target frequency on operation command input B Start after DC Braking LCD Setting Group Code display Setting range Ad 07 Start mode Start Mode Dc Start 0 1 Ad jg Pee Aer Resin 0 00 0 00 60 00 sec at startup Time Amount of o Ad 13 applied DC Dc Inj Level 50 0 200 Jo Accelerates after supplying DC voltage to the motor for a set time
171. e frame Inverter transmit to master Slave Starting of Address uneven Address Register Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064 0x1202 CM 01 Preset Adress for starting 50 100 Des Int485 St ID Multiple communication 1 ACC DEC cription Register 0x1103 1 time 5 0is time 10 0 related is related The frame mater tramsmit to Inverter Slave Starting of Address Function Address Register GRE Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0xE534 CM 01 Preset Multiple Adress for starting Des cription Int485 St ID Register communication 1 0x1103 1 9 2 6 Existing iS5 P5 V5 iG5 Compatible Common Area Parameter Communication Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit 0h0000 Inverter model 8100 0h0001 Inverter capacity 0h0002 Inverter input voltage R 0 75 kW 1 5 kW 2 2 kW 3 7 kW 5 5 kW 7 5 kW 11 kW 15 kW 18 5 kW o 22 kW 256 0 4kW 257 1 1 kW 258 3 0 kW 259 4 0 kW 0 220 V product LS Is 9 17 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Assigned content by bit 1 440 V product Ex 0h0100 Version 1 00 0h0003 Version R 0h0101 Version 1 01 0h0004 Reserved R W 0h0005 Command f
172. ed in AP 42 PID Unit Sel AP 45 PID P2 Gain You can use the multi function terminal to change the PID controller gain If you set the function of terminal block selected out of In 65 to 71 to No 24 P Gain2 and the selected terminal is inputted you can switch to the gain defined in AP 45 instead of the gain defined in AP 22 and AP 23 Al Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed LSis 7 19 7 Application Functions 7 20 B PID control block diagram 5555555555555 P2 PID Limit Hi APAS Lol PID Ref Value E um P mph be 21 PID Qut Reserved Lo 22 u E Gain Inverse Limit Ho E r 7773 o D gt T Reserved AP 24 3 ro ti to E Fo PID F B sel hx By selection Ramal o AP23 PID Out PID Out Inv Bile Lo re ej Scale PID Limit Lo or Lo 0 sb E po Multi functional input po terminal setup 485 Lo P1 P7 Gum o I Term Clear Reserved Reserved 9 Ho EN Lo PID FBK Value ule o Main Speed ED PID feed fowward gain Ki P controller output gain ja 4 Multi functional input terminal etup P1 P7 P2 Gain Figure 7 15 PID control block diagram AP 01 Proc PID Multi functional input terminal setup P1 P7
173. ee 0 O A z lolo level Save Acc Dec time 60 0h133C transition Oe El 0 00 X A 624 lolo frequency 9 q y 0 During Run O 64 0h1340 Cooling fan FAN 4 Always ON During O A 745 lolo control Control Run 2 Temp Control Up down 0 No i D 65 0h1341 To M icd 0 No O A 7 9 olo requency Mode 1 Yes save 0 None Output contact On Off Ctrl A xl 66 0h1342 On Off control Src 3 V2 0 None X A 7 56 O O method 4 12 6 Pulse Output contact On C 10 00 67 0h1343 On level Level 100 00 90 00 X A 7 56 O O 100 00 Output 68 ia fier ea contact 10 00 X A 756 O O On level 96 10 12 LS 1s e icati LCD Initial Ref contra ommunication l Setting range nitia eference mode address display value page Sat BUE 0 Always 0 afe operation Run En Enable 70 0h1346 sel ction Mode Always X A 7 12 O O 1 DI Dependent Enable 0 Free Run 16 Safe operation Run Dis 1 Q Stop 0 Free 71 0h1347 stop method Stop Run X A 7 12 O O 2 Q Stop Resume Safe operation Q Sto 72 0h1348 deceleration a 0 0 600 0 s 5 0 O A 7 12 O O time Selection of 0 No regeneration RegenAvd 74 0h134A evasion ey 0 No X A 7 56 O 0 function for 1 Yes press Voltage level 200 V 300 400 350 V of 75 0h134B regeneration RegenAvd X A 7 56 olo evasion Level 400 V 600 800 700 V motion for press Compensation frequency limit 17 of Com
174. ege os p o mE 4 12 EAS z6 lolo selection Ref Source pad 5 Int 485 7 FieldBus 11 Pulse 0 V1 2 V2 PID 3 12 21 0h1815 PUD ieee leelo 0 V1 XA me lolo selection F B Source 4 Int 485 6 FieldBus 10 Pulse PID controller 22 0h1816 proportional PID P Gain 0 0 1000 0 50 0 O A 7 16 OJ o gain 23 0h1817 PID controller Melina 0 0 200 0 s 10 0 O A FAG lolo integral time PID controller 24 0h1818 differentiation PID D Time 0 1000 ms 0 O A 7 16 O O time PID controller 25 0h1819 feed forward PID E Gain 0 0 1000 0 0 0 O A z6 lolo compensation gain 26 0h181A Proportional P Gain Scale 0 0 100 0 100 0 X A ziz lolo gain scale 27 0h181B eae PID Out LPF 0 10000 ms o O A 717 lolo PID lower limit PID upper AVI frequency 29 0h181D limit frequency PID Limit Hi Hz 300 00 60 00 O A 7 17 O O Hz 10 32 LS 1s le icati LCD Initial vont ommunication s nita d address display Setting range value 300 00 PID PID lower limit vee upper s 7 30 0h181E frequency PID Limit Lo ii frequency 90 00 OVA 7547 olo Hz 0 No 31 Oh181F PID output pip Out Inv 0 No XA z7 lolo inverse Yes 32 0h1820 PID output PIDOut 94 1000 01 100 0 X A 7r lolo scale Scale PID controller 0 00 Max 34 0h1822 motion Pre PID Freq trauen Tz 0 00 X A 7 17 o
175. eiSanHuanDong Tel 971 4 886 5360 Fax 971 4 886 5361 e mail jungyonglGlsis biz Lu DongCheng District Beijing 100013 China Dalian LSIS Co Ltd gt gt Dalian China Tel 86 10 5825 6025 7 Fax 86 10 5825 6026 e mail Add iic sd A E Road E ae dolosa cuixiaorong sis com cn ress No iaohexi 3 Road Economic and Technical Developmen i R Zone Dalian 116600 China b W LSIS Guangzhou Office gt gt Guangzhou China Tel 86 411 8273 7777 Fax 86 411 8730 7560 e mail lixk Isis com cn Address Room 1403 14th FL New Poly Tower 2 Zhongshan Liu Road Guangzhou E China a E ESIS Wuxi Go btd a WUXI Ching _ Tel 86 20 8326 6764 Fax 86 20 8326 6287 e mail linsz lsis biz Address 102 A National High amp New Tech Industrial Development Area Wuxi F Jiangsu 214028 China W LSIS Chengdu Office gt gt Chengdu China Tel 86 510 8534 6666 Fax 86 510 522 4078 e mail xuhgOlsis com cn Address 12th FL Guodong Building No 52 Jindun Road Chengdu 610041 P R 2 Aye China a i a oe bis Paratus rT Tel 86 28 8612 9151 Fax 86 28 8612 9236 e mail yangcf lsis com cn Nguy gt 1 VI 1 J T Tel 84 4 882 0222 Fax 84 4 882 0220 e mail sriolsisvina com m LSIS Qingdao Office gt gt Qingdao China m LSIS VINA Co Ltd gt gt Hochiminh Vietnam Address 7B40 Haixin Guangchang Shenye B D B No 9 Shandong Road Qingdao 26600 China Address 41 Nguyen Thi Minh Khai Str Yoco Bldg 4th FL Hochiminh City Vietnam Tel 86 532 8501 65
176. ency during deceleration When the operation command is turned off the a ae inverter output is blocked Power braking Optimally decelerating without overvoltage trip Frequency limit using maximum and start Limiting operation frequency by setting the frequency maximum frequency and the start frequency Limiting operation frequency using the upper and Frequency limit using the upper lower limits lower frequency limit function Frequency jump Avoiding mechanical resonance frequency Multi function input terminal control Improving the response of input terminal 6 2 LSIs 6 Basic Functions 6 2 Frequency Setting Methods Setting range and how to display 0 KeyPad 1 KeyPad 2 V1 v2 5 12 Int 485 Field Bus Frequency setting method Operation Frq o olo nm A N Pulse Select the frequency setting method from the Frq code of the operation group The operation frequency can be set from an external controller through digital setting using keypad analog setting using voltage V1 V2 and current 12 input of the control terminal block and the use of the built in RS 485 port or communication option B Frequency Setting by Keypad 1 KeyPad 1 LCD Setting display setting range Operation 0 00 Command frequency 0 00 MN Hz Frequency setting Anod Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad 1 Operation Frq
177. ency jump band If Frequency upper lower limits are not selected Max frequency 10V 20mA V1 Voltage input I1 Current Input Figure 6 32 Limiting frequency using the upper and lower limit of frequency LCD display Setting Setting range Ad 27 Frequency Jump Freq 0 No 0 1 jump Lower limit 1 EE Ad 28 of jump Jump Lo1 10 00 DA ale 1 Hz frequency Jump reg y Upper limit 1 Lower limit 1 of jump Ad 29 of jump Jump Hi 1 15 00 frequency 1 Max Hz frequency frequency Lower limit 2 a Ad 30 of jump Jump lio 20 00 00 imt 2 Hz tr of jump frequency quency Upper limit 2 Lower limit 2 of jump Ad 31 of jump Jump Hi 2 25 00 frequency 1 Max Hz frequency frequency Lower limit 3 E Ad 32 ofjump JumpLo3 30 00 9 00 Upper limit 3 Hz frequency Jump Sg y Upper limit 3 Lower limit 3 of jump Ad 33 of jump Jump Hi 3 35 00 frequency 1 Max Hz frequency frequency In the case of increasing the frequency setting when the frequency setting value voltage current RS 485 communication keypad setting etc is within the jump frequency banad it will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency jump and then the frequency will be increased when the value gets out of the frequency jump band LSIs 6 39 6 Basic Functions Frequency Ad 33 Ad 32 Ad 31 Ad 30 Ad 29 Ad 28 Voltage 10V V Input 20mA I Current
178. ennen nnne nnree neret erinnern nnne nn nnne 4 7 Table 4 4 Signal terminal block wiring specifications nennen nennen rennen eren nnne 4 10 Table 4 5 Asymmetrical grounding structure sessesssesseseeeeeeeeeeeneenenn eene nennen nennen ense n ense neret e nnns enne nnn 4 12 Table 5 1 Function description per parameter group ssssseseeeeeneeeneennen rra rra 5 3 Table 6 1 Introd ctiori of S100 b sic fUuNCHIONS site nik eae A ELO RD e CER teeta 6 1 Table 6 2 How to select the keypad or the direction of terminal block and the motor rotation by bidirectional voltage input 6 8 Table 6 3 Example of 8 speed setting sene Table 7 1 Various application operation functions of S100 and their usage examples Table 7 2 Aux speed setting types iio ph hi e e ie nei eee eite Table 7 3 How to calculate the final command frequency Table 7 4 Usage example 1 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and V1 analog voltage is aux speed Table 7 5 Usage example 2 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and 12 analog voltage is aux speed Table 7 6 Usage example 3 V1 is main speed and 12 is aux SPE8O ooooccccocccconoccccononcconnnncnnono canon ocn nono n cn nano ca nana n nc rennen enne nennen Table 7 7 Up down operation code description ooooococonncccnnoncccnonocacononcconononcnnnn conan nn cnn nn nn aa nr enn nn ae Eae Table 7 8 Safe operation mode code description oooo
179. er frequency If the carrier frequency is high the operation sound goes down If it is low the motor operation sound goes up Cn 05 PWM Mode You can reduce heat loss and leakage current generated in the inverter based on the load rate Selecting Low Leakage PWM will reduce heat loss and size of leakage current more than in Normal PWM But the noise generated by the motor increases The followings are the advantages and disadvantages in carrier frequency size and load rate selection Table 7 14 Advantages and disadvantages in carrier frequency size and load rate selection Dec cc Carrier frequency 1 0 kHz 15 kHz E Carrier Freq Disadvantages X LowLeakage PWM Normal PWM Motor noise v Generated heat v Electronic noise interference y Leakage current y Factory default carrier frequency per inverter capacity is as follows Table 7 15 Factory default carrier frequency per inverter capacity Light load Heavy load 2 kHz Max 5 kHz 3 kHz Max 15 kHz S100 Inverter supports two types of load rates The overload rates are 150 1 min for heavy duty and 120 1 min for normal duty Therefore the current ratings are different per usage load rate and there is limit to the current rating depending on the ambient temperature Rated current derating specifications per temperature The following is rated current limits for ambient temperature if the inverter operates at normal duty 40
180. er group No 3 And then select the code number you want and press the PROG ENT key If the values are changed in No 3 then the values in No 4 are also changed No 4 4 shows the information of the parameters previously registered and if none is registered in the code number Empty Code is displayed 0 is cancellation of code setting These parameters are registered in U amp M Mode s user group if required parameters 5 may be registered multiple times For example a parameter can be registered multiple times in user group code No 2 code No 11 etc Can only be set when the LCD is installed 7 50 LSIs 7 Application Functions Table 7 22 Deleting parameters saved in the user group individually ME EI 1 First select Multi Key in CNF Mode Code 42 and then 4 UserGrp SelKey mark appears at the top of the screen In U amp M Mode USR Group move the cursor to the code to delete Press MULTI Key A prompt appears asking you if you want to delete the parameter Select YES and press the PROG ENT key OJJ AJOJN Deletion is completed CNF 25 UserGrp AllDel Select No 1 Yes to delete all parameters in the user group 7 27 Add Macro Group Macro Grp Setting range Unit Group Code Name LCD display Setting Macro function CNF 43 iei Macro Select 0 None If the applied load is selected the inverter selects the related functions so th
181. er of Para Control h e g when Para Ctrl Num is 5 set operation speed to Para Control 4 and operation command to Para Control 5 LSis 9 7 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 1 10 Parameter Group for U amp M Mode User and Macro Grp Transmission Can communicate using USG Grp and MAC Grp communication address registered at U amp M mode U amp M gt USR gt 1 64 User Grp Para h USR parameter registered at keypad can be read write via communication address 0h0200 to Oh023F U amp M gt MAC gt 1 64 Macro Grp Para h Macro parameter set at keypad can be read write via Oh0240 to Oh02A3 Table 9 6 0h0200 0h023F Currently registered User Grp parameter Address Parameter Assigned content by bit 0h0200 User Grp Code 1 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt USR gt 1 0h0201 User Grp Code 2 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt USR gt 2 0h023E User Grp Code 63 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt USR gt 1 0h023F User Grp Code 64 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt USR gt 2 Table 9 7 0h0240 0h02A3 Currently registered Macro Grp parameter Address Parameter Assigned content by bit 0h0240 Macro Grp Code 1 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt MC gt 1 0h0241 Macro Grp Code 2 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt MC gt 1 0h02A2 Macro Grp Code 98 Parameter value registered at U amp M gt MC gt 98 0h02A3 Macro Grp Code 99 Paramet
182. er value registered at U amp M gt MC gt 99 5 Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed 9 8 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 2 Communication Protocol 9 2 1 LS INV 485 Protocol The computer or other host is the master while the inverter is the slave The inverter which is the slave responds to the Read Write commands issued by the master B Basic Configuration Request ENQ StationID CMD Data sum EOT 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Normal response ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Error response NAK StationID CMD Errorcode 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Details A request starts with ENQ and ends with EOT Anormal response starts with ACK and ends with EOT An error response starts with NAK and ends with EOT Astation ID indicates inverter number and is displayed as 2 byte ASCII HEX ASCII HEX hexadecimal display using 0 to 9 and A to F CMD Use capital letter IF Error in case of small letter Table 9 8 CMD Using capital letter Character ASCII HEX Command R 52h Read Ww 57h Write 58h Request monitor registration Y 59h Perform monitor registration Data ASCII HEX Ex When data value is 3000 3000 0 B B 8 h 30h 42h 42h 38h Error code 2 displayable ASCII 20h 7Fh Tr
183. eration time run time are deleted and 0 00 00 00 00 is displayed Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed LSis 7 71 8 Protection Function 8 8 1 Protection Function Protection functions provided by LSLV S100 series are mainly categorized into two types One is to protect the overheating and damage of the motor and the other is to protect the inverter itself and prevent malfunction Motor Protection Function B Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention Function Electronic thermal function is a protection function that uses the output current of the inverter without a separate temperature sensor to predict the rise of the motor temperature and protect the motor according to the heat characteristics 3 Setting Group Code LCD display Seiting range Pr a O l mimos owl Nos 0 2 fault selection Pr 41 Motor coping tan Motor Cooling 0 Self cool a type Pr 42 B ectronic thermal 1 ETH 1min 150 120 200 minute rating Pr 43 Electronic thermal ETH Cont 120 50 150 continuous rating Pr 40 ETH Trip Sel You can select the inverter motion in case of electronic thermal protection operation Keypad displays the fault status that says E Thermal e 0 None Electronic thermal protection function is not activated e 1 Free Run Inverter output is blocked Motor coasts to a halt free run 2 Dec Deceleration The inverter decele
184. ered at CM 33 0h0103 Status Parameter 4 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 34 0h0104 Status Parameter 5 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 35 0h0105 Status Parameter 6 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 36 0h0106 Status Parameter 7 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 37 0h0107 Status Parameter 8 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 38 0h0110 Control Parameter 1 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 51 0h0111 Control Parameter 2 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 52 0h0112 Control Parameter 3 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 53 0h0113 Control Parameter 4 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 54 0h0114 Control Parameter 5 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 55 0h0115 Control Parameter 6 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 56 0h0116 Control Parameter 7 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 57 0h0117 Control Parameter 8 Parameter communication code value registered at CM 58 When registering parameter to Control Parameter set operation speed 0h0005 0h0380 0h0381 and operation command 0h0006 0h0382 parameter to the backmost of the Para Control Frame That is set operation speed and command to the highest numb
185. ered first the state will be changed from Lock to Unlock and vice versa When the same parameter value is continuously entered the parameter is executed just once and then the values will not be reflected afterwards Therefore if you want to enter the same value once again change it to another value and enter the previous value again Example If you want to enter 244 twice do it in the following order 244 gt 0 gt 244 LSis 9 29 10 Table of Functions 10 Table of Functions Note Deal with setting value not allowed 1 Setting value not allocated rd 2 Overlap setting value Multi function input PID Reference PID Feedback OL 3 Setting value not allowed Option V2 12 no Displayed like above In this case pushing ENT is no operation 10 1 Operation Group i nati Control Communication Setting Initial p roperty Reference j address i value perty OhtFOO Target frequency 0 00 9 MaX 0 00 0 7 6 3 olo frequency Hz i 0h1F01 Acceleration time ACC 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O 7 6 22 ojo 0h1F02 Deceleration time dEC 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 0 7 6 22 ojo O Keypad 1 Fx Rx 1 6 18 Operation 1 0h1F03 emm ndelbisd drv 2 Fx Rx 2 Fx Rx 1 X 7 O O 3 Int485 9 2 4 Field Bus Option 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 V1 i 4 V2 0 Ohiro4 F equencysetng p Keypad X 7 629 lolo Action 5 I2 1 6 Int
186. erload tolerance Torque boost Manual torque boost automatic torque boost 2 Operation Select one from keypad terminal block and communication operation Analog type 10 10 V O 10 V O 20 mA Digital type Keypad pulse train input Operation type Frequency setting PID control up down operation 3 wire operation direct current braking frequency limit frequency jump 2nd function slip compensation reverse rotation prevention automatic restart commercial electricity switching auto tuning flying start energy buffering operation power braking flux braking leakage reduction operation Operation function Selectable between NPN Sink and PNP Source Function Forward direction operation reverse direction y operation reset outside trip emergency stop jog operation Multi functional multi step speed frequency high medium and low multi step terminal acceleration deceleration high medium and low DC braking on tA LAE AE Stop 2nd motor section frequency increase frequency decrease 3 wire operation conversion to general operation during PID operation conversion to body operation during option operation frequency fixation of analog command acceleration deceleration stop 0 Hz 32 kHz low level O 0 8 V high level 3 5 12 V Multiple functions open collector DC 24V 50mA or less terminal Failure output and inverter Operation status output Multi
187. ev and Cn 79 KEB Stop Lev These set the start and stop point for energy buffering operation Set the low voltage level based on 100 so that the stop level Cn 79 is higher than start level Cn 78 Cn 80 KEB Gain This is the gain that uses load side inertia moment quantity to control the energy buffering operation If the load inertia is large use a lower gain value If the load inertia is small use a higher gain value If the input power is cut off and the motor vibrates severely when this function KEB operates set the gain Cn 80 KEB Gain to be half the previously set value But if the gain is lowered too much low voltage trip could occur during energy buffering operation KEB For energy buffering operation a low voltage trip may occur during deceleration due to instantaneous power interruption or load inertia During energy buffering operation the motor may vibrate at the loads except variable torque load load from fans and pumps 7 34 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 13 Energy Saving Operation B Manual energy saving operation r Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range Ad 50 nagy sewing E Save Mode Manual operation Energy saving o Ad 51 amount Energy Save 30 0 30 Jo If the inverter output current is smaller than the current set in bA 14 Noload Curr motor no load current the output voltage is reduced as much as the level set in Ad 51 Energy Save T
188. everse FWD Trq Lmt 180 0 aie 200 0 torque limit Positive direction 0 0 pe Cn 55 regeneration FWD Trq Lmt 180 0 200 0 Zo torque limit Negative 0 0 Cn 56 direction reverse REV Trq Lmt 180 0 dd 200 0 torque limit Negative direction 0 0 E Cn 57 regeneration REV Trq Lmt 180 0 200 0 Zo torque limit Flux estimator Cn 85 proportional Flux P Gain1 370 100 700 gain1 Flux estimator Cn 86 proportional Flux P Gain2 0 0 100 gain2 Flux estimator Cn 87 proportional Flux P Gain3 100 0 500 7 gain3 Cn gg Fluxestimator pis Gaint 50 0 200 integral gain Cn gg Fluxestimator Flux 1I Gain2 50 0 200 integral gain2 Cn go Fluxestimator Flux Gain3 50 0 200 integral gain3 Sensorless Cn 91 voltage SL Volt Comp1 30 0 60 compensation LSis 7 27 7 Application Functions Setting LCD display Setting range Sensorless Cn 92 voltage SL Volt Comp2 20 0 60 compensation2 Sensorless Cn 93 voltage SL Volt Comp3 20 0 60 compensation3 Sensorless field 80 0 Cn 94 weakening start SL FW Freq 95 0 110 0 frequency i Sensorless gain 0 00 Cn 95 switching SL Fc Freq 2 00 8 00 Hz frequency i For high performance operation the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter output should be measured Use auto tuning bA 20 Auto Tuning to measure the parameters before carrying out sensorless vector operation To carry out high performance control of
189. f you are not planning on using your inverter for a long period of time store it under the following conditions Comply with the recommended storage environment guidelines refer to Page vii If the storage period exceeds three months store the inverter at an ambient temperature of 10 30 C to prevent the thermal degradation of the electrolytic capacitor Package the inverter to prevent moisture from building up inside the inverter Keep the relative humidity of the inverter under 70 by putting a desiccant silica gel packet inside the package lf the inverter is exposed to humidity or dust e g if it is installed on construction equipment detach it from any equipment before storing it under the conditions set forth on Page vi If the inverter is not supplied with electricity for a long period of time the electrolytic condenser may suffer thermal degradation To prevent this from happening connect the power supply to the inverter for 30 60 minutes at least once a year Do not perform any wiring or operation to the inverter on the output secondary side Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Manual id este ziii iii iii Product Capacity Selection Process ueeeeeeeeeeeeseeseee nennen nennen nnne nennt nnns iv Safety Precautions ME V Usage Precauti hs iii pil eie debe elves ied vii lA A A A x 1 Basic Considerations wis mimica ccnnte stain cuc cce sect essecvendeceen
190. fault value and then supplying 32 00 kHz to the TI terminal the system operates at 30 00 Hz In 91 Pulse Monitor Shows the magnitude of the pulse frequency to the TI terminal Used to monitor the magnitude of the present pulse frequency In 92 TI Filter The set time means the time required to increase the frequency up to approximately 63 of the Tl value made by step input within the inverter when the pulse input is supplied in steps In 93 TI Pls x1 In 96 TI Perc y2 Able to set the gradient of output frequency offset value etc for the magnitude of the pulse frequency as follows With O set quantizing is not used 6 10 LSIs 6 Basic Functions Figure 6 9 Setting the gradient of output frequency and offset value for the magnitude of pulse Preset frequency In 96 In 94 In 93 In 95 Tl input In 97 TI Inverting Able to change the rotation direction of the present operation In 98 TI Quantizing Identical to the V1 Quantizing function of In 17 Please refer to page 6 6 In 17 V1 Quantizing B Frequency setting via RS 485 communications Int 485 LCD Setting display Setting range Frequency Setting Freq Ref Operation Frq M lhode Src 6 Int 485 Built in CM 01 communication Int485 St ID 1 1 250 inverter ID 0 ModBus i Built in RTU CM 02 communication Int485 Proto Reserved 0 2 protocol 2 LS Inv 485 Built
191. free of charge Paid Technical Support A certain fee will be charged for service in the following cases Malfunction was caused by the intentional or unintentional negligence of the consumer Malfunction was caused by inappropriate voltage or defects of machines connected to the product Malfunction was caused by Act of God fire flood gas earthquake etc The product was modified or repaired in a place that is not our agency or service center The product does not have a LSIS plate attached to it The warranty has expired Please visit LSIS homepage http www Isis biz for more useful information and services LSis A Manual Revision History Manual Revision History Number Issued Year and Month Revised Content Version No Notes 1 2011 First edition 1 00 2 B LSS INDEX INDEX 0 10V voltage output sese 0 20 mA current output 2nd Motor Function Group 2nd Motor Operation oooooocccncccoccccocananccancconanananananccnnno 3 wire operation ooconncccccnocccononcnanana canon conan cnn rana na nano nos Acc Dec Stop Command sse Acc Dec time setting based on max frequency 6 22 Accelerating Malt ooonooncnnnnnnnnninnnccnocnconcanarncananonananancnnno Acceleration Dwell e ss S Add Macro Group cccccccncnnnnnonnnonnnnnnncnanonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnons Adjustment
192. function group PAR gt Ad sse Control Function Group PAR gt CM eccinoccccnonccccnnnnnononnnnnnonancanonnncaconnn cana rca nana ra ranas Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR In Output Terminal Block Function Group PAR OU Communication Function Group PAR CM D oconnicccnnicccconancnninnncaninnncanonnn canon nennen nennen Application Function Group PAR AP eene enne enne nnne Protection Function Group PAR Pr 2nd Motor Function Group PAR M2 Group Dedicated for LCD Loader rennen 10 12 1 Trip Mode TRP Last x eese nennen errem 10 1227 Config Mode GNE er REUS Protection Function Hem innn nann c erect re te De D eT D DATED TEE DADA AlarmisricHom eH onore erro cinco tdo do dto edo edo do ccc dics Troubleshooting 5 pO pd apta eta e e os S NEU Troubleshooting in Case of No Alarm Display Goolirig Ean Replacemerit err sees casacecayesuet savage ERRARE NEUEN AISEERYERUEE Daily Inspection and Regular Inspection List essen Quality ASSUIANCE eec A Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Full Product ER A de t qub ene e atid Figure 2 1 LSLV0004 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0004 S100 0008 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V Figure 2 2 LSLV0008 0015 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0015 S100 0022 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V 2 7 Figure 2 3 LSLV0022 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV003
193. functional N O N C AC 250 V 1 A or less relay terminal DC 30V 1A or less 0 12 Vdc 4 20 mA Selectable from frequency output current Analog output output voltage and DC link voltage Pulsetrain Max 32 kHz 0 12 V 7 Functions related to multi functional terminal can be selected based on IN group In 65 71 parameter settings 24 LSIs 2 Standard 3 Protection function Overcurrent overvoltage low voltage outside trip ground fault current detection inverter overheating motor overheating input output open phase overload protection lightload protection communication error frequency command loss hardware failure cooling fan failure Pre PID operation failure no motor trip outside brake trip option failure safety contact failure inverter temp sensor failure parameter writing error IO board failure Stall prevention overload light load cooling fan failure frequency Warning command loss DB utilization rotor time constant tuning failure Heavy load level 16 ms or less light load level 8 ms or less Continues to operate should be within rated input and output voltage Heavy load level 16 ms or higher light load level 8 ms or higher Automatic restart operation allowed Instantaneous power interruption 4 Structure and usage environment Forced air cooling structure Forced cooling 5 5 22 kW 200 400 V product Protection structure IP
194. g If the DC braking quantity is too large or the braking time is too long the motor may be overheated or damaged so be careful about this matter The DC braking quantity is the basis of the set motor rated current so do not set the current value higher than the inverter rated current Or the motor may be overheated or damaged B Free run stop Coasting Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting display range Ad 08 Stop mode Stop mode 2 Free Run Unit When the operation command is turned off the inverter output is blocked and the motor free wheels without power to stop When the inertia on the motor load side is large and the motor is operating at high speed the motor may still rotate due to the load inertia even when the inverter output is blocked so caution is required Frequency Voltage Operation command Figure 6 31 Free run stop 6 36 LSIS 6 Basic Functions B Power Braking Optimally decelerating without overvoltage trip LCD Setting Group Code Name display Setting range Power Ad 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Braking In the case that the inverter DC voltage rises above a certain level due to the motor regenerative energy adjust the deceleration gradient or perform the acceleration again to reduce the regenerative energy Power braking can be used when a short deceleration time is needed without any other braking resistance and braki
195. g parameters in the user group enne n nsn innen ntn nnn nennen s nennen Table 7 22 Deleting parameters saved in the user group individually eeeeeeeeeeeeennnnenen mene Table 7 23 Starting Easy Sali eee ee uir i e rede nee neuer ene ke e EORR ege cobcunieusesenavsuecevesacs docente dada d Table 7 24 Types of output Items 2 oic cerent erbe Dar re ee Y a ei ede eO DERE C UT I P I Y ER EE eere C Peas Table 7 25 Fault relay bit setting function Table 7 26 Setting the activation condition based on the types of failure Table 7 27 Variables to be displayed at the top of the keypad display ssesseeeeeennnen nemen Table 8 1 Stall protection bit setting function nennen nennen en nren nnne t ennt neret sensere Table 8 2 Input output open phase protection bit function eene enne enne nennen rennen nnn nana cnn Table 8 3 Inverter motion setting in case of speed command loss XML sessseeeeneneeeneneem ennemi Table 8 4 Fault Warning list tt te eu A epe bcne epe dude dx VE e pep E DEEP eua Table 9 1 Communication standard ccccccccsceeeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeseaaeeeeaeeesesaeeeseaaeeseeaeeeesaeeeseaaeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeess Table 9 2 Built in protocol x rer o n RE eese Table 9 3 Selection of inverter motion in case of communication error sesssseseeeeeeeeeeeneeneem eene enne Table 9 4 Total memory map for S100 communication
196. h171E output Nur 0 8 3 O A 9 7 OO parameters Output 31 0h171F communication Para 0000 FFFF 000A O A 9 7 olo Stauts 1 Hex address 1 78 115 200 bps 79 CM 06 9 codes will be displayed only after installing the communication option card Refer to separate option user manual for the option 1028 LSIS 10 Table of Functions Communication LCD Setting Initial address display range value Output 32 0h1720 communication p amp re 90005 FFFF 0008 oa 97 lolo address 2 Output 33 0h1721 communication 9624 0000 FFFF poor O A 9 7 olo Stauts 3 Hex address 3 Output 34 0h1722 communication P9 8 0000 FFFF 299 O A 9 7 olo Stauts 4 Hex address 4 Output 35 0h1723 communication pa 0000 TFT 0000 oa un lee address 5 Output 36 0h1724 communication Para 9009 FEER 0000 O A 9 7 olo Stauts 6 Hex address 6 Output 37 0h1725 communication ara 0000 FFFF 59g O A 9 7 olo Stauts 7 Hex address 7 Output 38 0h1726 communication 278 0000 TFT oooo oa amp du 9 o address 8 Number of Para Ctrl 50 0h1732 input Num 0 8 2 O A 9 7 OIO parameters Input 51 0h1733 communication 12 0000 FFFF oops X A 9 7 olo Control 1 Hex address 1 Input 52 0h1734 communication 12 0000 FFFF 0006 X A 9 7 olo Control 2 Hex address 2 Input 53 0h1735 communication 128 COU FFFF oooo xa 97 lolo address 3 Input 54 0h1736 communication 7 P
197. he voltage before energy saving operation starts become the base value of the percentage It does not work during acceleration deceleration B Automatic energy saving operation Group Code Ad 50 Current Output voltage Y d Figure 7 20 Manual energy saving operation Name Energy saving operation E Save Mode 2 Auto LCD display Seiting pal Unit The energy saving amount is automatically calculated based on the motor rated current bA 13 and no load current bA 14 to adjust the output voltage others during energy saving operation the Acc Dec time may be longer than the set Acc Dec time due to the time required to return to the normal operation from the energy saving operation If the operation frequency is changed or acceleration deceleration is carried by stop command or LSTS 7 35 7 Application Functions 7 14 Speed Search Operation This operation is used to prevent failure that could happen when the inverter outputs voltage if the inverter output voltage is cut off and the motor is idling This feature estimates the motor rotation speed based on the inverter output current not measuring the accurate speed Group Code LCD display Setting Cn 70 Speed search mode SS Mode 0 Flying Start i selection 1 Cn 71 Speed search Speed Search 0000 Bit operation selection Cn 72 Speed search SS Sup Current da x19 80 200 reference current or
198. if the bA 15 Rated Volt is set to 0 Voltage 100 bA 48 2 bA 46 a Linear bA 44 V F bA 42 Frequency bA 43 bA 47 Frequency Starting pA 41 bA 45 Base Frequency Figure 6 25 bA 41 User Freq 1 bA 48 User Volt 4 user V F pattern operation If you set the pattern so that it deviates greatly from the linear V F pattern when using a general induction motor the torque may become insufficient or the motor may overheat due to excessive excitation When you use the user V F pattern the forward torque boost dr 16 Fwd Boost and the reverse torque boost dr 17 Rev Boost do not work LSis 6 31 6 Basic Functions 6 15 Torque Boost B Manual Torque Boost When a high start torque is required for certain load types Setting range Group Code LCD display Setting Torque boost dr 15 method Torque Boost 0 Manual 0 1 dr 16 Forwardtorque Ewa Boost 2 0 0 0 15 0 boost dr iz Reverse torque Rev Boost 2 0 0 0 15 0 boost Adjusts the output voltage during low speed operation or when starting You can increase the output voltage in the low speed area to improve the start characteristic or raise the low speed torque dr 16 Fwd Boost Adjusts the amount of torque boost during forward rotation dr 17 Rev Boost Adjusts the amount of torque boost during reverse rotation f you set the amount of torque boost too large the motor may overheat at low
199. igital output control Bl2 Reserved 0 Off 1 On Bli Reserved BIO Reserved B9 Reserved B8 Reserved LSis 9 27 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Assigned content by Address rarameler bit B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 Reserved B4 Reserved B3 Reserved B2 Reserved B1 Q1 Basic I O OU 33 None BO Relay 1 Basic I O OU 31 None 0h0387 Reserved Reserved 0h0388 PID reference 0 1 Give the PID reference command 0h0389 PID feedback value 0 1 PID feedback value 0h038A Motor rated current 0 1 A 0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V Oh038C 0h038F Reserved 0h0390 Torque Ref 0 1 96 Torque command 0h0391 Fwd Pos Torque Limit 0 1 Ab motoring torque 0h0392 Fwd Neg Torque Limit 0 1 Forward regenerative torque limit 0h0393 Rev Pos Torque Limit 0 1 oo motoring torque 0h0394 Rev Neg Torque Limit 0 1 Reverse regenerative torque limit 0h0395 Torque Bias 0 1 Torque bias 0h0396 0h399 Reserved l Set the CNF 209 value 0h039A Anytime Para see page 10 41 0h039B Monitor Line 1 i Set the CNF 21 value see page 10 41 Set the CNF 22 value see Oh039C Monitor Line 2 page 10 41 0h039D Monitor Line 3 UN a see page vii The frequency set by way of communication into the S100 common area frequency address 0h0380 0h0005 will not be saved even w
200. igma mH X A 7 43 OJO 19 s M2 Ls 0 00 99 99 mH X A 743 lolo inductance 20 Rotor time wo 25 5000 ms X A 743 O O constant 0 Linear M2 V F 25 0h1C19 V F pattern Patt 1 Square 0 Linear X A 7 43 ojo 2 User V F Forward M2 Fwd 26 Oh1C1A aderoi kood 0 0 15 0 X A 7 43 olo Reverse M2 Rev E 27 0h1C1B torus boost bons 0 0 15 0 X A 7 43 olo Stall 28 Oh1C1C prevention Mf e 30 150 150 X A 743 O O level Electronic 29 Oh1C1D thermal 4 METH 400 200 150 X A 743 lolo minute rating Electronic 30 Oh1C1E thermal M2 ETH 50 150 100 X A 743 O O continuous Cont rating 10 40 LS 1s 10 Table of Functions 10 12 Group Dedicated for LCD Loader 10 12 1 Trip Mode TRP Last x Function display Setting range Initial value Reference page 00 Trip Name x Fault type disiplay Operation frequenc 01 Output Freq P En Hen y 02 Output Current Output Current at fault s 03 Inverter State Qu eek EE state i 04 DCLink Voltage DC section state E E 05 Temperature NTC temperature z 06 DI State Input terminal state E 0000 0000 07 DO state Output terminal state 000 08 Trip On Time Fault time after Power on 0 00 00 00 00 09 Trip Run Time Phu 0 00 00 00 00 10 Trip Delete Delete fault history 0 0 No 1 Yes 10 12 2 Config Mode CNF
201. in CM 03 communication Int485 a 9600 bps 0 7 BaudR speed 0 D8 PN S1 Built in D8 PN S2 CM 04 communication Int485 Mode 0 3 frame setting 2 D8 PE S1 3 D8 PO S1 When setting the operation group Frq code to 6 Int 485 you can control the inverter by communicating with the upper level controller PLC or PC using the RS 485 terminals S S SG of the terminal block For more information refer to Chapter 9 1 Communication Function For details on other communication options such as CANopen please refer to the relevant manual Notes LSis 6 11 6 Basic Functions 6 3 Frequency HOLD of Analog Command eon me coy a 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 V1 Frequency 4 V2 Operation Frq Setting Freq Ref Src 0 12 Methods 5 l2 6 Int 485 8 Field Bus 12 Pulse Setting Px Px Define In 65 71 Fa Px P1 P7 21 Analog hold 0 49 unction In the case of setting frequency using the analog input of the control terminal block this function holds the operation frequency when the terminal selected as Analog Hold among multi function terminals is input uei o o Preset frequency zu o y Frequency ai x ll ANNN Figure 6 10 Frequency HOLD of analog command 6 12 LS Is c 6 Basic Functions 6 4 Changing the display from Frequency to Revolutions RPM 18 When setting the value of dr 21 Hz Rpm Sel to 1 Rpm Display the freq
202. in which the resonance occurs Resonance occurs between the machine s natural frequency and the inverter output frequency Vibration hunting occurs in the motor Cause Measure f noise gets into the analog input terminal causing disturbance in the frequency command change the value of the input filter time constant INO7 The frequency command contains electronic noise The wiring of the inverter and the Keep the total wiring length of the inverter and the motor is long motor within 100 m Below 3 7 kW within 50 m B The motor does not stop completely even if the inverter output stops Measure DC braking does not work normally at Adjust the parameters associated with the DC braking stop therefore it is impossible to Increase the DC braking current setting decelerate sufficiently Increase the DC braking time setting at stopping B The output frequency is not increased to the command frequency Cause Measure The command frequency is within the Set the command frequency again to outside the jump jump frequency range frequency range The upper limit for the frequency Set the upper limit for the frequency command to command is exceeded above the command frequency you wish to set The stall prevention function is working Replace the inverter with the one of next higher during acceleration due to high load capacity LSTS 11 11 11 Tro
203. inal block and RS 485 communication command are lost The communication option and extension l O card are installed Also activated when the analog input and communication command are lost 14 RUN Activated when the operation command is inputted and the inverter is outputting the voltage Not activated during DC braking o IUJyM Operation command GA 00 Figure 7 36 Run 15 Stop Activated when the operation command is off and there is no inverter output voltage 16 Steady constant speed operation Activated during constant speed operation 17 Inverter Line inverter operation 18 Comm Line during commercial power operation LSis 7 65 7 Application Functions If the commercial switching operation is required it can be used as signal source to operate the sequence relay or magnetic contactor Use the aux relay of inverter terminal block and multi function output MO1 Select one of multi function inputs for commercial switching Exchange For details refer to 7 24 Commercial Switching Operation Page 7 44 LCD Group Code display Setting Px terminal Px Define I 65 71 function setting Px P1 P7 18 Exchange i OU 31 Multi function Relay 1 17 Inverter Line relay 1 item OU 33 Multi function Q1 Define 18 Comm Line E output 1 item 19 Speed Search speed search operation Outputs while the inverter is working with the speed
204. ing 0 to 10 V Setting range LCD display Setting Operation Frq direis Bea Freq Ref Src 2 V1 In 01 Frequency for Freq at 100 60 00 0 00 Max e maximum analog input frequency V1 input amount In 05 display V1 Monitor V 0 00 0 00 12 00 V V1 input polarity In 06 selection V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0 1 In 07 Tine constant ora V1 Filter 10 0 10000 msec input filter In gg eI ios 0 00 0 00 10 00 V Output at V1 minimum 0 00 In 09 voltage V1 Perc y1 0 00 100 00 Jo Maximum input voltage 0 00 In 10 for V1 V1 Volt x2 10 00 12 00 V Output at V maximum In 11 voltage V1 Perc y2 100 00 0 100 Zo In 16 Changing rotation V1 Inverting 0 No 0 1 direction In 17 V1 quantization level V1 Quantizing 0 04 0 04 10 00 96 Set In 06 related with the input terminal block to Unipolar no 0 Make an input to V1 terminal with a potentiometer using the voltage output of the external controller or the VR output terminal of the inverter control terminal block as shown in the figure below SJ RS External power source Internal power source Figure 6 1 Frequency setting by voltage input into the terminal block 64 LSIs 6 Basic Functions 2 When using 0 to 10 V of external circuit In 01 Freq at 100 for connecting potentiometer to terminal block Set the operation frequency on max voltage input Set the operation frequenc
205. ion 0 0 600 0 s 50 0 O A olo time 4 10 8 LSIs Communication LCD Initial address display Setting range Multi step Dec 77 0h124D deceleration 0 0 600 0 s 50 0 O A OO 3 Time 4 time 4 Multi step 78 0h124E acceleration ACC Uus 0 0 600 0 s 40 0 O A olo time 5 Multi step Dec 79 0h124F deceleration 0 0 600 0 s 40 0 O A OJO Time 5 time 5 Multi step Acme 80 0h1250 acceleration 6 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A OO time 6 Multi step er 81 0h1251 deceleration Ti 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A ojo ime 6 time 6 Multi step y 82 0h1252 acceleration TMe 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O A olo time 7 Multi step Dec 83 0h1253 deceleration 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O A O O dme Time 7 Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 3 Can be displayed only when bA 01 is not 0 4 bA 24 will be displayed only when dr 09 control mode is IM Sensorless 5 bA 41 48 will be displayed only when any of bA 07 and M2 25 M2 V F Patt is set to User V F 6 bA 50 64 will be displayed only when any of In 65 71 multi function inputs is set to Multi step speed Speed L M H In 50 In 52 will be displayed when LCD display is applied 7 Displayed only when any of In 72 75 multi function inputs is set to Multi step Acc Dec Xcel L M H LSis 10 9 10 4 Expanded function group PAR gt Ad
206. ion card and so on 1 Keypad Operating Command KeyPad Group Code Name LcD display Setting Setting Unit range Operation Operation drv command Cmd Source 0 KeyPad 0 4 method If setting the drv code of the operation group to O Keypad start the operation using the operation command key RUN on the inverter keypad and stop it using the stop key STOP 2 Terminal Block Operating Command 1 Fx Rx 1 Setting LCD display Seiting range Operation Operation drv command Cmd Source 1 Fx Rx 1 0 4 method Setting Px In 65 71 terminal ai E E function Px P1 P7 Setting P du etting Px In 65 71 terminal Px Ponne S5 LR function Px P1 P7 Set the drv code of the operation group to 1 Fx Rx 1 After selecting terminals to be used as the forward FX and the reverse RX operation command out of multi function terminals P1 to P7 set the functions of the corresponding terminals among In 65 to 71 of the terminal block input group to FX and RX In the case that the FX terminal and the RX terminal are simultaneously turned on or off the inverter will stop 20 When using LCD it will be displayed in DRV 06 When using LCD it will be invisible When using LCO Loader corresponds to DRV 06 Cmd Source When using LCD Loader corresponds to DRV 06 Cmd Source LSis 6 15 6 Basic Functions Frequency Fx MS A Rx Figur
207. ion frequency reaches O Hz RUN in operation and FWD forward direction operation indicators turn off and the number display shows 10 00 Se 10 Hz Se Se Frequency RUN STOP RST Wiring diagram Operation pattern LSis 5 17 5 Using the Keypad 5 11 Using ESC Key Move to initial location refer to 5 6 Jog operation refer to 7 3 Remote local refer to 6 7 If using the jog operation to set the ESC key function Operation Drive group group gt Indicates the first code of the operation group Press the right shift key f Indicates the first code of the drive group 2 dr H Press the up key A or the down key until the ESC key setting code 90 appears J nmn Indicates the ESC key code dr 90 Lt cnt Press the Enter key ENT Indicates the initial value O move to the initial location Press the up key A so that the jog operation mode 1 is displayed a UR Indicates the jog operation mode 1 5 Press the Enter key ENT The number blinks Press the Enter key again If you press the ESC key when ESC key mode is set to Jog 1 or remote local 2 then SET LED blinks 5 18 LSIs 6 Basic Functions 6 1 Basic Functions Introduction of 100 Basic Functions Table 6 1 Introduction of S100 basic functions Basic Functions Usage Examples Setting frequency with keypad
208. ith the Parameter Save Perform setting as follows to continuously use the frequency set through communication even after the power cycle Frequency setting method dr 07 Set dr 07 Freq Ref Source to Keypad 1 Frequency setting 0h1101 Set the frequency through communication into the S100 parameter area frequency address 0h1101 Storing parameters OhO3E0 Perform Parameter Save OhO3EO0 1 before turning off the power After the power cycle the frequency set and saved through communication will be displayed Displayed when the LCD is installed 9 28 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function B Inverter memory control area parameter both read and write The characteristic of this area is that when the parameter is set not only the value is reflected to the inverter but also it is saved However the parameters set in other areas through communication will be reflected to the inverter but not saved It means that all of the setting values will be cleared after the power cycle of the inverter and will revert back to the previous values prior to the setting Therefore after setting through communication be sure to perform the Parameter Save prior to power off But this area will be saved to the inverter without the need of the Parameter Save Commu Changeable nication Parameter during iini Address Operation pag VOh03E0 Save parameters X 0 No 1 Yes 7 46 OhO3E
209. itial Ref ontrol ommunication i nitia eference mode address display Setting range value I Jump i 00 Jump code Code 1 99 20 O A OO 0 None Auxiliary V1 01 0h1201 command Aux Ref sas v2 0 None X A 7 8 o o setting Src method 4 12 6 Pulse 0 M G A 1 M G A 2 M G A 3 M M G A Auxiliary A M G 2 A 202 0h1202 comman ustedes 50 o M G A X A 7 8 olo motion Type selection 5 M G 2 A 50 6 M G 2 A 50 7 M M G 2 A 50 Auxiliary ux Bet 03 0h1203 command Gan 200 0 200 0 100 0 O A 7 3 gain 0 Keypad Second Fx Rx 1 04 0h1204 operation Cmd 2nd gt Ecjme5 1 Fx4Rx 1 XA 6 41 olo command Src method 3 Int 485 4 FieldBus 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 V1 Second a Va 05 0h1205 frequency Freq 2nd 0 Keypad O A 6 41 olo setting Src 5 12 1 method 6 Int 485 8 FieldBus 12 Pulse 0 Linear V F 1 Square 07 0h1207 V F pattern Pattern 2 User V F 0 Linear X A 6 29 O x 3 Square 2 LSis 10 Table of Functions Communication LCD Initial d address display Setting range value Acc Dec reference RampT 9 Max Freq 0 Max 08 0h1208 frequency Mode Freq X A 6 22 oyo 1 Delta Freq 0 0 01 sec Time unit Time E 09 0h1209 setting Scale 1 0 1 sec 1 0 1 sec X A 6 22 OJo 2 1 sec 0 60 Hz 10 0h120A aput power 69 502 0 60Hz X A 745 lolo frequency Sel 1 50 Hz Number of
210. itoring RCM device is used for viii LSS Usage Precautions protection in case of direct contact only an RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this product Repair Inspection and Parts Replacement Do not conduct a Megger test measuring insulation resistance against the control circuit of the inverter For details about regular inspection part replacement intervals see chapters 11 611 6 Daily Inspection and Regular Inspection List B Disposal Dispose of the inverter according to your local regulations regarding the disposal of common industrial waste Recycle all recyclable components contained in this inverter to preserve energy and resources All packing materials and metal components of this product are recyclable in most areas Plastic parts are recyclable or you may be able to burn them in a controlled environment depending on local regulations B General Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers omitted for more detailed explanation Install covers and circuit breakers according to the regulations before operation Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual Turn off the inverter when it is not in use B Cleaning Be sure to turn off the inverter power supply and remove all plugs that are connected to the inverter socket before cleaning Clean with a dry cloth Never use water or a wet cloth on the inverter B Long term Storage I
211. ived parameter address is invalid at slave 03 ILLEGAL DATA T VALUE ID Received data is invalid at slave 21 WRITE MODE Ee A ERROR WM Read only or change prohibition during operation 22 FRAME ERROR FE Different frame size or Num LSis 9 RS 485 Communication Function B ASCII E Table 9 10 ASSCII code Caracter C LS A NES E DONXNXNX Y O 010010101 OOMNAWNH TOUWAANMVIVOATDWIONMIVIVADADWS n TO OONDOABRWBN ON X X oO o A B C D F G H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b E d e f g h i j k m n O p 9 14 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 2 5 Modbus RTU Protocol B Function code and protocol unit byte Function Code 03 Read Holding Register Field Name Response Field Name Slave Address Slave Address Function 0x03 Function 0x03 Starting Address Hi Byte Count Starting Address Lo Data Hi of Points Hi Data Lo of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Data Hi Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Function Code 04 Read Input Register Field Name Response Field Name Slave Address Slave Address Function 0x04 Function 0x04 Starting Address Hi Byte Count Starting Address Lo Data Hi 3t of Points Hi Data Lo 3t of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Data Hi Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Function Code 06 Preset Sing
212. key ENT 3 En 0 of 5 0 blinks at one second interval lo Et Press the left shift key 4 4 C 5 of 5 0 blinks to show that value 5 can be changed AL Press the up key A Ford The value is changed to 6 0 EL i AX Press the left shift key 4 06 0 is displayed while O of 06 0 is blinking Press the up key A Displays 16 0 Press the Enter key ENT 16 0 blinks Press the Enter key ENT o d I 7 En gt m ez a a lt gt D gt 00 Displays ACC The acceleration time is changed to 16 0 sec 14 Blinking when modifying the parameters is to ask whether to input the modified values At this time press the Enter key ENT to confirm the input If you do not want to confirm the modified values you can cancel it by pressing left right up and down keys 40 amp A W except the Enter key ENT while blinking LSis 59 5 Using the Keypad B Frequency setting When setting the operation frequency to 30 05 Hz in the operation group OOOO ADOOS Operation group 1 n nn Indicates the first code information of the operation group LI A Press the Enter key ENT 2 nn Press the left shift key 4 3 The position to be set moves to the left Lf Lt Press the left shift key 4 twice 4 Use the up key A to set to 3 5 The value is changed to 30 00 Press the right shift key f three times
213. l B Error while writing 5 parameters B4 Reserved B3 FAN Trip B2 PTC thermal sensor trip B1 Reserved BO MC Fail Trip B15 Reserved B14 Reserved B13 Reserved B12 Reserved B11 Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Reserved B8 Reserved Level type trip 7 Oe information B7 Reserved B6 Reserved B5 SafetyB B4 SafetyA B3 Keypad lost command B2 Lost Command B1 LV BO BX B15 Reserved 0h0333 H W diagnosis trip b 7 Reserved information B6 Reserved B5 QueueFull LSis 9 25 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Assigned content by bit B4 Reserved B3 Watchdog 2 error B2 Watchdog 1 error B1 EEPROM error BO ADC error 0h0334 Warning information B15 Reserved Reserved B10 Reserved B9 Auto Tuning failed B8 Keypad lost B7 Encoder misconnection B6 Wrong installation of encoder B5 DB B4 FAN running B3 Lost command B2 Inverter Overload B1 Underload 9 26 LSIs BO Overload 0h0335 0h033F Reserved Total number of days when ue OnTime date Day the inverter is powered on Total number of minutes 0h0341 On Time minute Min excluding the total number of On Time days Total number of days when Due RUDI gate Day the inverter drives the motor Total number of minutes 0h0343 Run Time minute Min excluding the total number of
214. l Block Wiring and Outside Fuse Specifications an annee hene RS 2 11 Precautions before Installation essesss 3 1 Precautions before Peripheral Device Installation 2 16 Pre PID operation rennen eren 7 21 Prohibit parameter change mirasda ninap 7 49 Prohibition of forward or reverse rotation 6 20 Protection Function eene 11 1 Protection Function Group see 10 35 Rated Current Derating based on Ambient Temperature and Installation Method ooooococnnncccnnonaccnananininancco nana na nana nananano 2 15 Rated Current Derating for Carrier Frequency 2 13 Rated Current Derating for Input Voltage 2 14 Rated current guarantee area for carrier frequency 7 42 Reading Writing and Saving Parameters 7 47 Regeneration Evasion for Press sesser 7 58 Regular inspection annually ss 11 15 Regular inspection biennially 11 16 Safe Operation Mode ooooooonoconcconoccconanonanonancnancnonanencnnno 7 12 Safety Precautions isein aiii v SSCUIVC EEA TETA TETE A A EEE 6 26 Select the monitor mode display 7 70 D LSis Select the type of output signal contact 7 69 Selection of Operation in Case of Low Voltage Fault 8 16 Selection of Oper
215. le Register Field Name Response Field Name Slave Address Slave Address Function 0x06 Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo number of Points number of Points LSis 9 15 9 RS 485 Communication Function lt Query gt lt Response gt Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Function Code 16 hex 0h10 Preset Multiple Register lt Response gt Field Name Field Name Slave Address Slave Address Function 0x10 Function 0x10 Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo of Register Hi of Register Hi of Register Lo of Register Lo Byte Count CRC Lo Data Hi CRC Hi Data Lo Data Hi Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Exception Code 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE 06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Response Field Name Slave Address Function Exception Code CRC Lo CRC Hi 1 The function value is the one set to the top level bit of the query function value 9 16 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function Example of Modbus RTU Communication use When Acc time is changed to 5 0 sec and Dec time is changed to 10 0 sec Th
216. le phase 200 V LSLV0015 S100 0022 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V wi 2 A 3 Je MEJ o Z i E I m 0000 m 0000 la N o H E Hi A U E ha B Figure 2 2 LSLV0008 0015 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0015 S100 0022 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V LSis 27 2 Standard B LSLVOO22 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0037 S100 0040 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V Wi AA W2 SSS H H v i i Figure 2 3 LSLV0022 S100 single phase 200 V LSLV0037 S100 0040 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V 28 LSis 2 Standard B LSLVOO55 0220 S100 3 phase 200 V 3 phase 400 V
217. leration or operating Sel a come in constant speed using multi function terminal Used for load requiring constant torque Linear V F pattern operation irrespective of frequency Operation pattern suitable for the load with the Square reduction V F pattern operation starting characteristics of square reduction such as fan pump etc When the user changes the setting according to User V F pattern operation the V F and load patterns of special motor instead of general induction motor When a large amount of starting torque is needed Manual torque boost S such as in elevator load etc When selecting automatic adjustment function if a Automate torque boe large amount of starting torque is required Setting the motor voltage when the input power Motor output voltage adjustment supply is different from the motor voltage specification A general acceleration method When there is no Accelerating start function selection it accelerates directly to the target frequency on operation command input When the motor is rotating before the voltage is supplied from the inverter it stops the motor revolution by DC braking and then makes acceleration Start after DC braking A general deceleration method When there is no Deceleration stop function selection it decelerates down to 0 Hz and then stops Stopping the motor by supplying direct current at sopping by DE buking the preset frequ
218. less 0 Cn 73 speed Search SS P Gain 100 0 9999 proportional gain Cn z4 Speed A integral Ss Gain 200 0 9999 Cn 75 Output blocking time ss Block Time 1 0 0 60 sec before speed search OU 31 Multi function relay 1 Relay 1 item 19 Speed i i i Search our J a o Cn 70 SS Mode You can select the type of speed search e 0 Flying Start 1 carries out the speed search while keeping the inverter output current below Cn 72 SS Sup Current during idling If the direction of the motor idling and the direction of operation command at restart are the same a stable speed search function can be performed at about 10 Hz or lower However if the direction of the motor idling and the direction of operation command at restart are different the speed search does not produce satisfactory result as there is no way to find out the direction of idling e 1 Flying Start 2 carries out the speed search by PI controlling in the inverter the ripple current generated by the counter electromotive force at idling Since this method can find out the direction of motor idling forward reverse the speed search function is stable regardless of the direction of motor idling and direction of operation command However since the ripple current is used which is generated by the counter electromotive force at idling the counter electromotive force is proportional to idling speed the idling frequency is not determined
219. ll user UserGrp 7 z GNF 45 registration codes AllDel 0 ih You can put together only the selected data from the groups in the parameter mode for data modification You can register up to 64 parameters in the user group CNF 42 Multi Key Sel Select No 3 UserGrp SelKey among the ESC Key functions Even if the above ESC Key is set to UserGrp SelKey the user group is not displayed if you do not register the user group parameter Table 7 21 Registering parameters in the user group Order Description 1 First select Multi Key in CNF Mode Code 42 and then 4 UserGrp SelKey mark appears at the top of the screen In PAR mode go to the parameter you want to register and press MULTI Key For example press MULTI Key in Cmd Frequency DRV Group Code No 1 to view the following screen o BR U STP DRVO Cmd Frequency 40 CODE s Step Freg 1 00 64 CODE Figure 7 26 Screen shown after pressing MULTI Key in DRV Group Code No 1 Screen description 1 Parameter group and code number to register 2 Name of the parameter to register 3 Code number to register in the user group if you press PROG ENT Key at 40 it is registered in the user group code No 40 4 Information of the parameter previously registered in the user group code No 40 5 User group s code setting range 0 means cancellation of code setting 3 In the above screen set the code number registered in the us
220. lo frequency q y 35 on1823 FiDcontoler pe PID Exit 0 0 100 0 0 0 XA zz lole motion level PID controller Pre PID 36 0h1824 motion delay pid 0 9999 s 600 O A Vez olo time y PID sleep 37 0h1825 mode PID Sleep DT 0 0 999 9 s 60 0 O A vA rd olo delay time PID sleep 38 0h1826 mode Dre AE 0 00 O A zr lolo frequency q q y 39 0h1827 DIDA pA Ea eA A 35 O A 7 47 ea o level Lev O Below Level 40 0h1828 PID wake up PID WakeUp Above Level 0 Below o 7 17 olo mode setting Mod Level 2 Beyond Level 0 1 Bar 2 mBar 3 Pa 4 kPa 5 Hz 42 0h182A PID controller 510 Unit Sel 6 rpm 0 OIA 717 lolo unit selection 7 V 8 9 kW 10 HP 11 12 fe 43 0h182B PID unit gain PID Unit Gain 0 00 300 00 100 00 O A riy olo 0 x100 1 x10 44 0h182C PID unit scale AE 2 x1 2 x1 O A v vy olo 3 x 0 1 4 x0 01 LSi1s 10 33 10 Table of Functions Control Communication LCD Initial Reference mode No address Name display Seiting range val e Property page PID 2nd 45 0h182D proportional PID P2 Gain 0 0 1000 0 100 0 X A 7 17 OO gain Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 26 AP 16 45 will be displayed only when AP 01 App Mode is set to Proc PID 10334 LS 1s e icati LCD Initial Ref on
221. lue in increments of 5 If itis mid speed 30 Hz or higher increase Cn 28 value in increments of 500 OCT may occur at low speed if the set value is too high The motor speed level falls bA 20 Auto Tuning Select 6 Tr stdstl in bA 20 to carry out bA 24 rotor time constant turning B Torque controller output filter Cn 52 Torque Out LPF This is the filter time constant of torque command LSis 7 33 7 Application Functions 7 12 Kinetic Energy Buffering If AC power fails to the inverter the internal DC voltage can drop quickly and a low voltage trip can occur Kinetic Energy Buffering KEB can help support the internal DC voltage to prevent this occurring when there is an instantaneous power interruption Requires high inertia load LCD display Setting Setting range Cn 77 Energy buffering KEB Select 1 Yes selection Cn za Energy E start KEB Start Lev 130 110 140 Cn 79 Energy ei stop Ep Stop Lev 135 125 145 Cn 80 Energy buffering gain KEB Gain 1000 1 20000 Cn 77 KEB Select If the input power is cut off select energy buffering operation If you select No 0 No the general deceleration operation is carried out until low voltage failure occurs If No 1 KEB Select Yes is selected the inverter power frequency is controlled and the regeneration energy from the motor is sent to charge the inverter DC part Cn 78 KEB Start L
222. ly set to No i inverter terminal block Press the down key V Check if it indicates 0 and enter the Enter key ENT If 0 blinks press the Enter key ENT once more f drv is displayed the operation command method is changed to RUN key of the keypad Press the up key A 1 times Moved to the code that can change the frequency setting method Press the Enter key ENT The current frequency setting method is preset to No 0 frequency setting using the keypad Press the up key A 2 times Check if it indicates 2 using a potentiometer to set the frequency and press the Enter key ENT If 2 blinks press the Enter key ENT once more When Frq is displayed the frequency setting method is changed to the keypad volume Press the down key V 4 times to move to the frequency display status Turn the volume resistance to 10 Hz 10 3 00880058 Press the RUN key of the inverter keypad RUN in operation indicator lamp blinks on the inverter display FWD o forward direction operation indicator lamp is on and the number 11 eae display shows the accelerating frequency When the operation frequency reaches 10 Hz the display shows the left figure Press STOP RESET key of the inverter keypad RUN in operation indicator lamps resumes blinking on the inverter Es display and the number display shows the decelerating frequency 12 d when the operat
223. me 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O L 622 lolo 0 Keypad 1 Fx Rx 1 6 18 Operation Cmd 06 0h1106 command Source 2 seal X L olo metno 3 Int485 9 2 4 Field Bus Option O Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 2 V1 Frequency 4 v2 07 0h1107 ening ases ol UPON CH 63 o o rc 5 12 1 Action 6 Int 485 8 FieldBus 12 Pulse ee 0 V F 6 29 ontro 09 0h1109 Control mode Mode 5 Slip 0 V F X A zs oyo Compen 5 Displayed only when the LCD keypad is installed 5 Displayed only when the LCD keypad is installed Displayed only when the LCD keypad is installed Displayed only when the LCD keypad is installed 6 Displayed only when the LCD keypad is installed 102 LSIs 10 Table of Functions Communication LCD Initial i address display Setting range value Jog 0 00 0 50 Max g 11 0h110B Jog frequency Frequency frequency Hz 10 00 O A 7 7 OO Jog operation 12 0h110C acceleration 99 bs 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O A 77 lolo time Jog operation 13 0h110D deceleration gis 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A 7 7 olo time 0 0 2 kW 1 0 4 kW 2 0 75 kW 3 1 1 kW 4 1 5 kW 5 2 2 kW 6 3 0 kW Dependent 7 3 7 kW 14 Oh110E Motor capacity CE kW on inverter X A 7 23 OO pacity 8 4 0 kW capacity 9 5 5 kW 10 7 5 kW 11 11 0 kW 12 15 0 kW 13 18 5 kW 14 22 0 kW 15 30 0 kW Torque boost Torque 0 Manual 3 15 Oh110F method Boost
224. mpensation operation i Figure 7 15 PID control block diagram ccoo ERA Figure 7 16 Pre PID operatlODs O O O NS AN Figure7 17 PID sl ep Md A AE Figure 7 18 Flux re T o AM M Figurez 19 Foldllme 5 8 O epe e ROB eee RR aa ONO VP M pte E Figure 7 20 Manual energy saving OperatiON oonocccnccnoncconccononononanonncona conca non cnn cc non anna r arranca nena rerit rennen nnne ener ennn nennen 7 35 Figure 7 21 Speed search operation after instantaneous power interruption occurs and power returns sessssss 7 38 Figure 7 22 Number of automatic restarts set to 2 nnne nne n nennen nere 7 40 Figure 7 23 Rated current limits for ambient temperature if the inverter operates at normal duty ssesssessss 7 41 Figure 7 24 Usage example 2nd motor operation function Figure 7 25 Relay operation SEequenCe ooooocccnccccconoccconancnnnnna canon n cnc nan nnnnananananos Figure 7 26 Screen shown after pressing MULTI Key in DRV Group Code No 1 Figure 7 27 Timer function of multi function input terminal Figure 7 28 Brake operation SEquenCe o oooocccccocnccnonnccnananananns Figure 7 29 Regeneration evasion for press Figure 7 30 Analog voltage output change when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and the current output frequency is 30 Hz 7 59 Figure 7 31 Pulse output change when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and the current output frequency is 30 HZ 7 61 Figure 7 32 F
225. multi function terminals P1 to P7 13 RUN Enable is set and this terminal is on Definition of Remote In Remote mode the inverter will only respond to external command frequency and communication signals i e will not operate from the keypad Local mode dr 90 ESC Key Setting When setting to 2 Local Remote the ESC Key will act as the local remote function In this case there is no change for the inverter operation because it operates depending on the already set parameters by the Remote mode If you want to switch to the Local mode just press the ESC Key to make the SET LED blink and operate the inverter with the RUN key on the keypad setting Pressing the ESC Key again causes the SET LED to be turned off and the inverter operates according to the operation command method selected in the operation group drv When Switching from Remote to Local If you switch from Remote to Local the system stops if it has been operating 6 18 LSIs 6 Basic Functions B When Switching from Local to Remote If you switch from Local to Remote the display is changed according to the already set command source and frequency source It is still possible to switch to Remote while the system is operating in the Local mode However the operation depends on which source is set 1 When the terminal block is the command source If you switch to the Remote mode while operating in the Local mode it operates according to the command from the
226. n M2 Acc 5 amp 5 eoo0 s 20 0 O A 742 lolo time Time 05 0h1C05 Deceleration M2 Dec 00 600 0 s 30 0 O A 7 42 lolo time Time 0 0 2 kW 1 0 4 kW 2 0 75 kW 3 1 1 kW 4 1 5 kW 5 2 2 kW 6 3 0 kW Motor M2 7 3 7 kW 06 0h1C06 Capacity Capacity lg LO KW X A 7 42 OO 9 5 5 kW 10 7 5 kW 11 11 0 kW 12 15 0 kW 13 18 5 kW 14 22 0 kW 15 30 0 kW Base M2 Base 30 00 400 00 07 0h1C07 frequency Freq Hz 60 00 X A 7 42 OO 0 V F M2 Ctrl 08 0h1C08 Control mode Mode 2 Slip Compen 0 V F X A 7 42 olo 4 IM Sensorless 10 Oh1COA Number of weno 2 48 X A 742 O O motor poles Num Rated slip M2 Rated X 11 0h1C0B d Slip 0 3000 rpm X A 7 42 olo Motor rated M2 Rated 12 0h1C0C an Cum 10 1000 0 A Dependent X A 7 42 olo on motor 13 0h1C0D Motor no M2 Noload 9 5 000 01a setting x A 742 lolo load current Curr 14 Oh1COE Motor rated M2 Rated 470 480 v X A 742 O O voltage Volt Motor M2 3 15 Oh1COF efficiency Efficiency 70 100 X A 7 42 OJO Displayed when any of In 65 71 is set to 2nd MOTOR LSis 10 39 10 Table of Functions C icati LCD Initial Control ommunication Y nita address display Setting range value 16 0h1C10 Load inertia M2 Inertia 0 8 X A 7 42 olo rate Rt 17 stator M2 Rs 0 0 9 999 O X A 742 O O resistor Leakage de 0 000 9 999 n 18 Md et nce M2 Ls
227. n Communication 20 U D Clear 77 0h174D multi function Virtual DI 8 Analo 0 None O A 9 27 oyo input 8 Hold l Term 22 Clear PID 23 Openloop 24 P Gain2 25 XCEL Stop 26 2nd Motor 34 Pre Excite 38 Timer In 40 dis Aux Ref 46 FWD JOG 47 REV JOG 49 XCEL H Communication multi function Virt DI 86 0h1756 input Status 0 X A 9 5 olo monitoring 10 30 LSIS 10 Table of Functions Control Communication LCD Setting Initial Reference mode No address Name display range value Property page 80 Communication Comm 94 x data upload Update 4 Yes 0 No IA olo 8 CM 94 code will be displayed only after installing the communication option card LSTsS 10 31 10 9 Application Function Group PAR AP e icati LCD Initial Ref one ommunication nitia eference mode address display Setting range value 00 Jump code Jump Code 1 99 20 O A oO 0 Application E None 0 01 0h1801 function App Mode X A olo selection None 2 Proc PID 2016 0h1810 PID output PID Output 0 00 JA 715 lolo monitor PID reference PID Ref 2 17 0h1811 A AR 9 50 00 A 7 16 olo PID feedback PID Fdb e i o 18 0h1812 rue wate 9 0 00 JA 7 16 olo PID reference 100 00 19 0h1813 setting PID Ref Set 100 00 50 00 O A 7 16 O O 0 Keypad 1 V1 3 V2 K 20 W
228. n the item defined as No 17 PID Ref Value out of CNF 06 08 in Config Mode CNF AP 21 PID F B Source Select the feedback input in PID control Among the reference input types you can select inputs except keypad input Keypad 1 Keypad 2 You cannot set the feedback by using the same input with the type selected in the reference For instance if you select AP 20 Ref Source as No 1 V1 terminal you have to select inputs except V1 in AP 21 PID F B Source When using LCD keypad you can monitor feedback flow by selecting No 18 PID Fbk Value among CNF 06 08 AP 22 PID P Gain AP 26 P Gain Scale Define the output rate for the difference error between the reference and feedback If P gain is set to 50 50 of errors are outputted The range of P gain is from 0 0 to 1000 0 If you need rates lower than 0 1 use P Gain Scale in AP 26 AP 23 PID I Time Define the time for outputting the accumulated error value Define the time until when 100 output is reached if error is 100 If the integral time PID I Time is set to one second 100 is outputted in one second if error is 100 You can use the integral time to reduce the normal error Set the function of the multi function terminal block to No 21 I Term Clear and turn on the terminal block to delete all accumulated integral volume AP 24 PID D Time Define the output value for the error s change rate If the differential time PID D Time is set to 1 ms 1 is outputted every 10 ms whe
229. n the motor capacity 4 2 Group Dedicated for LCD Loader 10 41 Hide parameter mode ies 7 49 How to calculate the final frequency command 7 4 S100 Expansion Common Area Parameeter 9 20 In Case of Changing Frequency to Revolution 6 13 Initial excitation isisisi eiiis ieis 7 29 Input and Output Rating eeeeeen 2 1 Input Power Frequency Selection 7 46 Input terminal block function group se 10 19 Installation and Commissioning Procedures Installation Checklist Inverter control area parameter 9 28 Inverter Input Voltage Selection 7 46 Inverter memory control area parameter 9 30 Inverter monitoring area parameter 9 20 Inverter Overload eese Keypad based jog operation sssssesssss Keypad Command Loss keypad Language Selection Keypad Operating Command Kinetic Energy Buffering eeeeeee Limiting Frequency Using the Maximum Frequency and the Start Frequency seen 6 38 Limiting Frequency Using the Upper and Lower Limit of FrogUOnNCy soni LIO ii A A lt A O O TO Linear V F Pattern Operation Local Remote
230. n the rate of change per second is 100 AP 25 PID F Gain You can add the defined target volume to PID output and define the rate for it You can get a fast response 7 18 LSIs 7 Application Functions AP 27 PID Out LPF Use this when the PID controller output changes too fast or the entire system becomes unstable as the oscillation gets severe Usually small values default value is 0 are used to increase the response but you can increase stability by using large values If you use large values the PID controller output becomes more stable but the response may be slow AP 29 PID Limit Hi AP 30 PID Limit Lo Limit the output of PID controller AP 32 PID Out Scale Adjust the output of the controller AP 42 PID Unit Sel Define the unit of control volume applied only on LCD keypad Table 7 10 AP 42 PID Unit Sel setting types and functions Seiting type Function 0 Indicate it in percentage without a physical quantity 1 Bar 2 mBar 3 p Pressure You can select various units of pressure a 4 kPa 5 Hz l z Speed Indicate the inverter output frequency or motor rotation speed rpm 7 V Voltage 8 Current 9 kW Wattage Indicated in voltage current wattage or horse power 10 HP Horse power 11 C i8 gt Temperature Indicate in Celsius or Fahrenheit AP 43 PID Unit Gain AP 44 PID Unit Scale Adjust the size to suit the unit select
231. nal at 5 gain variable from In 01 to In 16 are the initial values and In 06 V1 polarity is set as bipolar itis possible to fine tune up to 33 00 27 00 Hz bA 01 Aux Ref Src Select the input type to be used as aux speed Table 7 2 Aux speed setting types Setting type Function 0 None No aux speed operation 1 vi Select the voltage input terminal of the control terminal block as aux speed command 3 v2 Select the voltage input of terminal I2 SW2 should be set as V as aux speed command 4 12 Select the current input of terminal 12 SW2 should be set as l as aux speed command 5 Pulse Select pulse row input of terminal Tl as aux speed command LSis 7 3 7 Application Functions bA 02 Aux Calc Type You can determine the size of aux speed by using the gain bA 03 Aux Ref Gain and then use the four rules of arithmetic addition subtraction multiplication and division to set the application rate of the main speed Table 7 3 How to calculate the final command frequency Setting type Formula How to calculate the final frequency command 0 M G A M Hz G A Hz Main speed command value bA03 x bAO1 x INO1 1 M G A M Hz G A Main speed command value x bA03 x bA01 2 M G A M Hz G A Main speed command value bA03 x bA01 T 3T0 1 ATO Main speed command value Main speed 3 Mee Mine MIFZ ADS Ae command value x bA03 x
232. nction 9 3 100 Expansion Common Area Parameter B Inverter monitoring area parameter all read only Communication Address Parameter Assigned content by bit 0h0300 Inverter model S100 0006h 0h0301 Inverter capacity 0 4 kW 1900h 0 75 kW 3200h 1 1 kW 4011h 1 5 kW 4015h 2 2 kW 4022h 3 0 kW 4030h 3 7 kW 4037h 4 0 kW 4040h 5 5 kW 4055h 7 5 kW 4075h 11 kW 40BOh 15 kW 40F0h 18 5 kW 4125h 22 kW 4160h 0h0302 Types of inverter input voltage power Single phase 3 phase Cooling method 100 V single phase self cooling 0120h 100 V single phase forced cooling 0121h 200 V single phase self cooling 0220h 200 V 3 phase self cooling 0230h 200 V single phase forced cooling 0221h 200 V 3 phase forced cooling 0231h 400 V single phase self cooling 0420h 400 V 3 phase self cooling 0430h 400 V single phase forced cooling 0421h 400 V 3 phase forced cooling 0431h 0h0303 Inverter S W version Ex 0h0100 Version 1 00 0h0101 Version 1 01 0h0304 Reserved 0h0305 LSis 9 21 Inverter operation state B15 0 Normal state B14 4 Warning occurred 8 Fault occurred Bis operates according to the set value of Pr 30 B12 Trip Out Mode 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Assigned con
233. ncy When changing the carrier frequency refer to Figure 2 5 for heavy load and Figure 2 6 for light load LSLV S100 continuous rated current heavy duty 100 0 80 0 60 0 200V 40 0 400V 20 096 96 ju amp uno paje snonunuoo 0 0 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Preset carrier frequency kHz Figure 2 5 Continuous rated current for heavy load LSLV S100 continuous rated current normal duty 10005 ue oL 100 0 9 95 096 3 800 90 0 85 0 E o 5 60 0 El 2 5 5kW 2 o 40 0 i Ss S 20 0 3 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 Preset carrier frequency kHz Figure 2 6 Continuous rated current for light load 5 5 kW 200 V LSis 2 13 2 Standard 2 2 2 Rated Current Derating for Input Voltage The rated current capacity changes according to the inverter input voltage Refer to Figure 2 7 and 2 8 200V Type 120 100 PUR Be m 8096 4 o e o g 3 60 fo 5 2 E S 40 20 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 Input voltage V Figure 2 7 3 phase 200 V type continuous rated current 400V Type 120 100 N E mR B8 m2 1 y 8064 m o Qa 2 60 E El Z 40 20 0 380 400 420 440 460 480 500 520 Input voltage V Figure 2 8 3 phase 400 V type continuous rated current 244 LSis
234. nd 33 of terminal output group to No 7 UnderLoad signal is output in underload warning condition Pr 29 UL LF Level Pr 30 UL BF Level Set the range necessary for underload detection depending on the type of load Set underload rate at twice the operation frequency of motor rated slip speed bA 12 Rated Slip at Pr 27 Underload upper limit level Underload lower limit level Set underload rate at base frequency dr 18 Base Freq at Pr 28 When variable torque is Output current Pr 30 Pr 29 Rated slip 2 Output frequency Base Frequency Figure 8 11 Setting underload rate normal duty required like fan and pump set Pr 04 Load Duty load rate to 0 Normal Duty normal load rate In case of No 1 Heavy Duty heavy load rate set it at the load operated at constant torque like elevator and conveyor Pr 26 UL Warn Time Pr 28 UL Trip Time Protection function operates when underload level condition explained above is maintained during set warning time or fault time This Output current Pr 30 Rated slip 2 Output frequency Figure 8 12 Setting Heavy load rate heavy duty function does not operate in case of energy saving operation Ad 50 E Save Mode LSis 8 15 8 Prot ection Function 8 10 Fan Fault Detection Setting range 8 11 8 12 Pr 79 Cooling fan fault EAN Trip Mode 0 Trip selection Multi function relay OU 31 1 item Relay 1 or Multi function Warni
235. nd Frequency 9 1 5 Command Loss Protective Operation 9 1 6 Setting Virtual Multi Function Input ssssseeseneeeeeneeenennenenn 9 1 7 Cautions When Setting Parameters via Communication seesssse 9 5 9 1 8 Setting Special Communications Area essen 9 6 9 1 9 Parameter Group for Periodic Data Transmission sesesseeees 9 7 9 1 10 Parameter Group for U amp M Mode User and Macro Grp Transmission 9 8 9 2 Communication Protocol oce th tetro eed e edere eri 9 9 9 2 1 ES INV 485 ProtoCol iiic tet tede dt ea 9 9 9 2 2 Detailed Read Protocol sss 9 10 9 2 3 Detailed Write Protocol mtt ret er ted bert ted d edi egets 9 11 9 2 4 Monitor Registration Detailed Protocol seee 9 12 9 2 5 Modbus FETU Protocol i hei ete eee ee 9 15 Table of Contents 9 3 9 2 6 Existing iS5 iP5 iV5 iG5 Compatible Common Area Parameter 9 17 100 Expansion Common Area Parameter c ococcinoccccnnccccnononcnnonnncanonnncnnannnca nano cnn nana cnn rannncnnnns 9 21 10 Table of FUNCUIONS iii ida 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 Operation Group ooo RN pU Uu EK eI ue ERR Drive group PARS dL ieu Basic function group PAR gt BA iaiia aa Expanded
236. ne neret eren tnit reset eren nnne tense rennen nnne nnns Figure 6 29 Decelerationtstop zi REI ERES RE UE AE AE I AEEA LAENE EEEREN Ete Figure 6 30 Stop after DG Dakota EE RUE Eee eve a RR g ar Fig re 6 31 Free r n stOp ens tee fre B e padece SE eve oe page dp ue RRA Figure 6 32 Limiting frequency using the upper and lower limit of frequency seeeem eme Figure 6 33 Frequency jump eere enero Figure 7 1 Setting the override frequency using the aux frequency command Figure 7 2 Terminal setting usui ertet O OT Figure 7 3 Terminal block based jog operation Figure 7 4 Terminal block based jog operation 2 xv LSIs Table of Contents Figure 7 5 Keypad based jog Operation creer enero tnnt nenne ode kann in aro eaa ne ako no du a erben Figure 7 6 W D Save Mod graph ciara ic erre certe et eee ta ie Eigur 757 Px Defir graph eiue dt eut e mdp eed eee tete ce ope t eee dt ea cep asa ele eae bd Figure 7 8 Terminal Wi tati e ttn e nae d e need e E ae te e ebd re dedu d tegat p Eget ved dug tix Figure 7 9 3 Wire Operation PR Fig re 7 10 Safe operation moder ii Seinen EE eatin an dain eer Figures 1 1 Dwell operatlOn A a Ei Figure 7 12 Acceleration dwell omocoommmmncscccononcannnannencnocnononranenanenennononnanonononononanaonca nn nono ne nononannonsone nene nenonacnnnnnseranononenanacnans Figure 13 Deceleration WEI hocico O Figure 7 14 Slip co
237. ng OU 33 output 1 item Q1 Define When Pr 79 cooling fan fault mode is set to No 0 Trip inverter output is blocked and fan fault is displayed when cooling fan error is detected When it is set to No 1 Warning and multi function output terminal or relay to No 8 FAN Warning is selected fan error signal is output and operation continues However when inside temperature of the inverter rises above a certain temperature output is blocked due to heat sink overheat Selection of Operation in Case of Low Voltage Fault A on Low voltage fault Pr judgement delay time LVT Delay Sec Multi function relay Qu al 1 item Relay 1 11 Low Voltage Multi function eu 93 output 1 item Q1 Define When inverter input power is lost and internal DC link voltage drops below the trip threshold inverter stops output and Low Voltage fault is displayed When Pr 81 LVT Delay is set and low voltage fault occurs inverter blocks output and fault occurs after a set time is passed Warning signal for low voltage fault can be output using multi function output or relay However LVT Delay time does not apply for warning signal Output Block by Multi Function Terminal e 65 Setting Px terminal Px Define 5 71 function Px P1 P7 When the operation of multi function input terminal is set to No 5 BX and it is turned on during operation inverter blocks output and BX is di
238. ng behavior Forward output frequency 10 0 v to 0 10 Input voltage Reverse output frequency Figure 6 6 Output frequency for the bidirectional voltage input 10 to 10 V In 12 V1 volt x1 In 15 V1 Perc y2 Able to set the gradient of output frequency offset value etc for the magnitude of the negative input voltage as follows Example If the minimum and maximum negative input voltages of V1 are 2 V and 8 V respectively and the output ratios to them are set to 10 and 80 accordingly the output frequency will vary between 6 Hz and 48 Hz Vi input ic 44 In 12 In 15 Preset frequency Figure 6 7 Example of In 12 V1 volt X1 In 15 V1 Perc y2 For more information on settings for 0 10 V please refer to In 08 V1 Volt x1 In 11 V1 Perc y2 page 6 5 LSis 6 7 6 Basic Functions The table below shows how to select the keypad or the direction of terminal block and the motor rotation by bidirectional voltage input Table 6 2 How to select the keypad or the direction of terminal block and the motor rotation by bidirectional voltage input Voltage input FWD Forward Reverse REV Reverse Forward B Frequency Setting by Terminal Block 12 Current Input Setting range LCD display Setting Frequency Setting Operation Frq Methods Freq Ref Src S Ig Frequency for 0 Max In 01 maximum analog Freq at 10096 60
239. ng the override frequency using the aux frequency command M Frq setup based main speed frequency command Hz or RPM G Aux speed gain 96 A Aux speed frequency command Hz or RPM or gain Usage example 1 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and V1 analog voltage is aux speed Conditions Main speed M setting Frq Keypad frequency set as 30 Hz e Max frequency Max Freq setting dr 20 400 Hz 7 4 LS1s 7 Application Functions Aux speed A setting A bA 01 V1 expressed as aux speed Hz or percentage depending on the calculation conditions Aux speed gain G setting bA 03 50 In 01 32 Factory default Assuming that 6 V is inputted to V1 the frequency for 10 V is 60 Hz and therefore the aux speed A in the following table is 36 Hz 60 Hz x 6 V 10 V or 60 100 X 6 V 10 V depending on the conditions Table 7 4 Usage example 1 Frequency keypad setting is main speed and V1 analog voltage is aux speed Seiting type Final command frequency 0 M Hz G A Hz 30Hz M 50 G x36Hz A 48Hz 1 M Hz G 9 A 9 30Hz M x 50 G x60 A 9Hz 2 M HzI G A 30Hz M 50 G x60 A 100Hz 3 M Hz M Hz G A 30Hz M 30 Hz x 50 G x60 A 39Hz 4 M Hz G 2 A 50 Hz 30Hz M 50 G x2x 60 A 50 x60Hz 36Hz 5 M HZ G 2 A 50 30Hz M x 50 G x2x 60 A 50 3Hz 6 M HZ G 2 A 9 50
240. ng to the instructions provided by the manual Do not open the cover of the inverter while transporting it Do not place heavy objects on the inverter Make sure to install the inverter in the direction specified by the manual Theinverter is a precision instrument Do not drop it or expose it to heavy impact The inverter requires Class 3 200 V product and Special Class 3 400 V product grounding Immediately place any detached PCB on a conductor if you have detached it for installation or repair The inverter can be damaged by static electricity Do not expose the inverter to snow rain fog or dust Do not cover or obstruct the cooling fan vents This could result in the inverter overheating For safety make sure that the power of the inverter is turned off before installation Ensure that the cables are in good condition to minimize the risk of fire or electric shock Do not use an inferior quality cable or extend the length of the existing cable Use the inverter under the following conditions Item Details Open Type Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 50 C Heavy duty 40 C Normal Temperature duty Enclosure Type 1 Maximum Ambient Temperature 40 C Ambient humidity 9096 RH or less no condensation Environment Storage temperature 20 65 There should not be corrosive gas inflammable gas oil Ambient environment residue dirt etc Altitude of 1 000 m
241. ng unit However the deceleration time may be longer than the set deceleration time be careful not to cause any damage due to motor overheating when using power braking for a load with frequent deceleration Do not use this function where frequent deceleration takes place or the motor may be overheated or damaged The stall prevention and power braking functions work only during deceleration the latter takes higher priority For example when both BIT3 of Pr 50 and the power braking of Ad 08 are set the power braking will function Overvoltage trip may occur when the deceleration time is too short or the inertia is large LSis 6 37 6 Basic Functions 6 19 Frequency Limit You can limit the operation frequency setting using the maximum frequency start frequency upper lower limit of frequency etc B Limiting Frequency Using the Maximum Frequency and the Start Frequency Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range dr 19 Start frequency Start Freq 0 50 0 01 10 00 Hz dr 20 ee Max Freq 60 00 40 00 400 00 Hz requency dr 19 Start Freq Has lower limit function for the parameter with the unit related to speed Hz rpm It is set to 0 00 if you set the frequency lower than the start frequency dr 20 Max Freq Has upper limit function for the parameter with all speed units Hz rpm except for the base frequency dr 18 Base Freq It is not possible to set the base frequenc
242. nged to the volume resistance Press the down key V 4 times to move to the frequency display status Turn the volume resistance to 10 Hz A A JU EB Turn on the switch between P1 FX and CM terminals in the following wiring diagram RUN in operation indicator lamp blinks on the inverter display FWD o o forward direction operation indicator lamp is on and the number 7 e o display shows the accelerating frequency When the operation frequency reaches 10 Hz the display shows the left figure Turn off the switch between P1 FX and CM terminals RUN in operation indicator lamps resumes blinking on the inverter 5 5 display and the number display shows the decelerating frequency 8 mE when the operation frequency reaches 0 Hz RUN in operation and FWD forward direction operation indicators turn off and the number display shows 10 00 our OF R 10 Hz c 6 6 e S voras coa T Frequency rea P1 FX CM OFF Wiring diagram Operation pattern 5 16 LSIs 5 Using the Keypad B If using a potentiometer to set the frequency and using the RUN key of the keypad to issue operation command 1 Power on the inverter Check if 0 00 as shown on the left appears on the inverter display Press the up key A 3 times Moved to the code that can change the operation command method Press the Enter key ENT The operation command method is current
243. nt 100mA Potentiometer 1 5 kO Maximum input voltage 12 V 12 V input 12 0 22 0 20 mA input 0 75 18 0 5 20 M2 0 25 Internal resistance 249 ohm AO Maximum output voltage 12 V Maximum output current 10mA Q1 DC 26 V 100 mA or less EG 24 Maximum output current 150 mA SA SB SC DC 24V and 25mA or less S S SG a AC 250 V 1 A or less A1 B1 C1 1 0 17 1 5 15 M2 6 0 4 i ut 113 DC 30 V and 1 A or less B Recommended crimp terminal size for signal wiring ee 14mm Note 1 when you use the cable tie etc to organize the control wiring do it 15 cm or more away from the inverter Otherwise it may be impossible to assemble the front cover Note 2 Use copper wire satisfying 300 V and 75 limits Note 3 Apply required torque for terminal screw Note 4 When you engage the terminal block use Y 0 4 mm or less a screwdriver of 2 5 m or less width and 0 4 mm or less thickness IE 2 5 mm or less Please ensure that safety input s wiring length is below 30m 410 LSIs 4 Wiring 4 7 Built in EMC Filter The 400 V S100 inverter has a built in EMC filter to reduce electromagnetic interference from the inverter The default setting for EMC filter is on To turn it off replace the EMC filter grounding bolt with the plastic bolt in the wiring bracket B Disabling EMC filter function Fasten the plastic bolt not to use the EMC filter Fasten the metal bolt
244. nt uxestimator pip m 26 0h141A proportional Gain 10 200 TOUT O A 7 26 X O n capacit y Depen dent 27 oni4ip Flux estimator Env Gain 10 200 9 oA 727 X O integral gain motor capacit y Depen Speed dent 28 0h141C A O o on OA za xlo proportional Gain1 motor gain capacit y Depen dent speed S Est on 29 0h141D estimator Gaint 100 1000 O A 7 27 X O integral gain1 due y Depen dent Speed S Est on 30 0h141E estimator Gain 100 10000 O A 7 27 X O integral gain2 c y D Sensorless ied current 31 0h141F controller ACE SEP 19 1000 m oA 727 xlo proportional moron gain em Depen Sensorless dent 32 0h1420 owent ACRSLII 10 1000 on f OJA 7237 xlo controller Gain motor integral gain capacit y Current 48 controler P CRP o 10000 1200 oa 727 xlo gain Current 49 i controller LOA 0 10000 120 oA zer lx lo gain Torque 52 0h1434 controller Res 0 2000 ms 0 X A 7 33 x o ut LPF output filter 0 Keypad 1 0 Torque limit Torque h14 K 2 X A 7 X ae AOS setting method Lmt Src aypan p 3 i AS 9 2 V1 LSTS 10 15 C icati LCD Rof Control ommunicatio eference mode n address display Setting range page 4 5 12 6 Int 485 8 FieldBus Positive 19 direction FWD Trq 3 54 0h1436 reverse irat 0 0 200 0 180 O A X O torque limit Positive dire
245. o 50 X A 6 30 lolx 45 0h122D MEE ace ES 45 00 X A 6 30 lolx frequency 3 3 frequency Hz 46 0h122E user ee ia 0 100 9 75 X A 630 lolx 47 0h122F zc co II AS 60 00 X A 630 lolx frequency 4 4 frequency Hz 48 0h1230 iub v e E pea 100 X A 6 30 lolx Multi step 6 Step 0 00 Max 50 0h1232 speed Freq 1 frequency Hz 10 00 O L OJO requency 1 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 51 0h1233 e speed Freq 2 frequency Hz 20 00 O L OO requency 2 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 52 0h1234 speed Freq 3 frequency Hz 30 00 O L OO requency 3 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 53 0h1235 speed Freq 4 frequency Hz 40 00 O A OJo frequency 4 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 54 0h1236 speed Freg 5 frequency Hz 50 00 O A OO frequency 5 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 55 0h1237 speed Freq 6 frequency Hz 60 00 O A OO frequency 6 Multi step Step 0 00 Max 56 0h1238 speed Freq 7 frequency Hz 60 00 O A OO frequency 7 Multi step ace Time 70 0h1246 acceleration 1 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O A 6 23 OO time 1 Multi step 71 0h1247 deceleration PEC 0 0 600 0 s 20 0 O A 6 23 olo Time 1 time 1 Multi step SERE 72 0h1248 acceleration JMe 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A ole time 2 Multi step Doc 73 0h1249 deceleration 4 0 0 600 0 s 30 0 O A OIO Time 2 time 2 Multi step ace Time 74 0h124A acceleration 3 0 0 600 0 s 40 0 O A OIIO time 3 Multi step Doc 75 0h124B deceleration 0 0 600 0 s 40 0 O A OIO Time 3 time 3 Multi step i 76 0h124C accelerat
246. o change acceleration and deceleration time using multi function terminals Set the time for acceleration deceleration in ACC dEC of the operation group and the time for Acc Time 1 7 and Dec Time 1 7 in the codes from 70 to 83 After selecting a terminal to be LSis 6 23 6 Basic Functions used as the multi step acceleration deceleration time command out of the multi function terminals P1 to P7 set each one of the multi step acceleration deceleration commands XCEL L XCEL M XCEL H XCEL L and XCEL M are recognized as binary codes so the system operates by selecting the acceleration deceleration time set from bA 70 to bA 83 If the multi function terminals P6 and P7 are set to XCEL L XCEL M and XCEL H individually the system operates as follows DecelerationO eceleration1 eleration3 Acceleration3 Acceleration2 Acceleration AccelerationO Frequenc Dec leration3 Figure 6 18 Setting multi step Acc Dec time using multi function terminals Table 5 4 Setting multi function terminals P6 and P7 Acc Dec time P7 P6 0 E 1 v 2 Y z 3 Y Y In 89 In Check Time Using the multi function input terminal with the multi step acceleration deceleration setting you can set the time to check the terminal block input within the inverter For example with the In Check Time of the terminal block set to 100 ms and the multi function terminal P6 input the system will check if there is any input from
247. occonccinnccnnccnncccnonanonncancconononnnnrarn cnn cnn nara cr n carne crm neret Table 7 9 Setting types and functions of AP 20 PID Ref Source oooooccccocccccooccconnocccononcnconnncncanonononncncnnn rca eene enne nnns sensns innen Table 7 10 AP 42 PID Unit Sel setting types and functions nennen nnne nre Table 7 11 0 75 kW and 220 V motor auto tuning example Table 7 12 Auto tuning automatic SettiNgS oconcccinocinocanocanoncconanoncnnnnrncono nono no nnnnrnnn cnn cane n nene rr nnns enne trenes etre nest nne nnns enne Table 7 13 Types and functions of speed search setting eene entere nennen nran ennen Table 7 14 Advantages and disadvantages in carrier frequency size and load rate selection Table 7 15 Factory default carrier frequency per inverter capacity sssseeeeeeeeeneeenenme nennen eene Table 7 16 Rated current guarantee area for the carrier frequency according to the load seeene Table 7 17 Code for inputting the multi function terminal set as the 2nd MOtOf ococonoccconiccconoccccnnoocccononcn nano no nana cc cnn n caracas Table 7 18 Usage example 2nd motor operation function ssssssssssssessssssseeeene eene eene enne ennt entren Table 7 19 Registration of password to be used to prohibit the parameter change seseeee Table 7 20 Registration of password to be used to prohibit the parameter change sessseee Table 7 21 Registerin
248. of the RST Restart function when it is set to Pr 08 0 or Pr 08 1 Figure 6 16 Setting Acc D6c time ta Figure 6 17 Acceleration time set to 5 sec and 10 Hz 30 Hz step operation at stationary state ssseseeeeee Figure 6 18 Setting multi step Acc Dec time using multi function terminals Figure 6 19 Changing multi step Acc Dec time by setting Acc Dec time transition frequency eeee Figure 6 20 Setting Acc Dec pattetn iere cnp tet tute dee ee ded ro Dee eT pasa de Ue pede Do eee p exeo Red Figure 6 21 S Curve SS enne nennen nennen nns enn en tenente tnn rennes ennt nnns enne nennen nnns Figure 6 22 Acc Dec stop command using the terminal P7 Figure 6 23 In the case of operating above the start frequency and then decelerating to stop Figure 6 24 Square reduction V F pattern operation ssssssseseeeeeeneeeeenneenee nennen nennen nnnm neret rennen nnns Figure 6 25 bA 41 User Freq 1 bA 48 User Volt 4 user V F pattern operation ooooccconncccnnnoccccnonnncnnnanananoncnnnann corno na nanancnnnnnno Figure 6 26 Manual torque boost 1 einen reete nderit nbn nono nn none nac envitan aenea ela ehanan taa EES ena e una a aene nena nenne anan Figure 6 27 Setting the motor voltage when the input power supply is different from the motor voltage specification 6 33 Figure 6 28 Start after DC braking ssssesssssessseeeeeeeeeneenneennen nennen nren nne nnnr
249. off SC Safety input DC 24V and 25mA or less power Can be configured to output one of the following output frequency output current output voltage and DC voltage You can select voltage or current output Analog as shown below according to SW3 AO voltage Voltage current dutput e Output voltage 0 10 V terminal e Max output voltage 12V Analog e Max output current 10mA RAM e Output current 0 20mA g Max output current 24mA Selectively outputs one among output frequency output current output voltage TO Pulse output and DC voltage terminal i Output frequency 0 32kHz Output voltage 0 12 V Multi Contact Q1 functional DC 26V and 100mA or less terminal open LSis 4 7 4 Wiring Category bol dni Description of the terminal collector Common l EG t rminal for Common grounding terminal for external open collector power for open collector 24 24 V power Max output current 150 mA DC Relay changes state when the inverter s protection function is activated to cut off Fault signal the output AC 250 V 1 A or less DC 30 A1 C1 B1 output 3 V 1 Aorless Abnormal A1 C1 CLOSED B1 C1 Normal B1 C1 OPEN A1 C1 RS 485 signal RS 485 signal line S S SG Inout Terminal Refer to Chapter 9 Communication p Function Page 9 1 in the user manual Do not use more than 3m remote cable for the keypad Failure of the signals on the keypad might oc
250. ol If the current increases above the size set in Cn 72 the voltage stops increasing and frequency decreases t1 zone If the current falls below the size set in Cn 27 code the voltage increases again and the frequency stops deceleration t2 zone If the normal frequency and voltage are recovered acceleration is carried out with the frequency before trip Cn 72 SS Sup Current It controls the size of the current during speed search operation based on the motor rated current If Cn 70 SS mode is set to No 1 Flying Start 2 this code is not visible Cn 73 SS P I Gain Adjust P I gain of the speed search controller If Cn 70 SS Mode is set to No 1 Flying Start 2 they have different factory defaults depending on the motor capacities defined in dr14 Motor Capacity Cn 75 SS Block Time Starts operation after the output is cut off during the time defined before starting the speed search operation The speed search operation is mainly used for large inertia loads It is recommended to restart after stopping for a load with high frictional force The S100 series if used within the rated output is designed to operate normally for 15 ms or less Instantaneous power interruption If the input voltage to inverter is 200 230 Vac for inverter with 200 V level input voltage or 380 460 Vac for inverter with 400 V level input voltage protection is provided for instantaneous power interruption and the current is based
251. olo time Time 16 0h1310 DC braking De Brake 9 _ 200 50 X A 6 35 cu quantity Level 10 10 LS 1s C D dose LCD Initial Rof Control ommunication l Setting range nitia eference mode address display value page DC braking Dc Brake Start frequency 17 0h1311 frequency Freq 60 00 Hz 5 00 X A 6 35 O O Dwell Acc Dwell Start frequency 20 0h1314 frequency on Fre Max frequency 5 00 X A 7 13 O O acceleration q Hz Dwell 21 0h1315 operation time Acc Dwell 00 60 0181 0 0 X A 713 O O on Time acceleration Dwell Dec Dwell Start frequency 22 0h1316 frequency on E Max frequency 5 00 X A 7 13 O O req deceleration Hz Dwell 23 0h1317 operation time Dec Dwell 6 0 60 0 s 0 0 X A 713 O O on Time deceleration Frequency eed No 24 0h1318 limi Freq Limit 0 No X A 6 38 O O imit 1 Yes Lower limit PER 230 225 oh1319 A eg ood o O E RS Lo Hz Limit Upper limit oe 26 0h131A frequency BOB Limit 0 50 Max 60 00 X A e33 olo er Hi frequency Hz Limit 0 No 27 0h131B Frequency jump Freq 0 No XA 639 lolo jump 1 Yes Jump 0 00 jump 13928 0h131C frequency Jump Lo 1 frequency upper 10 00 O A 6 39 olo Lower limit 1 limit 1 Hz Jump E Waar 29 0h131D frequency Jump Hi 1 Wer Imt 45 00 O A 6 39 olo e Max frequency Upper limit 1 Hz
252. oltage OK inverter terminal board tester R S T phase 1 Is there any 9 Main circuit Main DC leakage l 1 2 Check it 1 2 OK or not capacitors 2 Is capacitor visually OK split or swollen Cooin ell any 1 With power 1 Must be 5 Aor Cooling fan Vibration oF off turn it by turned y roe hand smoothly noise Check display Check specified Voltmeter Display Meter o value value on the value and panel standard value ammeter etc 1 Check it by ii were any hand visually abnormal Woranonor een Motor All noise OK or not OK 2 Check for 2 Is there any bl h abnormal Agee SUG smell as overheat or i damage LSIS 11 13 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection B Regular inspection annually Inspection Inspection What to Inspection Judgement Inspection area Item Inspect method criteria equipment 1 inspect 1 Disconnect megger A inverter and between main short R S T U circuit terminal E ME V W terminal and ground h terminal and then 1 Must be measure from All 2 Is there this section to above 5 MO DC 500 V anything loose ground terminal 2 3 OK or not megger in fastening using megger OK area 2 Tighten 3 es any screws overhea evidence in O i each part Y 1 Is there any Connectn corrosion in ae conductor 1 2 Check it 1 2 OK or not i wi 2 Is there any visually OK wire damage to wire
253. on evasion level voltage DC voltage Vdc 1 j i i I Output frequency Hz status Figure 7 29 Regeneration evasion for press The regeneration avoidance for press only works when the motor operation status is in constant speed zone No operation in Acc Dec zone Even if in constant speed operation during the regeneration avoidance the output frequency can change as much as the frequency set in Ad 76 CompFreq Limit LSis 7 57 7 Application Functions 7 34 Analog Output 7 58 B O 10V voltage 4 20 mA current output LCD display Group Code Setting Setting OU 01 apr edie AO1Mode 0 Frequency 0 15 OU 02 A 1 AO Gain 100 0 07 OU ogi es eee SACHE BISS 0 0 noo OU 04 Anelegouut ao Aer 5 0 10000 ms OU 05 Br c uan GR 0 0 0 0 1000 OU og Analog output AO1 Monitor 0 0 0 0 1000 0 You can select SW2 at the top of IO terminal to change the output type voltage current Select items outputted from AO Analog Output terminal of inverter terminal block and adjust their sizes OU 01 AO1 Mode Select the types of output items Table 7 24 Types of output items Output the operation frequency 10 V is outputted at the frequency set in O Frequency dr 20 Max Freq 1 oe 10 V is outputted at 200 of inverter rated current Heavy Duty Output the inverter output voltage 10 V is outputted at the voltage set in 2 Out
254. on heavy duty operation The DC voltage inside the inverter may change depending on the output load Therefore if the instantaneous power interruption time is 15 ms or more a low voltage trip may occur 7 38 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 15 Automatic restart operation E LCD display Setting range Pr og Selection of startup on RST Restart No 0 1 trip reset Pr 09 Numggrior automatig Retry Number 0 0 10 restarts Pr 10 Delay ume of Retry Delay 1 0 0 0 60 0 sec automatic restart 31 Cn 71 sperd search Speed Search Spe Bit operation selection 1111 Cn 72 Speed search SS Sup Current 150 80 200 reference current Cn 73 Speed search SS P Gain 100 0 9999 proportional gain Cn z4 Speed 6n integral SS I Gain 200 0 9999 Cn 75 Output blocking time Ss Block Time 1 0 0 0 60 0 sec before speed search Used to prevent a system stop when the inverter s protection function is activated Pr 08 RST Restart Pr 09 Retry Number Pr 10 Retry Delay They operate only when Pr 08 RST Restart is set to No 1 Yes and the number of automatic restarts is set to Pr 09 If a trip occurs during operation the inverter starts automatic restart operation after the time set in Pr 10 Retry Delay The number of restarts allowed decreases by 1 every time automatic restart is performed When it becomes zero no automatic restart is performed even if a trip occurs If a trip doe
255. on terminal on off Control EI LCD display Setting range Output contact Ad 66 Ont contol were sid vi method Output contact On 10 00 3 Ad 67 leval On C Level 90 00 100 00 Jo 0 00 Output Ad eg Output contact Of Orte Level 10 00 contactOn level OU 31 Multi function Relay 1 relay 1 item di On Off i tuncti Control i OU 33 Multi function Q1 Define output 1 item You can swtich the output relay or multi function output terminal if the analog input value is above the set value Select the analog input to be used for on off input in Ad 66 and then define the level in Ad 68 and 68 at which the output terminals are turned on and off respectively If the analog input is above the value defined in Ad 67 the output terminal is turned on If below the value in Ad 68 it is turned off 7 33 Regeneration avoidance for Press applications 7 56 B Used to avoid braking in the regeneration condition during press operation While operating the press it prevents regeneration area by increasing the motor operation speed automatically in the motor regeneration status Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range Selection of Ad 74 regeneration evasion RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0 1 function for press 200 V product Voltage level of 350 V 300 T AOD V RegenAvd Ad 75 regeneration evasion Lavel a ee V motion for press product P 700V 600 800 V Com
256. on the jog frequency dr 12 JOG Acc Time dr 13 JOG Dec Time This is acceleration and deceleration time when moved to the jog frequency Jog frequency Operation comman If the jog terminal is inputted with operation command FX inputted the operation Figure 7 2 Terminal setting dr 13 JOG Dec Time dr 12 JOG Acc Time Figure 7 3 Terminal block based jog operation frequency moves to the jog frequency LSis 7 7 7 Application Functions 2 Terminal block based jog operation 2 LCD display Setting pisan dr 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10 00 pape Hz dr 12 cog operation _ JOG Ace Time 20 00 anoo 286 dr 13 jog operation YOG Dec Time 30 00 anoo sse mascara eeu a ccu cs Soa posce Munere ne ER js C uctus Jog operation 1 needs the operation command but jog operation 2 can carry out jog operation just by using the terminal set to FWD JOG or REV JOG During jog operation the priority for Acc Dec time and terminal block input Dwell 3 wire up down etc is the same with jog operation 1 and even if operation command is inputted operation continues with jog frequency dr 12 JOG Acc Time dr 13 JOG Dec Time Frequency dr 11 JOG Freq Figure 7 4 Terminal block based jog operation 2 3 Keypad based jog operation LCD Setting Setting Group Code display display range ESC key function a E a ae selection J
257. osition while used as B contact state normal close when setting it to the above position The order is P1 P2 and P7 from the right A contact state Display B contact state Segment I LCD In 90 DI Status Displays the state of the input terminal block If you set the corresponding bit to A contact in dr 87 the On state will be indicated when the dot mark of the switch is above while the Off state is indicated when it is below It acts in the opposite way when it is set to B contact The states are displayed in the order of P1 P2 and P7 from the right Bit setting state when setting A When setting A contact Display contact On Bit setting off state Off Segment I I LCD 2 The initial value 000 0000 is displayed as HH H H in the SEG 6 42 LSis 7 Application Functions 7 1 Application Functions Various Application Operation Functions of S100 Table 7 1 Various application operation functions of S100 and their usage examples Types of Operation Usage Examples Jog operation Mainly used as manual operation It operates based on the manual operation parameters Draw operation A type of open loop tension control It utilizes the speed difference between the motors that operate at the rate for the main speed command to keep the tension of the materials hanging between them consistent Up down operation Used where 2 switches control output
258. output Default Run Pulse input Pulse output Safety function Default Trip Figure 4 5 Power Terminal Wiring Diagram LSis 4 Wiring Table 4 3 Control circuit terminal description Terminal Terminal m Category Description of the terminal l P1 P7 OR These terminals are digital multi function Selecting and their use can be defined the contact input 1 7 start function CM a Common terminal for contact input and terminal analog input output Power 12V DC power supply for setting the terminal VR fart analog frequency or frequency setting Max power is 12 V at 100 mA F Input DC 0 10V 10 10V used to set yi cen motor frequency speed oleae Max input voltage Unipolar 0 12V Bipolar 12V 12V Analog Input 4 20 mA used to set motor poesi frequency speed 9 T T ma Max input current 0 24mA Input letter The input resistance is 249 Q Signal It can be used as unipolar voltage input V2 depending on the SW2 setting Input 0 32 kHz can be set to the H jos required motor frequency iud pulse Low level 0 0 8V High level 3 5 12 V SA Safety input A If an emergency occurs the motor power can be securely cut off externally Operation is described below depending on the connection status of SA SB and SC Safety Both SA and SB connected to SC iud P Safety input B Normal operation 9 Either of or B connected to SC or Both disconnected Motor power cut
259. pFreq 1 00 T 76 0h134C regeneration Limit 0 00 10 00 Hz Hz X A 7 56 O O evasion for press Regeneration 77 0h134D evasion for RegenAvd 9 9_100 0 50 01 O A 7 56 lolo press Pgain P gain Regeneration 78 0h134E evasion for RegenAvd 20 30000 ms 900 ova 756 lolo press Igain ms gain Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after setting other corresponding codes 8 Ad 03 and 04 can be displayed only when Ad 01 is 1 9 Ad 05 and 06 can be displayed only when Ad 02 is 1 10 Ad 12 will be displayed only when Ad 07 Start Mode is set to Dc Start 11 Ad 14 17 will be displayed only when Ad 08 Stop Mode is set to DC Brake 12 Ad 25 26 will be displayed only when Ad 24 Freq Limit is set to Freq Limit 13 Ad 28 33 will be displayed only when Ad 27 Jump Freq is set to Yes 14 Ad 41 47 will be displayed only when any code value of OU 31 or 33 is set to BR Control 15 Ad 51 will be displayed only when Ad 50 E Save Mode is set to any value other than None 16 Ad 71 72 will be displayed only when Ad 70 Run En Mode is set to DI Dependent 17 Ad 76 78 will be displayed only when Ad 74 RegenAvd Sel is set to Yes LSis 10 13 10 1U Tahla nf Fiinrti Table of Funct 10 5 Control Function Group PAR Cn C icati LCD Ref Control ommunicatio eference mode
260. pensation frequency limit of I Ad 76 regeneration evasion CompFreq Limit 1 00 Hz 0 00 10 00 Hz Hz for press Ad 77 Regeneration evasion RegenAvd 50 0 0 0 100 0 for press P gain Pgain Ad 78 Regeneration evasion RegenAvd Igain 500 ms 20 30000 ms ms for press gain LSis 7 Application Functions Ad 74 RegenAvd Sel Selection of regeneration evasion function for press When the regeneration voltage such as press load occurs frequently during constant speed motor operation select this function to suppress DC link voltage to avoid the activation of braking unit if the braking unit is damaged or its life is shortened due to excessive operation of braking unit Ad 75 RegenAvd Level Setting the level for regeneration evasion for press Set the voltage level for regeneration avoidance for press if DC link voltage goes up due to the regeneration voltage Ad 76 CompFreq Limit Compensation frequency limit of regeneration evasion for press Set the variable frequency width for actual command frequency during regeneration operation area avoidance Ad 77 RegenAvd Pgain Compensation controller P gain setting for regeneration avoidance for a press Ad 78 RegenAvd Igain Compensation controller gain setting for regeneration evasion for press Set P and gains for DC Link voltage suppression PI controller to avoid the regeneration operation area Sod RR Ad 75 regenerati
261. perature of the system to be controlled Temperature control Fi to maintain a constant temperature B PID basic operation This is the most commonly used control type among the automatic control types In PID P stands for proportional stands for integral and D stands for Derivative A flexible control is achieved by combining these three elements LCD Setting Group Code display Setting range Application function Proc z 91 selection App Mode PID ve 16 PID output monitor PID Output 17 PID reference monitor A Value 18 PID feedback monitor pede Value 100 00 5 19 PID reference setting PID Ref Set 50 00 100 00 Jo PID Ref AP 20 PID reference selection So rc O Keypad 0 11 21 PID feedback selection edis 0 vi 0 10 ource 22 PID controller proportional PID P Gain 50 0 0 0 gain 1000 0 23 PID controller integral time PID I Time 10 0 0 0 200 0 sec pp Ie er PID D Time 0 0 1000 msec differentiation time 25 PID controller feed forward pip F Gain 0 0 0 1000 compensation gain 7 16 LS Is 7 Application Functions LCD 2 Seiting Group Code display Setting range 26 Proportional gain scale Ee 100 0 0 0 100 0 96 27 PID output filter ae 0 0 10000 ms 29 PID upper limit frequency PID Limit Hi 60 00 ob Hz 3
262. power failure during the constant speed operation the frequency used for operation is saved in the memory When the operation command is on again or returns to the normal status the saved frequency can be used Use the multi function terminal block to delete the saved frequency Set one of multi function terminals to No 20 U D Clear and input the terminal during stop or constant speed status to delete the frequency saved in the up down operation U D Save Mode Ad 65 Select the terminal to be used for up down operation and then set relevant terminal functions to 17 up and 18 down respectively When the operation command is inputted if the UP terminal signal is on the speed goes up and if off the speed stops accelerating and becomes constant During operation if the DOWN signal is on the peed goes down and if off the speed stops deceleration and becomes constant f UP and DOWN signals are on at the same time acceleration and deceleration stop Px Define Px P1 P7 In 65 71 Memorized frequenc Operation command FX Figure 7 6 U D Save Mode graph LSis 7 9 7 Application Functions Frequency Figure 7 7 Px Define graph 7 10 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 5 3 wire operation B When using push buttons to operate the inverter LCD z Setting display Setting range Operation Operation drv command Cmd Source 1 Fx Rx 1 method
263. put at CM 86 Virt DI Status 9 1 7 Cautions When Setting Parameters via Communication Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting range CNF 48 48 Parameter Save 0 1 1 Yes F Set common area parameters keypad parameters or drive control via communication Then restart the inverter The settings return to previous value Set No 1 Yes at CNF 48 Parameter Save and all set values are saved in the inverter This set value is maintained even if you remove power from the inverter Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed LSis 95 9 RS 485 Communication Function Set 0 to Oh03E0 address via communication and to 1 then all parameter values set currently are saved in the inverter This set value is maintained even if you restart the inverter However it does not work if you reset to 0 from 1 9 1 8 Setting Special Communications Area B Total Memory Map for S100 Communication Table 9 4 Total memory map for S100 communication Communication area Memory map Details SUM CELO CRETA area Md CUTS s SUP ET Areas registered at CM 31 38 0h0100 OhO1FF and CM 51 58 Parameter ici type 0h0200 OhO23F Area registered for User Group 0h0240 Oh027F Area n Macro 0h0280 OhO2FF Reserved 0h0300 0h037F Inverter monitoring area 0h0380 OhOSDF Inverter control area OhO3E0 OhO3FF Inverter memory control area 0h0400 OhOFFF Reserved 0h1100
264. put bA 15 Rated Volt Voltage If O V is set in bA 15 10 V is outputted based on 220 V for 200 V product and 440 V for 400 V product Output the inverter DC power terminal voltage 3 DC Link Volt 10 V is outputted when it is 410 Vdc for 200 V product and 820 Vdc for 400 V product Output the generation torque 10 V is outputted at 250 of the motor rated 4 Torque torque Monitor the output watt 200 of the rated output is the max indicated 5 Output Power voltage 10 V 6 Idse The max voltage is outputted at 200 of no load current The max voltage is outputted at 250 of rated torque current 7 Iqse Rating Torque Current V Rated Current No load current 8 Target Freq Output the set frequency 10 V is outputted at dr 20 max frequency This is the frequency after going through acceleration and deceleration 9 Ramp Freq functions There could be a difference from the actual output frequency 0 10V is output LSis 7 Application Functions 12 PID Ref Value PE the PID controller command value About 6 6 V is outputted when it is o PID Fdk Display the feedback volume of PID controller About 6 6 V is outputted when 13 a Value itis 10096 14 PID Output Display the current output values of PID controller About 10 V is outputted when it is 10096 15 Constant Output OU 05 AO1 Const values QU 02 AO1 Gain and OU 03 AO1 Bias You can adj
265. put contact select No 5 Over Load among the functions of No OU 31 and 33 num If the underload alarm is required select 1 in the No Pr 25 For Ht d Under Load the output signal select No 7 Under Load in the functions of No OU 31 and 33 BUE This alarm occurs if accumulated time is 60 of the level of the ML Inv Over Load inverter overheat protection function Inverter IOLT For the output signal select No 6 IOL in the functions of No OU 31 and 33 This alarm signal can be output even if Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode is rr selected to No 0 The alarm occurs under the set condition in the LL Lost command Pr 13 15 For the output signal select No 13 Lost Command in the functions of OU 31 33 no This alarm occurs if a problem is detected in the cooling fan with r H n de Fan Warning Pr 79 FAN Trip Mode set to No 1 For the output signal select No 8 Fan Warning in the functions of OU 31 and 33 DB Warn ED This alarm occurs if DB resistor usage is above the set value Set 2 the detection level in Pr 66 p Retry Tr Tune Works only when DR 9 is set to No 4 Occurs if the time constant LL Tr of the motor s rotor is too low or too high during auto tuning 114 LSIs 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 3 Troubleshooting The load is above the motor rated Increase the capacity of the motor ity d the inverter Over Load capaci y and the inverter i The setting of the overload fault Increase the setting in the o
266. put frequency is automatically adjusted according to the size of load B Flux Braking When a faster stopping time is required without using braking resistor and chopper unit Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range Stall prevention Pr 50 motion and flux Stall Prevent 0000 bit braking Start Pr 51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 60 00 frequency Hz Stall Freq 1 Pr 52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 180 30 250 926 Stall Freq 1 Pr 53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 60 00 Stall Freq 3 Hz Pr 54 Stall level 2 Stall Level 2 180 30 250 926 Stall Freq 2 Pr 55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 60 00 Stall Freq 4 Hz Pr 56 Stall level 3 Stall Level 3 180 30 250 96 Stall Freq 3 Pr 57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 60 00 Maximum Hz frequency Pr 58 Stall level 4 Stall Level 4 180 30 250 926 31 Multi function relay 1 Relay 1 item OU a m Stall ulti function outpu A 33 item Q1 Define When the deceleration time is short overvoltage trip can occur due to the regenerative energy from the motor When using flux braking deceleration time can be set shorter because the regenerative energy is dissipated in the motor Stall prevention during deceleration and flux braking functions only operate during deceleration To achieve the shortest and the most optimal OV Tripless deceleration characteristics for the load with large inertia and short deceleration time
267. put terminal of inverter terminal block 5 Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed 51 Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed LSis 7 69 7 Application Functions Setting type Function 10 V1 Monitor Displays the voltage in percentage in the above paragraph 9 i If 10 to 10V is inputted 100 100 is displayed 13 V2 Monitor V The input signal voltage of terminal V2 is displayed 14 V2 Monitor Displays V2 input voltage in percentage 15 12 Monitor mA The mA signal value of I2 terminal is displayed 16 12 Monitor Displays the input current of I2 terminal in percentage 17 PID Output Displays the output of PID controller 18 PID Ref Value Displays the Set point value of the PID controller 19 PID Fdb Value Display the feedback value into the PID controller If the torque reference command method DRV 08 is set to a method 20 Torque other than the keypad No 0 or No 1 the torque reference is displayed If the torque limit setting method DRV 08 is set to a method other than 21 Torque Limit the keypad No 0 or No 1 the torque limit is displayed If the torque control mode s speed limit setting method CON 62 is set to 23 Spd Limit a method other than the keypad No 0 or No 1 the speed limit value is displayed WhHour Counter The following is the description on No 5 WHour Counter inverter power consump
268. put voltage V2 Volt x2 0 00 12 00 V 10 O A 6 9 X X of V2 Output 96 41 0h1529 atthe V2 V2 Perc y2 0 00 100 00 100 00 O A 6 9 olo max voltage V2 rotation 0 No 46 0h152E direction V2 Inverting 0 No O A 6 9 O JO change 1 Yes V2 72 47 0h152F quantization o w ss P 0 04 O A 6 9 olo ei uantizing 00 12 input 12 50 0h1532 amount 0 25 mA 0 00 O A Monitor mA display 12 input filter 52 0h1534 time 12 Filter O 10000 ms 10 O A olo constant 53 0h1535 12 minimum 12 Gurr xt 0 00 20 00 mA 4 00 O A olo input current Output 54 0h1536 at the I2 min 12 Perc y1 0 00 100 00 0 00 O A current 55 0h1537 12 maximum gt Gurr x2 0 00 24 00 mA 20 00 O A olo input current Output 56 0h1538 at the 12 12 Perc y2 0 00 100 00 100 00 O A olo max current Changing 0 No 61 0h153D rotation 12 inverting 0 No O A olo direction of 1 Yes 12 e 12 0 00 0 04 62 0h153E quantization Quantizing 10 00 0 04 O A OJO level P1 terminal 0 None 65 0h1541 function P1 Define 1 FX X A 6 15 OJO setting 1 FX P2 terminal 66 0h1542 function P2 Define 2 RX 2 RX X A 6 15 X X setting 72 Quantizing is not used when setting to 0 73 Quantizing is not used when setting to 0 1020 SIS 10 Table of Functions Control LCD display Initial Communication value address Seiting range
269. r key again The code number is displayed again The parameter initialization is 9 dr a3 complete Press the left shift key lt or right shift key f 7 10 dr u Moved to the first code of the drive group O E wgl Ed c3 O ee S E SS LSis 5 15 5 Using the Keypad 5 10 Frequency Setting and Basic Operation Method The following descriptions assume that all parameters are set as the factory default Therefore if you changed the parameters after purchase the parameters displayed may be different from the following If this is the case initialize the parameters to the factory defaults refer to 5 9 Parameter initialization and operate according to the following descriptions B If using a potentiometer to set the frequency and issuing the operation command from the inverter terminal block 1 Power on the inverter Check if the mark as shown in the left appears on the inverter display Press the up key A 4 times Moved to the code that can change the frequency setting method Press the Enter key ENT The current frequency setting method is set to No 0 frequency setting using the keypad Press the up key A 2 times Check if it indicates 2 use the volume resistance to set the frequency Press the Enter key ENT If 2 blinks press the Enter key ENT once more When Frq is displayed the frequency setting method is cha
270. raking DB Resistor 8 13 Usage Precauti0NS oooococcnnccccnnocnccnnancnnanoncnnnananonana na nano cnc vii User Macro Mode Draw Operation Function 10 44 User V F Pattern Operation Warning reete Wiring Checklist E AAA LS values every single customer Quality and service come first at LSIS Always at your service standing for our customers www Isis biz LS Industrial Syst W HEAD OFFICE W LSIS Tokyo Office gt gt Tokyo Japan Address LS tower 1026 6 Hogye dong Dongan gu Anyang si Gyeonggi do 431 Address 16th FL Higashi Kan Akasaka Twin Tower 17 22 2 chome Akasaka 848 Korea Minato ku Tokyo 107 8470 Japan http eng sis biz Tel 81 3 3582 9128 Fax 81 3 3582 2667 e mail jschuna Isis biz m LSIS Europe B V gt gt Amsterdam Netherland W LSIS Shanghai Office gt gt Shanghai China Address 1st FL Tupoleviaan 48 1119NZ Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Address Room E G 12th FL Huamin Empire Plaza No 726 West Yan an Road Tel 31 20 654 1420 Fax 31 20 654 1429 e mail junshickp lsis biz Shanghai 200050 China m LSIS Middle East FZE Office gt gt Dubai UAE Tel 86 21 5237 9977 609 FAX 89 21 5237 7191 e mail jinhk lsis com cn Address LOB 19 Jafza View Tower Room 205 Jebel Ali Free Zone P O Box 114216 B LSIS Beijing Office gt gt Beijing China Dubai UAE Address B tower 17th FL Beijing Global Trade Center B D No 36 B
271. rates and sets the frequency for further operation Set Pr 15 Al Lost Level to 1 Below x 1 Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode to 2 Dec Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time to 5 sec then it will operate as follows Preset frequency a a 44 5 seconds Q1 ra Operation command IS Figure 8 8 Set Pr 15 Al Lost Level to 1 Pr 12 Lost Cmd Mode to 2 Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time to 5 sec In case of speed command loss due to option card and internal 485 protection function operates when there is no speed command during the time set at Pr 13 Lost Cmd Time speed loss judgment time 8 12 LSIs 8 Protection Function 8 8 Usage Setting of Dynamic Braking DB Resistor For S100 series braking circuit is integrated inside the inverter body Group Code LCD display Setting pini Pr 66 dne DB Warn ED 10 0 30 MA A A OU 33 patin Q1 Define scd Pr 66 DB Warn ED Set braking resistor usage ED Duty Braking resistor usage sets the rate at which braking resistor operates within 1 operation cycle Maximum time for continuous braking resistor is 15 seconds braking resistor usage signal is not output from inverter when it exceeds 15 seconds Use correct resistor power rating Watts as overheating and fire can occur if overloaded When using the resistor with heat sensor sensor output can be used as external fault signal of inverter multi function input Example 1 T d ED L x100 T_acc T_steady T _dec T
272. rates the motor to stop Pr 41 Motor Cooling Selects the drive mode of the cooling fan that is attached to the motor Continuous current 96 20 Frequency Hz 60 Figure 8 1 Drive mode of the cooling fan LSis 8 1 8 Protection Function 0 Self cool Since the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis cooling effect varies depending on the revolution Most of the universal induction motor have this structure e 1 Forced cool This is a separately excited cooling fan mounted on the motor This type of cooling is independent of shaft speed and is required for prolonged operation at low speed and high torque Pr 42 ETH 1min Input the amount of current that can be continuously supplied to the motor for 1 minute based on motor rated current bA 13 Pr 43 ETH Cont Set the amount of current when electronic thermal protection function is activated In the range below the set value it can be continuously operated without protection function Current Pr 42 Pr 43 60 Electronic thermal trip time second Figure 8 2 Electronic thermal protection function 8 2 LSIs 8 Protection Function 8 2 Overload Early Warning and Trip Warning signal and troubleshooting information are provided when the motor reaches the overload based on the rated motor current The amount of current for warning and troubleshooting can be set respectively 2 P Setting Gro
273. red Since the motor measures the parameters while it is rotating if the load is connected to the motor shaft parameter measurement may not be correct Therefore in order to measure correctly remove all loads from the motor The rotor time constant Tr however is tuned in the stop position 2 ALL Stdstl Measure the parameters with the motor in the stop position Stator resistor Rs leakage inductance Lsigma rotor time constant Tr etc are measured at the same time If all parameters are measured with the motor in the stop position by selecting 2 ALL Stdstl in bA20 Auto tuning the accuracy of estimating the parameters is a little lower than selecting 1 ALL to measure the motor parameters while it is spinning Therefore the performance of sensorless operation mode may decrease In auto tuning select 2 ALL Stdstl only when you cannot rotate the motor when it is difficult to separate gears and belts or when it is impossible to separate the motor from the load physically 3 Rs Lsigma Measure the parameters with the motor in the stop position The measured values are used in auto torque boost and sensorless vector control Since the motor does not rotate the parameter measurement is not affected even if the load is connected to the motor shaft But ensure that the load does not rotate the motor shaft 6 Tr Stdstl When Control Mode dr 09 is IM Sensorless measure the rotor time constan
274. ree phase 5 5 kW M4 2 1 6 1 6 6 10 10 7 5 kW M4 2 1 6 1 6 6 10 10 11 kW M5 4 0 10 2 10 10 8 8 15 kW M5 4 0 10 2 16 16 6 6 18 5 kW M6 6 1 10 2 25 25 4 4 22 kW M6 6 1 10 2 35 35 2 2 0 4 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 0 75 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 1 5 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 2 2 kW M3 5 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 3 7 kW M4 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 400V 4 kW M4 2 1 6 1 1 5 1 5 16 16 Three phase 5 5 kW M4 2 1 6 1 2 5 2 5 14 14 7 5 kW M4 2 1 6 1 4 4 12 12 11 kW M5 4 0 10 2 4 4 12 12 15 kW M5 4 0 10 2 6 6 10 10 18 5 kW M5 4 0 10 2 10 10 8 8 22 kW M5 4 0 10 2 10 10 8 8 1 Please tighten the terminal screws with specified torques Any loose screw can cause short circuit and malfunction 2 Copper cable of 600 V and 90 C should be used 3 You should use UL approved ring or fork terminal for LSLV0185S100 2 and LSLV0220S100 2 LSis 2 11 2 Standard The total wiring length should be within 200 m Especially when connecting with a remote motor the overcurrent protection may be activated or a device connected to the output side may malfunction due to increase in the ground leakage current within the wiring Therefore when connecting with a motor the total wiring length should be within 200 m Even when multiple motors are connected the total wiring length should be within 200 m When connecting with a remote motor do not use 3 core cable but if a 3 7 kW or les
275. requency 0 01 Hz R W Bi5 Reserved B14 0 Keypad Freq B13 1 Keypad Torq 2 16 Terminal B12 block multi step B11 speed B10 17 Up 18 Down 19 STEADY 22 V1 24 V2 R 25 12 B9 26 Reserved 27 Built in 485 28 Communication Operation command option option 30 JOG 0h0006 Refer to additional 31 PID description B8 0 Keypad B7 1 FX RX 1 2 FX RX 2 3 Built in 485 B6 4 Communication option B5 Reserved B4 Emergency stop B3 W Trip initialization 02 1 R Trip status R W B2 Reverse operation R BI Forward operation F BO Stop S 0h0007 Acceleration time 0 1 sec R W 0h0008 Deceleration time 0 1 sec R W 0h0009 Output current 0 1 A R OhOOOA Output frequency 0 01 Hz R 0h000B Output voltage 1 V R Oh000C DC Link Voltage 1 V R 0h000D Output power 0 1 kW R B15 Keypad Local OhOOOE Operation status i yp status of Inverter 1 Frequency B14 command source erforms 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit communication Built in Option 1 Operation command source B13 performs communication Built in Option B12 Reverse operation command Forward operation B11 command B10 Brake release signal B9 Jog mode B8 Drive stopped B7 DC Braking B6 Speed reached B5 Decelerating B4 Acceler
276. ring NEN 4 3 Wiring Method 1 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 5 5 kW 200 400 V 15 kW 400 V QD Unfasten the front cover fixing bolt to remove the front cover Remove the wiring oN s SA Connect the wiring to the power terminal block bracket while pressing the wiring bracket lock Figure 4 1 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 5 5 kW 200 400 V 15 kW 400 V 1 Unfasten the front cover fixing bolt to remove the front cover 2 Remove the wiring bracket while pressing the wiring bracket lock 3 Connect the wiring to the power terminal block 2 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 15 kW 200 V 22 kW 200 400 V D Unfasten the front cover fixing bolt to remove the front cover 2 Unfasten the wiring bracketfixing bolts to remove the wiring bracket Connect the wiring to the power terminal block Figure 4 2 Removing the front cover and wiring bracket 15 kW 200 V 22 kW 200 400 V 1 Unfasten the front cover fixing bolt to remove the front cover 2 Unfasten the wiring bracket fixing bolts to remove the wiring bracket 3 Connect the wiring to the power terminal block LSis 43 4 Wiring 3 Removing IO bracket 5 5 22kW 200 400V 2 If an LCD loader is used remove the plastic cover DAN SA on the bottom right of the lO a cover NO ATTE Ea Figure 4 3 Removing IO bracket 1 Unfasten the front cover fixing bolt
277. rst time If the parameters appear on the digital keypad in the following sequence set them with appropriate values Press ESC on the digital keypad at each stage to exit Easy Start Start Easy Set select Yes DRV 14 Motor Capacity select the motor capacity BAS 11 Pole Number select the number of motor poles BAS 15 Rated Volt select the rated voltage of the motor BAS 10 60 50Hz Sel select the rated frequency of the motor BAS 19 AC Input Volt set the input voltage DRV 06 Cmd Source select the method of operation command 8 DRV 01 Cmd Frequency select the operation frequency Now exit to the monitoring screen Now that minimal parameters are set to operate the motor use the operation command method set in DRV 06 to operate the motor Do mmo m Can only be set when the LCD loader is installed 7 52 LS IS 7 Application Functions 7 29 EI Other Config CNF Mode Parameters CNF 2 LCD contrast LCD Contrast adjustment CNF 10 Main body SW Inv S W Ver X XX version CNF 11 Keypad SW Keypad S W Ver X XX version CNF 12 Keypad HUP KPD Title Ver XXX version CNF 30 32 Option slot types Option x Type None Fault history A CNF 44 deletion Erase All Trip No Additional title CNF 60 update Add Title Up No Initialize CNF 62 accumulated WH Count No A power Reset consumption CNF 2 LCD Contrast You can control the LCD
278. rward and reverse directions and in both driving and regenerating modes of operation Cn 53 Torque Lmt Src Select the types to set torque limits You can use the keypad terminal block analog input V1 and 12 or communication options to set the torque limit 0 Keypad 1 1 Keypad 2 Use the keypad to set torque limits You can set up to 200 based on the motor rated torque The rotation direction and reverse regeneration limits are set in the following code Cn 54 FWD Trq Lmt Positive direction reverse motoring operation torque limit Cn 55 FWD Trq Lmt Positive regeneration operation torque limit Cn 56 REV Trq Lmt Negative direction reverse operation torque limit 7 30 LSIs 7 Application Functions Cn 57 REV Trq Lmt Negative direction regeneration operation torque limit e 2 V1 4 V2 5 12 Use the inverter terminal block s analog input terminal to set the torque limit Use In 02 Torque at 100 item to set the max torque For example if In 02 is set to 200 and voltage input V1 is used the torque limit is 200 when 10V is inputted But when the function of VI terminal is set as the factory default and the torque limit setting uses a method other than the keypad check the settings in the monitor mode In the Config Mode CNF 21 237 select No 21 Torque Limit 6 Int 485 Use the inverter terminal block s communication terminal to set the torque limit B Voltage compensation Cn 91 93 SL Volt
279. s 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 7 n 4 Maximum 39 Read error response Station ID Error code 15h 01 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 9 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 2 3 Detailed Write Protocol Write request Number of ENQ Station ID CMD Address addresses Data SUM EOT 05h 01 FA WwW XXXX 1 8 n XXXX XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 4 bytes 1 byte n 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 12 n 4 Maximum 44 Write normal response ACK Station ID CMD Data SUM EOT 06h 01 FA WwW XXX XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte n 4 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 7 n 4 Maximum 39 Write error response 15h 01 FA Ww WM XX 04h 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte Total bytes 9 LSis 9 11 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 2 4 Monitor Registration Detailed Protocol B Monitor Registration Monitor registration request Monitor registration is a function that designates data which needs continuous monitoring and updates data periodically In case of registration request for n addresses do not need to be continuous ENQ Station ID Number of CMD addresses Address SUM EO
280. s no occur within 60 seconds after automatic restart the number of automatic restarts allowed again increases The number of max increases is limited to the number of restarts Automatic restart is not performed if the inverter is stopped due to low voltage emergency stop Bx inverter overheat or hardware error HW Diag The acceleration operation at automatic restart has the same characteristics as the speed search operation Therefore the functions of Cn 72 75 can be set depending on the load For the speed search function refer to Page 7 36 f the number of automatic restarts is set the initialization is disabled and motor rotates automatically after a trip occurs 31 The initial value 0000 will be displayed in SEG as nan LSis 7 39 7 Application Functions Y Trip occurrence In constant speed Frequency Voltage Speed search operation Pr 10 Reset S Operation 30 seconds N automatic re start Figure 7 22 Number of automatic restarts set to 2 7 40 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 16 Motor audible noise adjustment Setting Cn 04 Carrier frequency Carrier Freq 3 0 1 0 15 0 kHz Cn 05 Switching mode PWM Mode 1 Normal PWM 0 1 Cn 04 Carrier Freq Select the operation sound generated in the motor The power device IGBT in the inverter generates the switching voltage of high frequency This high frequency is referred to as the carri
281. s U V W The connection between the control circuit terminal forward reverse rotation for the inverter and the forward reverse rotation signal on the control panel side is incorrect Check the forward reverse rotation wiring and make any corrections necessary The motor rotates in only one direction Cause Measure The reverse rotation prohibition is selected Remove the reverse rotation prohibition Ad 09 1 or 2 and try again The reverse rotation signal is not input even if the 3 wire sequence is selected Check the input signal associated with the 3 wire operation to make the correct adjustment B The motor is overheated Cause Measure The load is too high Decrease the load Increase the Acc Dec time Check the parameters associated with the motor and set the correct values Replace the motor and the inverter with those of the capacity suitable for the load level The ambient temperature of the motor is too high Improve the environment to decrease the ambient temperature of the motor The phase to phase withstanding voltage of the motor is insufficient Use a motor whose phase to phase surge withstanding voltage is larger than maximum surge voltage Use the motor only for 400 V inverter Connect an AC reactor to the inverter output side When connecting the AC reactor set the carrier frequency to 2 kHz The motor fan
282. s changed from 50 Hz to 60 Hz all 50 Hz function items are changed to 60 Hz 7 21 Inverter Input Voltage Selection Group Code LCD display Setting ey 220 V 220 170 240 bA 19 Input power AC Input Volt V voltage 400V 380 320 480 Set the inverter input power voltage The low voltage failure level is automatically changed based on the defined voltage LSis 7 45 7 Application Functions 7 22 Reading Writing and Saving Parameters32 etme cen ot CNF 46 Read parameters Parameter Read 1 Yes CNF 47 Write parameters Parameter Write 1 Yes CNF 48 Save parameters Parameter Save 1 Yes This function copies the parameters saved in the inverter main memory to the keypad or copy the parameters saved in the keypad to the inverter main memory CNF 46 Parameter Read This function copies the parameters in the inverter main memory to the keypad All the existing parameters in the keypad are deleted CNF 47 Parameter Write This function copies the parameters saved in the keypad to the inverter main memory All the existing parameters in the inverter main memory are deleted If an error occurs while writing parameters you can use the existing data as they are If there is no data saved in the keypad EEP Rom Empty message is displayed CNFA68 Parameter Save Since the parameters defined via communication are saved in the RAM area they are dele
283. s motor is used the length should be 50 m or less Line drop V V3 X cable resistance mQ m X wiring length m X current A 1000 If you want to reduce the line drop when the wiring length is long please use thick cables At this time lower the carrier frequency or use an output circuit filter micro surge filter 100m Distance between Up to 50 m Up to 100m 109 36 yd inverter and motor 54 68 yd 109 36 yd or longer Allowed carrier 15 kHz or less 5 kHz or less 2 5 kHz or less frequency Short Circuit Rating Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage RMS Symmetrical Amperes for S100 series are 5 000 A WARNING Power supply must be connected to the R S and T Terminals Connecting it to the U V W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter Arranging the phase sequence is not necessary Motor should be connected to the U V and W Terminals If the forward command FX is on the motor should rotate counter clockwise when viewed from the load side of the motor If the motor rotates in the reverse switch the U and V terminals 2 12 LSIs 2 Standard 2 2 Continuous Rated Current Derating for Inverters 2 2 1 Rated Current Derating for Carrier Freque
284. s not blocked Pr 200L Trip Select Selects the inverter motion in case of overload fault 0 None Protection motion for overload fault is not performed e 1 Free Run In case of overload fault inverter output is blocked and motor performs free run by inertia e 2 Dec The motor decelerates and stops in case of a malfunction LSis 8 3 8 Protection Function Pr 21 OL Trip Level Pr 22 OL Trip Time When the current that is supplied to the motor is larger than the preset value at overload trip level OL Trip Level and continues during the overload trip time OL Trip Time inverter output is blocked according to the preset method from Pr 17 or decelerates then stops T Pr 19 t t Multi functional output Xm Figure 8 3 Overload warning and troubleshooting Pr 18 Overload warning is a function that warns of an overload before overload Trip Overload warning signal may not work in case of overload trip if overload warn level OL Warn Level and overload warn time OL Warn Time are set larger than the overload trip level OL Trip Level and overload trip time OL Trip Time 8 4 LSIs 8 Protection Function 8 3 Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking If motor stall occurs due to overload overcurrent is supplied to the motor This might cause overheating and damage to the motor and lead the motor load side system to stop operation In order to protect the motor from overload the inverter out
285. s on the inverter with wet hands Otherwise it may result in an electric shock Do not use the inverter if the cable has been damaged Otherwise it may result in an electric shock Do not place a heavy object on the cable Placing heavy object on the cable could damage its sheath and may result in an electric shock LSis v Safety Precautions Equipment is intended for installation in closed electrical operating areas only Do not install the product near any flammable materials Mounting the inverter on or near flammable materials may start a fire Switch off the power supply to a faulty inverter Failure to switch off the power supply to a faulty inverter may start a fire Do not touch the inverter while the power supply is on or within ten minutes of switching the power supply off Touching the inverter may result in a burn because of its high operating temperatures Do not supply power to a faulty inverter even when its installation has been completed Otherwise it may result in an electric shock Make sure that any foreign substances such as screws metal water and oil do not enter the inverter Introducing foreign substances to the inverter may start a fire vi LSis Usage Precautions Usage Precautions B Transport and Installation Transport the inverter in a using a method appropriate for its weight Do not stack inverters over the limit specified by the manual Install the inverter accordi
286. s set to YES 19 Cn 54 57 will be displayed only when dr 09 Control Mode is set to IM Sensorless In addition the initial value of torque limit will be changed to 15096 when setting the Ad 74 regeneration evasion function 20 Cn 72 76 will be displayed only when any bit of Cn 71 is set to 1 Also any bit of Cn 72 is set to 1 and Ssmode of Cn 70 is set to 0 Flying Start 1 21 Cn 78 80 will be displayed only when Cn 77 KEB Select is set to Yes 22 Cn 23 32 will be displayed only when dr 09 Control Mode is set to IM Sensorless and CON 20 SL2 G View Sel is set to YES 10 18 LS 1s 10 Table af Fier OI ru 10 6 Input Terminal Block Function Group PAR In e icati LCD Initial Sanal ommunication nitia j address display Setting range value 00 Jump code Jump Code 1 99 65 O A O IO Frequency E Freq at 0 00 Max 01 0h1501 for maximum 400 frequency Hz 60 00 O A 6 4 O O analog input Torque at 02 0h1502 maximum ps at 9 9 200 0 100 0 O A s X xX analog input V1 input 05 0h1505 amount NICA 12 00 12 00 V 0 00 O A 6 4 olo display V1 input 0 Unipolar 0 06 0h1506 polarity V1 Polarity q RA X A 6 4 olo selection 1 Bipolar Unipolar Time 07 0h1507 constant of V1 Filter 0 10000 ms 10 O A 6 4 O IO V1 input filter Minimum 08 0h1508 input voltage V1 Voltx1 0 00 10 00 V 0 00 O A
287. se only operates when a certain amount 70 to 80 of inverter rated output current of current is supplied to the motor Pr 06 IPO V Band If an incoming phase is missing or one or more phases are at too low level the DC link ripple voltage can be significant and can damage the DC link capacitors Input open phase trip occurs if the band of the ripple voltage set in this function code is exceeded IPO V Band varies depending on the power supply facility environment When the amount of output load exceeds the capacity of the power supply facility causing input open phase trip during normal operation IPO V Band should be set at a value greater by from 1 to 10 When the amount of output load is less than the capacity of the power supply facility IPO V Band should be set at a value smaller by from 1 to 10 Set the motor rated current bA 13 Rated Curr correctly When the rated current of the motor in use and the set value of bA 13 are different open phase protection might not operate When the load is high and the input voltage supplied to the inverter is small low voltage protection function Low Voltage can operate before the operation of input open phase protection function In this case use the low voltage protection function 2 Low Voltage 2 to more precisely find out the input open phase For more details please refer to 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection Item LSis 8 9 8 Protection Function 8 5 External Fault Signal
288. search function For details on the speed search refer to 7 20 Speed Search Operation Page 7 36 22 Ready ready for operation command Output is on when inverter is healthy not tripped and is waiting for an external run command 28 Timer Out You can use the multi function terminal block input to activate the contact output after a certain period of time Group Code lapa Setting Sande Unit OU 01 i d AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0 15 Group Code Fan Setting Tange In paa o cer De ae se meri E i OU 55 Timer On Delay bs 0 00 MSS sec OU 56 Timer Off Delay po 0 00 000 sec 29 Trip 31 DB Warn ED 34 On Off Control 35 BR Control Refer to Chapter 7 32 16 Refer to Chapter 8 8 Refer to Chapter 7 27 Refer to Chapter 7 26 7 66 LS 1s 7 Application Functions 7 36 Alarm or fault Status Output Using the Terminal Block Multi Function Output Terminal You can use the multi function terminal Q1 and relay Relay 1 to output the inverter failure status Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range OU 30 Fault output item Trip Out Mode 010 bit OU at PUNE ENS Relay lea Tap item Multi function OU 33 output 1 item Q1 Define 14 Run Fault output On 0 00 OU 53 delay TripOut OnDly 0 00 100 00 sec Fault output Off 0 00 OU 54 delay TripOut OffDly 0 00 100 00 sec
289. sensorless vector control the inverter and the motor should have the same capacity If the motor capacity is smaller by two level or more than the inverter capacity there could be a problem with control In that case change the control mode to V F control When operating with sensorless vector control do not connect multiple motors to the inverter output B Sensorless vector control operation method Carry out the sensorless vector control operation as in the following sequence Step 1 Set dr 09 Control Mode to 4 IM Sensorless Step 2 Select the motor capacity to use for dr 14 Motor Capacity Step 3 Input the nameplate information of the motor to use drv 18 Base Freq base frequency bA 11 Pole Number number of motor poles bA 11 Pole Number number of poles bA 12 Rated Slip rated slip e bA 13 Rated Curr rated current e bA 15 Rated Volt rated voltage e bA 16 Efficiency efficiency If there is no information on efficiency on the nameplate use the default value Step 4 In bA 20 Auto Tuning select 1 All or 2 All Stdstl to execute Auto Tuning 1 All is more accurate than 2 StdStl Select 1 All except the application areas where the motor cannot rotate When Auto Tuning is completed bA 14 bA 21 bA 22 bA 23 and bA 24 values are automatically changed Step 5 Define the set frequency Acc Dec time and operation command method according to the application areas before getting into operation
290. splayed on the keypad display In case of BX input information such as frequency and current etc can be monitored If BX terminal turns Off when operation command is input the motor accelerates again LSis 8 Protection Function 8 13 Fault Status Reset Method Setting Group Code LCD display Setting range Setting Px Px Define In 65 71 terminal function Px P1 P7 3 per i In order to reset fault status press Reset key on the keypad or use multi function input terminal Fault status is reset when the function of multi function input terminal is set to No 3 RST and terminal is turned On after a trip condition 8 14 Selection of Operation in the case of Option Card Fault Group Code Name LCD display Setting 0 None Pr go Motion selection OptTrip Mode 1 Free Run 0 3 at option trip 2 Dec Select the operation status of inverter when communication error between option card and inverter body occurs or option card is detached during operation In case of No 1 Free Run inverter output is blocked and fault information is displayed on the keypad In case of No 2 Dec the motor decelerates to the value set at Pr 07 Trip Dec Time 8 15 Detection of Motor Disconnection at Inverter Output Terminal e nee e E Operate under no motor detection Pr 31 No Motor Trip 0 None No motor Pr 32 detection current No Motor Level 5 1 100 96 level No motor Pr an detection del
291. sword is different from the previous password the previous password registration window is displayed Register the new password When registration is completed CNF 53 Key Lock PW is displayed again CNF 52 Key Lock Set if you enter the registered password with the prohibit change function disabled Locked is displayed and you cannot switch to the Editor mode even if you press the PROG key in the function code you want to change to change parameters If you enter the password again Unlocked mark disappears and the prohibit change function is disabled When the hide parameter mode function or the prohibit parameter change function is activated you cannot change the functions related with the inverter operation Therefore be sure to remember the registered password 7 25 Display Changed Parameters Function Group Code Name LCD display Seiting Setting Unit range CNF 41 Display changed Changed Para 0 View All parameters This function shows only the parameters different from the factory defaults Use it when you want to track a modified parameter Select No1 View Changed to display only the changed parameters Select No 0 View All to display all parameters 3 Can only be set when the LCD is installed LSIS 7 49 7 Application Functions 7 26 Add User Group USR Grp 0 LCD Setting Multi Key UserGrp CNF 42 Setting ESC Key item Sel 3 SelKey Delete a
292. system using inverter multi function relay or output terminal Multi function power You can power on or off the output relay or multi function output terminal on off control if the analog input value is above the set value Regeneration avoidance While operating a press prevents regeneration area by increasing the for press motor operation speed automatically in the motor regeneration status 72 LSIs 7 Application Functions Setting the Override Frequency Using the Aux Frequency Command Setting LCD display Seiting range Frequency A Operation Frq Setting Methods Freq Ref Src O Keypad 1 0 12 Auxiliary bA 01 command Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0 4 setting method Auxiliary bA 02 command Aux Calc Type 0 M G A 0 7 motion selection Auxiliary 200 0 5 bA 03 command gain Aux Ref Gain 0 0 200 0 Jo i Setting Px Px Define dis Aux I D 69 71 terminal function Px P1 P7 49 Ref Used when using main and aux speeds to set the frequencies of various calculation conditions You can use two frequency setting methods at the same time to set the operation frequency The main speed can be use to set the main operation frequency and the aux speed can be used for fine tuning during the main operation For example assume that settings were made as in the above table With Keypad 1 as the main speed and 30 00 Hz operation if 10 10V voltage is supplied to V1 termi
293. t Tr with the motor in the stop position bA 21 Rs bA 24 Tr bA 14 Noload Curr Display the motor parameters measured in auto tuning For the parameters that are not included in the measurement list the default settings are displayed LSis 7 25 7 Application Functions 7 11 Sensorless Vector Control Setting dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless Variable a depending on i dr 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity x ihe motor 0 15 capacity dr 18 Base frequency Base Freq 60 30 400 Hz bA 11 Number of motor Pole Number 4 2 48 poles Variable depending bA 12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip on the motor 0 3000 Hz capacity Variable depending bA 13 Ralea motor Rated Curr on the motor 1 1000 A current A capacity i Variable depending bA 14 Motor no load Noload curr on the motor 0 5 1000 A current capacity bA 15 Rated motor Rated Volt 220 380 440 480 170 480 V voltage Variable depending bA 16 Motor efficiency Efficiency on the motor 70 100 capacity bA 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 1 All Cn og inital excitation PreExTime 1 0 0 0 60 0 Sec Initial excitation 100 0 n Cn 10 simount Flux Force 100 0 300 0 o Sensorless 2 Cn 20 gain display oc Shin 1 Yes 0 1 setting Sensorless Variable depending speed controller ASR SL P 5 Cn 21 proportional Gain1 sete so 0 5000 Zo gain1 pacity Sensorless ASR SL Vari
294. t be changed during operation If you set a multi function input terminal to the 2nd Source and turn it on the operation state will be changed because all of the relevant commands including the frequency command and the operation command will be changed to the 2nd commands Therefore ensure that the 2nd commands are correctly set before inputting the selected multi function terminal Overvoltage trip may occur when the deceleration time is too short or the inertia is large LSis 6 41 6 Basic Functions 6 21 Multi function Input Terminal Control Improving the response of input terminals Filter time constant contact type and so on for the multi function input terminal of the inverter terminal block can be set Setting LCD display Setting range Multi function input F In 85 EER on fer DI On Delay 10 0 10000 ms Multi function input In 86 termo ore titer DI Off Delay 3 0 10000 ms In 87 Soles Dno multi DI NC NO Sel 000 0000 E 5 unction input contact In 90 State of TUI IMRCUOH DI Status 000 0000 E input terminal In 85 DI On Delay In 86 DI Off Delay When the input terminal state does not change during the set time after the terminal is input it is recognized as on or off In 87 DI NC NO Sel You can select the contact type of the input terminal Used as A contact state normal open when setting the dot position of the switch corresponding to each bit to the below p
295. t deceleration time starting point slope 2 set deceleration time ending point slope 2 Maximum frequency Output frequency Hz Maximum frequency 2 Time sec S start S end point point Linear Send Sstart Linear Variation of point point delta frequency Time sec Figure 6 21 S Curve Acc Dec pattern LSis 6 27 6 Basic Functions 6 13 Acc Dec Stop Command n Setting LCD display Setting range gt Setting Px terminal Px Define In 65 71 nOn Px P1 P7 25 XCEL Stop It is possible to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate at constant speed using the multi function terminal The figure below shows the use of the multi function terminal P7 Frequency i P7 y z NEED Figure 6 22 Acc Dec stop command using the terminal P7 6 28 LS 1s 6 Basic Functions 6 14 V F Voltage Control Set the magnitude and gradient of voltage output pattern etc according to the output frequency In addition adjust the amount of torque boost at low speed B Linear V F Pattern Operation LCD display Setting Setting range dr og Control Control Mode 0 VIF 0 4 mode dr 18 BaSe Base Freq 60 00 30 00 400 00 Hz requency dr 19 Start Start Freq 0 50 0 01 10 00 Hz requency bA 07 V F pattern V F Pattern 0 Linear 0 3 E The output voltage is increased and decreased at a certain rate according to
296. t is visible only on the LCD keypad 1 When using LCD it corresponds to IN 50 In 52 Step Freq 1 3 LSis 6 13 6 Basic Functions 2 speed 1 speed 0 speed 3 speed RX Figure 6 11 Example of 8 speed setting Table 6 3 Example of 8 speed setting Speed FX or RX P7 P6 P5 0 Y 3 i 1 v E x Y 2 Y 2 Y 2 3 Y v v 4 v v 5 v Y v 6 Y Y Y E 7 Y Y v In 89 In Check Time Using the multi function input terminal with the multi step speed frequency setting you can set the time to check the terminal block input within the inverter For example with the In Check Time of the terminal block set to 100 ms and the multi function terminal P6 input the system will check if there is any input from another terminal block for 100 ms When 100 ms has elapsed it accelerates or decelerates to the frequency relevant to the P6 terminal 6 14 LSIs 6 Basic Functions 6 6 Setting Method of Operation Command 0 Keypad 1 Fx Rx 1 Operation Operation drv command Cmd Source 2 Fx Rx 2 0 4 method 3 Int 485 4 Field Bus F Forward Operation drC Select Salon A Er direction r Reverse Select the operation command setting method from the drv code of the operation group In addition to basic operation using keypad and multi function terminal the operation command is able to use built in RS 485 communication fieldbus opt
297. te canina ancient casitas 1 1 Features iii a 1 2 Delivery Check A O EMS SCaADCIoEMMCI D 2 1 Input and Output Rating 2 1 1 Input Voltage Single Phase 200 V Product sese 2 1 2 1 2 Input Voltage 3 Phase 200V Product 2 1 3 Input Voltage 3 Phase 400 V Product 2 1 4 Gommon Featlres eee erede ledere pies 2 1 5 Dimensions IP20 Type inert rete e reti reta 2 1 6 Power Terminal Block Wiring and External Fuse Specifications 2 11 2 2 Continuous Rated Current Derating for Inverters ssssseeeee 2 13 2 2 1 Rated Current Derating for Carrier Frequency 2 13 2 2 2 Rated Current Derating for Input Voltage see 2 14 2 2 3 Rated Current Derating based on Ambient Temperature and Installation Method 2 15 2 3 Types of Peripheral Devices seeeennem eem meme nemen 2 16 2 3 1 Precautions before Peripheral Device Installation eseeesssss 2 16 2 3 2 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Magnetic Contactor and Reactor Specifications 2 17 3 rE Edo pL 3 1 3 1 Precautions before Installation sessessessssseeeeeeeennennen nennen nnne 3 1 3 2 Installation Checklist nennen emere 3 3 3 3 Installation and Commissioning Procedures sese 3 4 4 Wirinig Ran 4 1 4 1 Wiring Precautions si A aie 4 1 42 O Pree ee re 4 2 43 Wing
298. ted Heavy load 2 5 5 0 8 0 11 0 Output current A Light load 3 1 6 0 9 6 12 0 rating Output frequency 0 400 Hz IM Sensorless 0 120 Hz Output voltage V 3 phase 200 240 V Voltage V 1 phase 200 240 VAC 15 1095 Input Input frequency 50 60 Hz 595 rating Rated current Heavy load 2 0 5 8 7 5 11 0 A Light load 3 9 7 3 10 8 13 9 Weight Kg 0 9 1 3 1 5 2 0 The applicable motor shows the max applicable capacity when 4 pole standard motor is used 200 V product is based on 220 V 400 V product on 440 V For the rated capacity 200 V product s input capacity is based on 220 V while 400 V product s input capacity is based on 440 V The current rating is based on the heavy duty current There is a current limit on output rating according to the carrier frequency Cn 04 settings 5 If the control mode dr 09 Control Mode is set to No 4 IM Sensorless 120Hz is the maximum frequency permitted The max output voltage cannot exceed the power voltage The output voltage can be set to any value below the power voltage LSis 2 1 2 Standard 2 1 2 Input Voltage 3 Phase 200V Product 1 0 4 4 kW Type Name LSLV xxxx S100 2xxx HP 0 5 1 2 3 5 5 4 Applicable motors kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 4 Rated capacity kVA 1 0 1 9 3 0 4 2 6 1 6 5 Rated current Heavy load 2 5 5 0 8 0 11 0 16 0 17 0 Output A Light lo
299. ted if you power off the inverter If you define the parameters via communication and select Yes in CNF 48 Parameter Save the parameters are not deleted even if you power off the inverter 9 Only displayed when the LCD is installed 7 46 LSIs 7 Application Functions 7 23 Parameter Initialization EI Setting range dr 9333 Parameter 0 No 0 13 initialization CNF 40 M lube Parameter Init 0 No 0 13 You can initialize the parameters changed by the user to the factory default You can initialize data in all groups or by group If a trip has occurred or the inverter is operating you cannot initialize the parameters LCD No Name display Contents 0 No No Initialize all All data is initialized If you select No 1 All Groups and 1 Paling All Grp press the PROG key the initialization starts When group completed No 0 No is displayed 2 aor group DRV Grp initialization 3 De group BAS Grp initialization 4 Ad group ADV Grp initialization 5 _ Cn group CON Grp initialization In group 6 lesion IN Grp You can initialize by group If you select a group and press the PROG key the initialization starts When 7 OU group OUT Grp completed No 0 No is displayed initialization 8 _CM group COM Grp initialization 9 si group APP Grp initialization 12 Prgroup PRT Grp initialization 13 _ M2 group M2 Grp initialization 3
300. tent by bit B8 B7 1 Speed searching Be 2 Accelerating B5 3 At constant speed 4 Decelerating 5 Decelerating to stop B4 6 HW OCS 7 S W OCS 8 Dwell operating B3 0 Stop B2 1 Operates in forward direction B1 2 Operates in reverse direction BO 3 DC operating 0 speed control B15 B14 Operation command source B13 p Keypad B12 1 Communication B11 option 3 Built in 485 B10 4 Terminal block B9 5 reserved B8 B7 Frequency command Be Source Inverter operation 0 Keypad speed 0h0306 frequency command x B5 1 Keypad torque Source B4 2 4 Up down B3 operation speed B2 5 V1 7 V2 B 8 12 9 Pulse 10 Built in 485 11 Communication option B 13 Jog 14 PID 25 39 Multi step speed frequency 0h0307 Keypad S W version Ex 0h0100 Version 1 00 0h0308 Keypad title version Ex 0h0101 Version 1 01 0h0309 Oh30F Reserved 0h0310 Output current 0 1 A 0h0311 Output frequency 0 01 Hz 0h0312 Output RPM 0 RPM 9 22 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function Communication Parameter Assigned content by bit Address 32768rpm 32767rpm with 0h0313 Motor feedback speed 0 RPM directionality 0h0314 Output voltage 1 V 0h0315 DC Link Voltage 1 V 0h0316 Output power 0 1 kW 0h0317 Output torque 0
301. tes again 0010 Stall protection at constant speed Similar to the stall protection function during acceleration output frequency is automatically decelerated when the amount of current exceeds the preset stall level while driving at a constant speed When the load current decelerates below the preset level it accelerates again 0100 Stall protection during deceleration Inverter decelerates and keeps the DC voltage of the DC supply section below the certain level in order to prevent overvoltage trip during deceleration Therefore deceleration time can be longer than the set time depending on the load 1000 Flux braking function during deceleration When using flux braking deceleration time can be set shorter because the regenerative energy is spent at the motor 1100 Stall protection during deceleration flux braking Stall protection function and flux braking operate together during deceleration to achieve the shortest and the optimal deceleration characteristics 8 6 LSIs 8 Protection Function Stall level Current A S Frequency EN NA 2 m c m In acceleration In constant speed w Cs DC voltage Frequency Y Q1 In deceleration Figure 8 4 Stall protection during acceleration deceleration and at a constant speed Be careful as the deceleration time can be longer than the set time depending on the load when stall protection function is set during deceleration
302. the interior of the inverter as the power supply supplied by the inverter Communication speed Can be selected among 1 200 2 400 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 bps Control procedure Asynchronous communications system Communication system Half duplex system Letter system Modbus RTU Binary LS Bus ASCII Stop bit length 1 bit 2 bit Frame error check 2 bytes Parity check None Even Odd RS 232 485 converter Computer 9 1 2 Communication System Configuration Inverter 1 Inverter 2 Inverter 3 Figure 9 1 Communication system configuration RS 485 terminal connection Connect to S S and SG Shield line of terminal block Refer to chapter 4 Wiring page 4 3 Number of inverters that can be connected Maximum 16 Number of settable stations CM 01 Int485 St ID 1 250 Allowed communication line length Total extension length is 1 200 m but keep within 700 m for stable communication Please use repeater in order to enhance the existing communication speed when using communication line longer than 1 200 m or increasing the number of devices Repeater is effective when smooth communication is not available due to noise 9 2 LSIs 9 RS 485 Communication Function 9 1 3 Default Setting Setting Built in CM 01 communication Int485 St ID 1 1 250 inverter ID Built in CM 02 communication Int485 Proto 0 TALI 0 2
303. the ratio of voltage frequency V F depending on the fluctuation of frequency It is used for constant torque load requiring a constant torque irrespective of frequency dr 18 Base Freq Sets the base frequency This is the frequency in which the inverter s rated voltage is output Enter the frequency stated on the motor nameplate dr 19 Start Freq Sets the start frequency This is the frequency in which the inverter voltage begins to be output If the target frequency is lower than the start frequency no voltage is output from the inverter If it began to operate above the start frequency and then decelerates to stop however it will stop as shown in the figure below Base frequency Start frequency Frequency Rated voltage of the inverter Voltage Operation command Figure 6 23 In the case of operating above the start frequency and then decelerating to stop LSis 6 29 6 Basic Functions B Square Reduction V F Pattern Operation Operation When Using Fan and Pump Load Group Code Name LCD display Setting 1 Square bA 07 V F pattern V F Pattern 0 3 3 Square 2 This is an operation pattern suitable for a load with the starting characteristics of square reduction such as fan pump etc Select the Square or Square 2 for use depending on the start characteristic of load Square The voltage is output proportionally to the value of the frequency raised to the 1 5th power command
304. time ace Dwell Time 0 0 0 0 10 0 sec on acceleration Ad 22 Dwell frequency on Dec Dwell Freq 5 00 Start frequency Hz deceleration Max frequency Ad 23 Dwell operation time Dec Dwell time 0 0 0 0 60 0 sec on deceleration When an operation command is inputted constant speed operation is carried out at acceleration dwell frequency during acceleration dwell time and then acceleration resumes When a stop command is inputted constant speed operation is carried out at the deceleration dwell frequency during the deceleration dwell time and then the motor stops If the control mode dr 09 Control Mode is set as No 0 V F mode this feature can be used to open the mechanical brake in a lift or hoist application fthe dwell operation is carried out at larger frequency than motor s rated slip in the above load overcurrent flows in the motor damaging the motor or affecting the motor life Frequency well Ad 22 Acc Dwell Freq Starting Dec Dwell Freq frequency Operation command Dec Dwell Time Figure 7 11 Dwell operation B Detailed dwell operation description The dwell operation function is used to secure torque when opening the brake in a lift type load When the operation command is inputted the dwell operation accelerates up to the dwell frequency based on the set acceleration time When the dwell acceleration operation time Acc Dwell Time set in the dwell operation frequency expires the operation
305. tion among monitoring items described above For the power consumption a value calculated using voltage and current is used The power consumption is accumulated every one second The power consumption is displayed as in the following a If itis less than 1 000 kW use KW as the unit and display as in 999 9 kW b If itis between 1 and 99 MW use MW as the unit and display as in 99 99 MWh c If itis between 100 and 999 MW use MW as the unit and display as in 999 9 MWh d If itis more than 1 000 MW use MW as the unit and display as in 9 999 MWh up to 65 535 MW e If itis more than 65 535 MW it is initialized to O and use KW again as the unit and display as in 999 9 kW f If CNF 62 WH Count Reset is set to YES the user can clear the power consumption B Select the status display window Code Function Mode Initial settings display number display CNF 20 AnyTime Para 0 Frequency You can select the variable to be displayed at the top of the keypad display LCD The items include the followings The items without description have the same function with the items described in the monitor mode selection items Table 7 27 Variables to be displayed at the top of the keypad display Setting type Function Setting type Function 0 Frequency 14 V2 Monitor 1 Speed 15 12 Monitor mA 2 Output Current 16 12 Monitor 3 Output Voltage 17 PID Output 7 70 LSIs 7 Application Functions
306. tion is still possible in Local mode But when switching to Remote mode again the inverter will not operate the motor even if the operation command is input to the terminal block That is the motor can run only if the operation command terminal is turned on again after all of the operation terminals are turned off LSis 6 19 6 Basic Functions 6 8 Prohibition of Forward or Reverse Rotation Run Prevent Setting range Unit LCD display Setting Grou Cod p e Selection of None Ad prohibited rotation Run Prevent Forward Prev direction Reverse Prev Prohibited direction of motor rotation may be selected 0 None Both forward and reverse rotations are possible 1 Forward Prev Forward operation is prevented 2 Reverse Prev Reverse operation is prevented When Inverter is operated by LCD Loader REV is limited when Inverter is decreased to Ohz by REV button while FWD driving Inverter maintains present state during driving 6 9 Starting with Power on Power on Run LCD display Setting Operation 1 E Operation drv command Cmd Source or 0 4 2 Fx Rx 2 method Ad 10 Starting with Power on Run 1 Yes 0 1 gt power on When power is supplied to the inverter the motor accelerates if the terminal block operating command is turned on It is valid only if the selection of the drv operation command Cmd Source of the operation group is set to 1 Fx Rx 1 or
307. tion Ly and communication option card you can set the related group functions Application function group ao cei functions for PID control sequence and other Protection function group Ar You can set protection functions for motor and inverter 2nd motor function group ve This is displayed if you selected the 2nd motor among uc multi functional input terminal functions You can set the Motor 2 functions related to the 2nd motor 10 f the inverter is equipped with LCD keypad only the target frequency is displayed 1 You should set the In 65 71 multi functional input terminal function to no 26 2 Motor to display it LSis 53 5 Using the Keypad 5 4 Moving between groups How to move between groups in the first code of each group Group name Sign Moving between groups Operation group Drive group dr Basic function group hh Advanced function group Hg Control function group Ln Input terminal block function a Output terminal block function mi group Ha Communication function group 7 Application function group HH Protection function group Ar 2nd motor function group 3 Motor 2 Hn 12 f the inverter is equipped with LCD keypad only the target frequency is displayed The first code of the operation group is used to set the target frequency Therefore it is set to 0 00 at default but if the user changes the operation frequency
308. tor IP54 FAN Trip The inverter cooling fan needs to The inverter cooling fan should be replaced 11 6 LSIS 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 4 Troubleshooting in Case of No Alarm Display B You cannot set the parameters Cause Measure The inverter is in operation The inverter is in drive mode Stop the inverter to change to the program mode and then set the parameters The parameter access level is incorrect Check the correct parameter access level and then set the parameters The password is incorrect Check the password reset the parameter UNLOCK and then set the parameters Low voltage has been detected Check the power input to reset the low voltage status and then set the parameters B The motor does not rotate according to the command even if the Forward key on the keypad is pressed or an external operation signal is input The motor does not rotate Cause Measure The setting for the frequency command method is incorrect Check the setting for the frequency command method The setting for the operation command method is incorrect Check the setting for the operation command method The power is not supplied to the terminal R S T Check the connection of the terminal R S T and U V W Is the power lamp turned off Power on the inverter The operation command RUN is off Turn on the operation command RUN The
309. ubleshooting and Inspection B The cooling fan does not rotate Measure Check the parameter setting for the cooling fan control During Run fan working at inverter operation Always On fan always working Temp Control fan working above certain temperature The parameters for the cooling fan control are not set correctly 11 5 Cooling Fan Replacement B Fan replacement procedure for 5 5 22 0 kW product To replace the fan press the fan bracket on the top of the product in the direction of the arrow and pull it forward and then disconnect the fan connector Disconnect the fan sE 7 Z F Figure 11 1 5 5 22 0 kW 11 12 LSIs 11 Troubleshooting and Inspection 11 6 Daily Inspection and Regular Inspection List B Daily inspection Inspection Inspection Things to Inspection Judgement Inspection area item inspect method criteria equipment No icing ambient Check for Refer to temperature ambient 10 40 and Thermometer Ambient Safety temperature no hygrometer environment VE Precautions in humidity dust Ada condensation recorder and others page ambient humidity below 50 All is there any Determine it Complete abnormal device vibration or dine pas OK orni Ok noise y Measure voltage Digital Power Is main circuit between 7 multim ter voltage v
310. uency gt Detected frequency Detected frequency width 12 Group Code LCD display Setting Setting range OU 57 Detecteg FDT Frequency 30 00 D OU Na Hz frequency frequency OU 58 peledice FDT Band 10 00 0 00 Max Hz frequency band frequency 30H 25Hz frequency 2 8 Figure 7 35 FDT 4 when the detected frequency width is 10 Hz and the detected frequency is 30 Hz 5 Over Load motor overload Activated when the motor is overloaded 6 IOL inverter overload Activated when a failure occurs due to the inverter overload according to the characteristics in case of inverse proportion 7 Under Load underload warning Activated when underload warning is issued 7 64 LSIs 7 Application Functions 8 Fan Warning Set the multi function output to 8 Fan Warning to inform the user that fan warning has been issued 9 Stall motor stall Activated when the motor is stalled by the motor overload 10 Over Voltage overvoltage failure Activated when the inverter DC power terminal voltage rises above the protection voltage 11 Low Voltage low voltage failure Activated when the inverter DC power terminal voltage decreases below the low voltage protection level 12 Over Heat inverter cooling fins overheat Activated when the inverter heat sink is too hot 13 Lost Command Activated when the analog input terminal of the inverter term
311. uency is changed to revolution for display Group Code Name LCD display Setting Setting range Speed unit dr 21 selection Hz Rpm Sel 1 Rpm Display 6 5 Multi Step Speed Frequency Setting Setting LCD display Setting range 0 St Multi step speed Step Freq f Operation si3 frequencies 1 3 1 3 aid Da requency 0 bA 53 56 Multi step speed Step Freq 4 i Maimiim Hz frequencies 4 7 7 frequency In 7 Speed L Setting Px Px Define ad 9 terminal function Px P1 P7 Speed Mil SOS In 9 Speed H a Multi step In 89 command delay InCheck Time 1 1 5000 ms time It is possible to perform multi step speed operation using multi function terminal The O speed frequency uses the frequency command selected in the Freq code of the operation group Input the desired step frequency into St1 to St3 codes of the operation group and 53 to 56 codes of the bA group After selecting a terminal to be used as the multi step input among multi function terminals P1 to P7 set one of multi step functions 7 Speed L 8 Speed M 9 Speed H respectively Soeed L Speed M and Speed H are recognized as binary code so the system operates by selecting the frequency set from St1 to St3 and bA 53 to bA 56 If the multi function terminals P5 P6 and P7 are set to Speed L Speed M and Speed H respectively the system operates as follows 18
312. ulti function input terminals to No 38 Timer In When the set terminal is inputted the set output is activated to Timer Out after the period of time set by OU 55 TimerOn Delay When the multi function input terminal is off the multi function output or relay is turned off after the period of time set by OU 56 TimerOff Delay P Q x Timer In 1 Timer Out 0U 55 0U 56 Figure 7 27 Timer function of multi function input terminal 7 31 Brake Control Setting LCD display Setting range dr 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V F Ad 41 Brake release current BR Rls Curr 50 0 0 0 180 Ad 42 Brake oe delay BR Ris Dly 1 00 0 0 10 0 sec Ad 44 Brake release BR Ris Fwd Fr 1 00 0 Maximum i forward frequency frequency Ad 45 Brake release BR Ris Rev Fr 1 00 0 Maximum ets reverse frequency frequency Ad 46 Brake PUR delay Bn Eng Dly 1 00 0 00 10 00 sec Ad 47 Brake engage BR Eng Fr 2 00 0 Maximum Hz frequency frequency ou 31 eee relay 1 Relay 1 BR e rum 35 Contro ulti function outpu OU 33 1 item Q1 Define LSis 7 Application Functions Used to control the on off operation of a mechanical brake in a load system using the electronic brake output control The activation sequence differs depending on the control mode dr 09 settings Set the required operation using the parameters in the above table If the brake control is working th
313. up Code LCD display Seiting range f Heavy Pr 04 Load level setting Load Duty Duty Pr 17 Overload warning OL Warn Vee 0 1 1 selection Select Pr 1g Overload warning OL warn Level 150 30 180 Pr tg Overload warning OL Warn Time 10 0 0 30 sec Pr a A SLT ses Free Run fault Pr 21 Overload fault level OL Trip Level 180 30 200 Pr 22 Overload fault time OL Trip Time 60 0 0 60 0 sec N 94 9 TT Pelay Over Load No motor detection 2 OU 33 delay Q1 Define Pr 04 Load Duty Select the load level Pr 17 OL Warn Select In case the overload reaches a warning level terminal block 0 Normal Duty It is used in underloads like fan and pump Overload tolerance 120 of rated underload current 1 minute 1 Heavy Duty It is used in heavy loads like hoist crane and parking device Overload tolerance 150 of rated heavy load current 1 minute multi function output terminal and relay are used to output warning signal If you select 1 Yes it will operate If you select 0 No it will not operate Pr 18 OL Warn Level Pr 19 OL Warn Time When the current that is supplied to the motor is larger than the overload warning level OL Warn Level and continues during the overload warning time OL Warn Time multi function outputs Relay 1 Q1 output a warning signal When Over Load is selected at OU 31 and 33 multi function output terminal and relay output a signal Inverter output i
314. urve ratio when beginning to accelerate The curve ratio is based on 1 2 of the target frequency thus be sure to set the ratio that the curve acceleration occupies out of the 1 2 frequency For example if the target frequency is identical to the maximum frequency max Freq Hz the value will be 60 Hz Thus with Ad 03 Acc S Start set to 5096 the frequency range which the curve acceleration will occupy when the S curve LSis 6 Basic Functions accelerates to 30 Hz will be 0 to 15 Hz and the 15 Hz 30 Hz section will be linear acceleration Ad 04 Acc S End The curve gradient can be adjusted at the moment when the operation frequency reaches the target frequency In the same manner for Acc S Start set the ratio that the curve acceleration occupies out of the remaining section based on 1 2 frequency of the target frequency In the case of setting like the example of Acc S Start the system will accelerate with a linear gradient from 30 to 45 Hz while accelerating with a curve gradient from 45 to 60 Hz and then operate at constant speed Ad 05 Dec S Start Ad 06 Dec S End Set the curve deceleration gradient ratio for deceleration lt is the same as the acceleration ratio described above the setting method Acc Dec time at the S curve Actual acceleration time set acceleration time set acceleration time starting point slope 2 set acceleration time ending point slope 2 Actual deceleration time set deceleration time se
315. ust the size and offset If the frequency is selected as the output item the operation works as in the following dopo O OM in AOLBIS MaxFreq The actual voltage output based on OU 02 AO1 Gain and OU 03 AO1 Bias parameter settings operate as in the next page OU 04 AO1 Filter Define the filter time constant of analog output OU 05 A01 Const Analog voltage is outputted as set in this parameter after the analog output item is set to Constant AO1 Mode 15 OU 06 AO1 Monitor You can monitor the analog output values Max output voltage 10 V is displayed in percentage The following figure shows how the analog voltage output AO1 changes according to the OU 02 AO1 Gain and OU 3 AO1 Bias Here Y axis shows the analog output voltage 0 10 V while X axis shows the 96 value of the item to be outputted For example when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and the current output frequency is 30 Hz X axis is 5096 in the following figure Figure 7 30 Analog voltage output change when dr 20 Max Freq is 60 Hz and the current output AO1Bias 0U 02 AO1 Gain 100 0 Factory defaults 80 0 UR ng MC 50 80 100 0 50 80 100 50 80 100 50 80 100 frequency is 30 Hz LSis 7 59 gt 7 Application Functions B O 32 kHz pulse output Function Setting display Setting range OU 61 Pulse output item TO Mode 0 Frequency 0 15 1000 0 OU 62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100 0
316. verload level Pr 21 is too small fault level There is a problem with the mechanical connection between the Check the mechanical physical motora d the load connection between the motor and Under Load the load for damage The underload level Pr 29 30 is set above the minimum system load Decrease the setting of the underload level Over Current1 The Acc Dec time is too short compared to the load inertia GD The inverter load is above the rated capacity The inverter output is sent during the motor idling or coasting The mechanical brake motion for motor is too fast Increase the Acc Dec time setting Replace the inverter with an inverter of higher capacity Operate after the motor stops or use the speed search function Cn 60 Check the mechanical brake The deceleration time is too short compared to the load inertia GD Increase the deceleration time setting too low The inverter has operated the motor at low speed for a long time Over Voltage Aregenerative load is connected to Use braking resistor s the inverter Check that the input power voltage The input power voltage is too high is below the specified value The input power voltage is too low Aloadthatis larger than the power capacity is connected to the power Check that the input power voltage system welder direct motor is above the specified value Low Voltage connection etc Incre
317. verter when communication error occurred during the time set at Pr 13 Table 9 3 Selection of inverter motion in case of communication error 0 None Speed command immediately becomes operation frequency without protective operation 1 Free Run Inverter blocks output Motor performs free run 2 Dec It decelerates and stops 3 Hold Input Operation continues at input speed command until it reaches speed loss 4 Hold Output Operation continues at operation frequency before speed loss 5 Lost Preset It is operated at the frequency set at Pr 14 Lost Preset F 9 1 6 Setting Virtual Multi Function Input om oe cs at o CM 70 ge Pu nud Virtual DI x 77 x 1 8 input x 0 None 0 49 Communication CM 86 multi function Virt DI Status input monitoring CM 70 77 Can control multi function input by communication common area 0h0385 refer to page 9 27 Function set for each bit operates when desired function at CM 70 to 77 are set and BIT value of the desired function set to 1 at 0h0322 Set operation group drv according to the operation command source For example if you want to send Fx command by controlling virtual multi function input common area via Int485 set CM 70 Virtual DI 1 to FX and give 0h0001 to 0h0322 area Then FX function operates Operates independent of In 65 71 Px Define and cannot be set redundantly Can easily check virtual multi function in
318. y higher than the maximum frequency B Limiting Frequency Using the Upper and Lower Limit of Frequency Group Code LCD display Setting Setting range Ad 24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No 0 1 Lower limit Freq Limit m Ad 25 frequency l 0 50 0 0 upper limit Hz Ad 26 Upper limit Freq Limit Hi 60 00 OD mas Hz frequency frequency Ad 24 Freq Limit When setting to Yes 1 with the initial setting of No 0 the frequency can be set only between the lower limit Ad 25 and the upper limit Ad 26 With the setting of No the Ad 25 and Ad 26 codes are invisible Ad 25 Freq Limit Lo Ad 26 Freq Limit Hi Set the upper limit and lower limit respectively The maximum and minimum settings of the upper and lower limits are limited to the lower limit and the upper limit respectively In addition when setting the frequency with the keypad the frequency can be set between the upper limit and the lower limit 6 38 LSIs 6 Basic Functions Frequency upper limit Frequency lower limit Frequency B Frequency Jump Avoiding mechanical resonance frequency The frequency jump function is to prevent the frequency setting so as not to operate within the resonance frequency band where any resonance may occur in the user s mechanical system The frequency jump band will be passed while the motor accelerates or decelerates thus you cannot set the frequency within the set frequ
319. y the ambient temperature do not allow the ambient temperature of the installation place to exceed the allowed temperature heavy load 10 50 C light load 10 40 C e Figure 3 1 Positions for measuring ambient temperature Since the inverter may be heated during use install it on fire retardant surface Leave sufficient ambient space around the inverter to prevent heat saturation The inverter produces a substantial amount of heat i Ventilatign arecion 10 cm or longer Ventilation direction Secure sufficient 1 97ih or longer 1 97ih or longer V po gt space so that wiring ducts do not hinder airflow i ventilatilin crecen 10 cm or Ventilation direction 1 Figure 3 2 Ambient spacing LSis 31 3 Installation When installing multiple inverters inside a panel select the locations for ventilation fan and inverters carefully When installing an inverter install it vertically on the surface and use screws and bolts to fasten it to the surface Inverter Inverter i A A Cooling air direction When multiple units are built in Ventilation AS 1 Inverter w 4 Inverter Inverter gt A Ventilation gt Inverter SSN m N Figure 3 3 Ventilation fan and inverter installation locations Ventilation fan installation location When installing multiple inverters closely side by side remove the inverter top
320. y time State of P7 P1 RE o Open Off 90 0h155A function DI Status 000 0000 O A 6 42 O input 4 Connection terminal On Pulse input Pulse 91 0h155B amount Monitor 0 00 50 00 kHz 0 00 O A O display kHz Tl input filter 92 0h155C time TI Filter 0 9999 ms 10 O A O constant Minimum 93 0h155D input pulse TI Pls x1 0 00 32 00 kHz 0 O A O of TI Output 94 0h153E at the TI min TI Perc y1 0 00 100 00 0 00 O A O pulse Maximum 95 0h155F input pulse TI Pls x2 0 00 32 00 kHz 32 00 O A O of TI Output 96 96 0h1560 atthe TI TI Perc y2 0 100 100 00 O A O max pulse TI rotation 0 No 97 0h1561 direction TI Inverting 0 No O A O change 1 Yes Y TI 0 0075 0 04 98 0h1562 i Quantizing 10 00 0 04 O A O Codes in shaded rows are hidden codes that are displayed only after other setting corresponding codes 23 In 12 15 will be displayed only when In 06 V1 Polarity is set to Bipolar 24 In 35 47 will be displayed only when SW2 on the IO board is selected to V 25 In 50 62 will be displayed only when SW2 on the IO board is selected to 74 The initial value 000 0000 is displayed as HH I H in the SEG 75 Quantizing is not used when setting to 0 10 22 LSIS 10 Table of Functions 10 7 Output Terminal Block Function Group PAR OU Control z ign mode Communication
321. y when the value set at In 11 or 15 of the input terminal block function group is 100 Example 1 When setting In 01 to 40 00 and other codes up to In 16 to the default value and then supplying 10 V to the V1 terminal the system operates at 40 00 Hz Example 2 When setting In 11 to 5096 and other codes from In 01 to In 16 to the default value and then supplying 10 V to the V1 terminal the system operates at 30 00 Hz which is equal to 5096 of 60 Hz the maximum frequency In 05 Monitor V Shows the magnitude of the voltage input to the V1 terminal Used to monitor the magnitude of the present voltage input In 07 V1 Filter Use this filter when the frequency setting value varies largely due to noisy environment etc Setting the filter time constant sufficiently large may reduce the width of frequency variation but the responsiveness may be slowed The larger the time constant is the longer the time t The set time means the time required to increase the frequency up to approximately 6396 of the frequency set within the inverter when the voltage input is supplied in steps as shown in the figure below 10096 Ip SSE Eee E 6 F 5 V1 Filter t Figure 6 2 In 07 V1 Filter In 08 V1 Volt x1 In 11 V1 Perc y2 Able to set the gradient of output frequency offset value etc for the magnitude of the input voltage Preset frequency In 11 V1 input In 08 In 10 Figure 6 3 In 08 V1 Volt x1 In
322. ypad Layout the Keypad PITT Display derrc MU Mee e SET RUN indicator lamp FWD REV indicator lamp j Mink of iniy or Bigas Shona f Firat io manu arci biw Po tal i A BUCEO Dore ubt f Sieh of Racine Back Mea m val bad aden Riek of aerie e 7 segment tres a Key RUN e STOP RESET Increase decrease A V Left and right movement 4 gt Enter ENT ESC Display FWD Turns on when operating in the forward direction REV Turns on when operating in the reverse direction Blinks when a failure RUN Turns on when operating l has occu red Blinks when accelerating or decelerating SET Turns on when setting the parameters Blinks when ESC key operates as the multi key 7 segment Displays operation status and parameter information Key RUN Operation command STOP RESET STOP Command to stop RESET Command to reset when a failure has occurred A Up Use when moving codes or increasing the parameter value v Down Use when moving codes or decreasing the parameter value 4 Left Shift Use when moving between groups or moving to the left in the parameter setting Right Shift dn moving between groups or moving to the right in the parameter ENT ESC Use when changing the parameter values or saving the changed parameters Jog or remote local switch key Use it to cancel during editing LSis 5 1 5 Using the Keypad

AC Variable Speed Drive - Soprani Rappresentanze industriali

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents